Author: Nik Ranger

Best controller settings in Modern Warfare 2: Aim assist, sensitivity, more DexertoKnowing the best aim assist and controller settings in Modern Warfare 2 could make the difference in winning or losing a gunfight. Here are all of MW2’s best settings to take your game to the next level. For grizzled CoD veterans and newcomers alike, knowing what controller settings to use is overwhelming. It doesn’t help that each Call of Duty game plays slightly differently, requiring playstyle adjustments. Most of these settings come down to personal preference, but we’ve highlighted some of the best Modern Warfare 2 controller settings. Use the information below to get a leg up on the game’s fierce competition. Contents Best Modern Warfare 2 controller settings – Best Aim Assist Type in Modern Warfare 2 – How to find the best Modern Warfare 2 controller aim assist settings – Best Modern Warfare 2 controller settings Inputs Button Layout Preset: Tactical Flipped – Flip L1/L2 with L2/R2: On – Stick Layout Preset: Default – Controller Vibration: Off – Trigger Effect (PS5): Off – We recommend the Tactical Flipped Button Layout Preset on controllers because swapping crouch controls to the right stick from a button input makes it easier to dolphin dive or drop shot in Modern Warfare 2. Flipping L1/L2 with L2/R2 is more of a personal preference, but it is ideal for firing semi-automatic weapons faster or getting the quickest possible aim down sight speed. Aiming Horizontal Stick Sensitivity: 6 – Vertical Stick Sensitivity: 6 – ADS Sensitivity Multiplier: 0.80 – Most players use a sensitivity between 4 and 9. We found that 6 is an excellent middle ground for most players, providing comfortable control but still fast enough turning to allow players to fire back at enemies from any angle. Decreasing the ADS Sensitivity Multiplier down to .80 from 1.00 takes advantage of the game’s strong aim assist and allows for a more precise lock on to enemies. Sensitivity Multiplier Third Person: 1.00 – Ground Vehicles: 1.00 – Air Vehicles: 1.00 – Air Vehicles: 1.00 – Tablet: 1.00 – Vertical Aim Axis On Foot: Standard – Third Person: Standard – Ground Vehicles: Standard – Gameplay Aim Down Sight Behavior: Hold – Automatic Sprint: Off – Equipment Behavior: Hold – Weapon Mount Activation: ADS + Melee – Interact/Reload Behavior: Prioritize Reload – Armor Plate Behavior: Apply One – Advanced Target Aim Assist: On – Aim Assist Type: Default – Aim Response Curve Type: Dynamic – ADS Sens. Multiplier: 1.00 – ADS Sensitivity Transition Timing: Instant – Custom Sensitivity Per Zoom: Default – Inputs Deadzone Left Stick Min: 0.00 – Right Stick Min: 0.00 – Left Stick Min: 0.75 – Right Stick Min: 1.00 – L2 Button Deadzone: 0.00 – R2 Button Deadzone: 0.00 – Decreasing the Deadzones as low as possible results in the best possible precision aim. However, you may need to increase the Left and Right Stick Min if you experience stick drift. If stick drift is still a problem around 15 on either stick, it may be time to get a new controller. Movement Behaviors Sprint/Tactical Sprint Behavior: Toggle – Auto Move Forward: Off (Unless Left Stick is broken) – Tactical Sprint Behavior: Double Tap Sprint – Grounded Mantle: Off – Automatic Airborne Mantle: Partial – Automatic Ground Mantle: Off – Invert Slide and Dive Behavior: Standard – Plunging Underwater: Movement – Parachute Auto-Deploy: On – Sprinting Door Bash: On – Modern Warfare 2’s quick TTK makes Tactical Sprinting dangerous. We recommend a Double Tap Sprint Tactical Sprint Behavior to avoid accidentally having a sprint animation cost you your life during a game. Turning Automatic Ground Mantle Off avoids mishaps for mantling when you didn’t intend to. Combat Behaviors ADS Stick Swap: Off – ADS Interruption Behavior: Interrupt – Weapon Mount Movement Exit: On – Weapon Mount Exit Delay: Medium – Depleted Ammo Weapon Switch: On – Quick C4 Detonation: On – Vehicle Behaviors Vehicle Camera Recenter: Short Delay – Camera Initial Position: Free Look – Overlays Behavior Scoreboard Behavior: Toggle – Ping Wheel Delay: Moderate – Double Tap Danger Ping Delay: Moderate – Best Aim Assist Type in Modern Warfare 2 While playing on a controller, it is essential to ensure Target Aim Assist is On at all times. Besides just making sure that Aim Assist is on, players must consider the different Aim Assist Types. Default: Traditional aim slowdown near target used in Modern Warfare games. – Precision: Strong aim slowdown that only kicks in when aiming closer to the target. Best for accurate players. – Focusing: Strong aim slowdown that also kicks in when narrowly missing the target. Best for players new to analog aiming. – Black Ops: Traditional aim slowdown near target used in Black Ops games. – We recommend using the Traditional Aim Assist Type. Fans of Treyarch and the Black Ops series guns may want to try out the Black Ops setting, but for most Modern Warfare 2 players, Traditional makes the most sense. Aim Response Curve Modern Warfare 2 offers three types of Aim Response Curves, each coming with its own distinct feeling for your thumbstick movements. Here are how the three types in Modern Warfare 2 work. Standard: Simple power curve map from aim stick to aim rate. – Linear: Aim stick maps directly to aim rate. – Dynamic: Reverse S-curve mapping for fine aim rate control. – Most Modern Warfare 2 players will lean towards the Standard Aim Response Curve, but we recommend giving Dynamic a go and learning how to use it. The setting allows for much finer control than the other options but requires a bit of a learning curve, no pun intended. How to find the best Modern Warfare 2 controller aim assist settings As we mentioned earlier, controller settings come down to personal preference, so if one or more of our settings don’t quite seem to work for you, then it’s easy enough to find your own specialized adjustments. Load up a Private Match with bots and tinker around with the settings until everything feels exactly as it should. Now that you have the best controller settings, you can check out some other guides we’ve compiled for Modern Warfare 2: How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2| How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best controller settings for CoD Vanguard: Aim assist, sensitivity & more Activision/Sony/MicrosoftKnowing the best aim assist and controller settings in Call of Duty Vanguard can help improve a player’s game for both veterans and those new to the franchise. Our guide provides a rundown of the best settings to use in the game so you can hit the ground running. Whether you’re completely new to Call of Duty or have been playing the popular FPS for years, figuring out your optimal controller settings isn’t an easy task due to the aim assist and sensitivity settings typically being adjusted with each new entry in the series. While these settings do still largely come down to personal preference, we’ve highlighted some of the best Vanguard controller settings below that are a great way to immediately get the edge against tougher players and hit the ground running in the game. Contents Best Call of Duty: Vanguard controller settings – Best Aim Assist Type in Vanguard – How to find the best Vanguard controller & aim assist settings – Best Call of Duty: Vanguard controller settings Vanguard’s controller settings are filtered into two key sub-sections: controller and gameplay. Controller is your main one here as this is literally the setup that dictates how your aim assist functions. Whereas Gameplay is more tailored to how you interact with the environment, which, although not quite as important, can improve your playstyle with the right settings. Here are the best aim controller settings to get started for each section. Controller Basic Controls Horizontal Stick Sensitivity: 6 – Vertical Stick Sensitivity: 6 – Ground Vehicles Sensitivity Multiplier: 1.00 – Air Vehicles Sensitivity Multiplier: 1.00 – ADS Sensitivity Multiplier: 0.90 – Button Layout Preset: Default – Vertical Aim (on foot): Standard – Vertical Aim (ground vehicles): Standard – Vertical Aim (air vehicles): Standard – Aim Response Curve Type: Standard/Dynamic – Controller Vibration: Off – Trigger Effect: Off – Weapon Fire Threshold: Off – Advanced controls ADS Sens. Transition Timing: Instant – ADS Sens. Multiplier (Steady Aim): 1.00 – Stick Layout Preset: Default – Controller Orientation: Up – ADS Stick Swap: Off – L2 Button min. Input deadzone: 13 – R2 Button min. Input deadzone: 13 – Left stick min. Input deadzone: 8 (increase if you get stick drift) – Right stick min. Input deadzone: 8 (increase if you get stick drift) – Left stick max. Input deadzone: 99 – Right stick max. Input deadzone: 99 – Gameplay Weapons & Equipment Target Aim Assist: On – ADS Aim Assist: On – Weapon Mount Activation: Double Tap ADS – Weapon Mount Movement Exit: On – Depleted Ammo Weapon Switch: On – Blind Fire: On – Movement Automatic Airborne Mantle: Partial Grounded Mantle: Off – Auto. Ground Mantle: Off – – Mantle Stance Queueing: On – Automatic Sprint: Automatic Tactical Sprint – Auto Move Forward: Off – Sprint Cancels Reload: Off – Sprinting Door Bash: Off – Action Behavior Slide Behavior: Tap – ADS Behavior: Hold – Equipment Behavior: Hold – Steady Aim Behavior: Hold – Auto. Weapon Fire Behavior: Hold – Interact/Reload Behavior: Tap to Reload – Scoreboard Behavior: Toggle – Obviously, many of these settings come entirely down to personal preference. You might want to look into the individual ADS settings for each scope, or play with different Aim Assist types, to find what really works best for you. Take a look at our best aim assist settings for CoD: Vanguard below. Best Aim Assist Type in Vanguard Aim assist is a factor that all controller players need to take into consideration and Vanguard offers several types to choose from: Default (Vanguard): Traditional aim slowdown near the target. A wider area where your aim will slow around an opponent. This is the same Aim Assist used in Warzone too, so will feel familiar. – Precision: Strong aim assist slowdown that only kicks in when close to an enemy player. Only use this option if you’re a skilled and accurate player. The slowdown area is minimal and casual players will not like this. – Focusing: Strong aim slowdown that kicks in when narrowly missing targets. If you’re new to Call of Duty, this is your best bet to improve on a controller. – Legacy (Black Ops): Alternate aim slowdown near target. If you play more Cold War than Warzone, Legacy will feel more familiar to you. – For the best aim assist type, we strongly recommend using either Default or Legacy. While some players may want to be experimental and try different aim assist types, these two settings definitely feel the most natural. How to find the best Vanguard controller aim assist settings If you feel one or more of our settings don’t quite seem to work for you, then it’s easy enough to find your own specialized adjustments. Simply, use Vanguard’s Private match option and tinker with the settings to set up the right combat scenario to test stuff out. To do this, follow these easy steps: Go to Vanguard’s main multiplayer menu – Select ‘Private Match’ – Manipulate the settings to your liking e.g amount of bots, difficulty, map, etc – Try out different settings to see if your aim noticeably improves – With enough fine-tuning and experimentation, you should hopefully come up with a winning formula to take into proper multiplayer. Now that you have the best Vanguard controller settings, it’s time to enforce them! Looking for more Call of Duty: Vanguard updates and information? Check our list of guides below: Best CoD Vanguard FOV settings | Best STG44 Vanguard loadout | Best Automation Vanguard loadout | Best MP40 Vanguard loadout | Best M1928 Vanguard loadout | Every CoD Vanguard perk

Best controller settings in Black Ops 6: Sensitivity, Dead zones, Omnimovement, more ActivisionWith the Black Ops 6 Beta now in focus, here’s the full rundown on the very best controller settings so you can quickly jump into the action. From optimal sensitivity to a look at mobility assists, here’s everything you need. No different from previous years, Black Ops 6 gives players dozens of settings to tweak. While it allows for a very fine-tuned experience, tailored to your exact preferences, it can often be overwhelming to figure out what’s best. With dozens of options to pick and choose from, there’s a great deal to wrap your head around. Whether it’s FOV sliders, motion blur, your UI, even just how you aim, you’ve got plenty of tricks at your fingertips to really make the most of the settings. So if you’re playing on controller and looking to get a leg-up on your competition, here’s our breakdown of the very best settings in Black Ops 6. Best Black Ops 6 controller settings How to find and test your controller settings in Black Ops 6 Firstly, you need to know where to look to change your controller settings. Simply tap the start/pause button on your controller to bring up a secondary menu on the right-hand side of your screen. From here, tab over to the settings cog and you’ll find the Controller option two spaces down. Press X on PlayStation or A on Xbox to select the Controller settings menu and you’re off to the races. Inputs First up we have Input settings, which for the most part, are personal preferences. If you’ve been playing FPS games a certain way for years now, there’s no need to change now. But if you’re looking for a clean slate, we’ve got some strong options. Kicking it off is the Tactical Button Layout Preset. In short, this swaps the inputs for crouching and melee. This means you can slide or even go prone without having to move your thumb away from the aiming analog stick, an all-important change. Next we recommend flipping L1/R1 or LB/RB with L2/R2 or LT/RT. While it can feel more tactile using the proper triggers, if your goal is to be as competitive as possible, tapping the shorter buttons makes things much easier. It reduces the overall input time, as rather than dragging a trigger down, you’re quickly tapping a simple button. Next is to disable both the Trigger Effect and Controller Vibration. While it’s a nifty gimmick for campaign play, having resistance in your triggers for multiplayer or Zombies is completely unviable. This won’t come into play if you followed our previous step, however. And as for vibration, it can be a little distracting with all that’s going on in any given match, so turning it off can keep you focused on the game. When it comes to sensitivity, it really is down to personal preference here. Some pro players use a higher setting to quickly turn around and snap onto targets, while others go for a lower setting to maintain accuracy over all else. Picking somewhere in the middle is often best, so we recommend anywhere between 4-6 for your Horizontal and Vertical Stick Sensitivity. Button Layout Preset: Tactical – Horizontal Stick Sensitivity: 4-6 – Vertical Stick Sensitivity: 4-6 – Simplified Controls: Off – Bumper Ping: Off – Flip L1/R1 or LB/RB with L2/R2 or LT/RT: On – Stick Layout Preset: Default – Controller Vibration: Off – Trigger Effect: Off – Dead Zone Input Dead Zones essentially change how much movement on an analog stick is required before the game reacts. AKA, a higher Dead Zone setting means you’ll have to move your analog stick more to see your character move in-game. Vice versa, the lower a Dead Zone setting, the quicker you’ll move in game. Therefore, the best idea is to lower these settings as much as possible until you’re comfortable. In most cases, getting these to zero is optimal, as to completely remove any delay between your reactions and what you see on screen. If your controller is being finicky, however, especially with stick drift, you should raise your Dead Zone settings until it no longer moves on its own. Dead Zone Input Left Stick Min: 0 – Left Stick Max: 0.99 – Right Stick Min: 0 – Right Stick Max: 0.99 – L2 Button: 0 – R2 Button: 0 – Aiming ADS Sensitivity Multiplier: 0.90 – Sensitivity Multiplier: Third Person Sensitivity Multiplier: 1.00 – Ground Vehicles: 1.00 – Air Killstreak: 1.00 – Tablet: 1.00 – – Verticle Aim Axis: On Foot: Standard – – Advanced ADS Sensitivity Transition Timing: Instant – Aim Response Curve Type: Dynamic – – ADS Sensitivity Multiplier (Focus): 0.90 – ADS Sensitivity Transition Timing: Instant – Custom Sensitivity Per Zoom: Off – Aim Assist Target Aim Assist: On – Motion Sensor Motion Sensor Behavior: Off – Movement Sprint Assist: Off – Mantle Assist: Off – Crouch Assist: Off – Automatic Airborne Mantle: Off – Slide/Dive Behavior: Slide Only – Auto Door Peek: Off – Advanced Sprint/Tactical Sprint Behaviour: Toggle – Auto Move Forward: Off – Sprint Restore: On – Slide Maintains Sprint: On – Tactical Sprint Behaviour: Single Tap Sprint – Plunging Underwater: Free – Sprinting Door Bash: On – – Combat Behaviors Aim Down Sight Behavior: Hold – Weapon Mount Activation: ADS + Melee – Equipment Behavior: Hold – Quick C4 Detonation: Grouped – Manual Fire Behavior: Press – Advanced Change Up Directional Behaviour: Ping – Change Zoom Activation: Sprint/Tactical Sprint/Focus – Weapon Mount Exit: Short Delay – Interact/reload Behaviour: Tap to Interact – Sprint Cancels Reload: Off – ADS Stick Swap: Off – Depleted Ammo Weapon Switch: On – Scorestreak Reordering: Numerical Order – Dedicated Melee Weapon Behaviour: Hold Melee – Swap Body Shield and Execution Behaviour: Off – – Vehicle Behaviors Vehicle Camera Recenter: Short Delay – Camera Initial Position: Free Look – Lean-Out Activation: Melee – Overlays Behavior Ping Wheel Delay: Moderate – Double Tap Danger Ping Delay: Moderate – Wheels Behavior: Hold – Best FOV settings Last but not least comes the all-important FOV setting. The higher you make your FOV setting, the more you’re able to see on screen. Lowering this setting zooms in your field of view, meaning you’re closer to your gun, but see less of the map at any given moment. Thus, a higher FOV is always going to be optimal, but raising it too high for your setup can have some negative effects. If you’re playing on a big screen, raising FOV too high can make it tricky to even see enemies in the distance. Try to strike a middle ground of around 110 in the FOV settings. So that’s how you can optimize your controller settings in Black Ops 6. But before you jump into a match and get torn to shreds, be sure to brush up on some of our best Loadout guides for the Beta so you can hang with the competition.

Best Combat Shotgun Vanguard class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Proficiency, Setup ActivisionCoD Vanguard‘s close-range fights need great weapons with amazing power, cue the Combat Shotgun. Here’s the best Combat Shotgun loadout and class to use if you’re looking to dominate a lobby. The Combat Shotgun is a staple of the Call of Duty franchise. First debuting back in CoD 2 as the M1897 Trench Gun, this pump-action monster has been terrorizing players for over 15 years and yet the Vanguard version might be its best form. If you’re looking for a way to control the chaos or just want to give the STG-44 a break, this close-range demon could be just what you need. Contents Best Combat Shotgun Vanguard loadout attachments – Best Combat Shotgun Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment & Field Upgrade) – How to unlock the Combat Shotgun in Vanguard – Alternatives to Combat Shotgun Vanguard loadout – Best Combat Shotgun Vanguard loadout Muzzle: M97 Full Choke – Barrel: Sawed Off – Stock: CGC 3M Adjustable – Underbarrel: SMLE Pistol Grip – Magazine: 16 Gauge 10 Rnd Drum – Ammo Type: Buck and Slug – Rear Grip: Stippled Grip – Proficiency: Vital – Kit: Quick – This loadout is all about maximizing your mobility and increasing the chance of a one-shot kill in each engagement. However, if you find yourself at a longer range the combination of Stippled Grip with the alternate Buck and Slug ammo will give you a chance to win gunfights that would otherwise kill this class’s potential. Our choice for the M97 Full Choke and SMLE Pistol Grip is all about making sure your aim and pellet spread are exactly aligned so that you’ll only have to take one pop at the enemy to secure a kill. The 16 Gauge 10 Rnd Drum is there as an insurance policy, leaving you a little room for error if you don’t manage to drop someone the first time. The addition of the Vital proficiency increases the chance of landing critical hits and when you’re using the Combat Shotgun’s wide net of pellets, at least a few of them should find their way into the high-damage sweet spots. Best Combat Shotgun Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment & Field Upgrade) Perk 1: Ghost – Perk 2: High Alert – Perk 3: Double Time – Secondary: Machine Pistol – Lethal: Mk2 Frag Grenade – Tactical: Stim – Field Upgrade: Dead Silence – The perks for this loadout are all about maneuvering quickly and under the radar, keeping you safe while you stalk your prey. Using Ghost will keep you off of enemy intel, Spy Planes, and Field Mics, meaning you’ll be able to keep a move on without being picked up by the other team. While Ninja would also be a good pick in this slot, using Dead Silence can offload the amount of time your footsteps are giving you away. High Alert and Double Time pair up to make hunting down opponents as easy as possible. The extended sprint time means there’s no getting away from the punishing grasp of this loadout and High Alert means you can react to enemies watching you by moving out of the way quickly. Equipping the Machine Pistol as a secondary and the Stim tactical isn’t strictly necessary for the class to work, but they’re both excellent options for bailing out of bad situations. How to unlock the Combat Shotgun Unlocking the Combat Shotgun is simple. Players only need to reach Level 14 in order to add it to their loadout. As the second shotgun on the roster, it should take no time at all to get this one up and running. If you’re looking to level up fast, check for any playlists, like Das Haus, that feature exclusively small maps with high engagement counts. Leveling up weapons quickly is also immensely useful for Warzone. Alternatives to Combat Shotgun loadout So far the biggest competitor to the Combat Shotgun is the close-range prototype weapon, Einhorn Revolving. The playstyle will change a little bit when using this one, but adding Slug rounds to the mix turns this shotgun into a long-distance monster in a way the trench gun simply can’t keep up with.

Best Cold War TEC 9 SMG class loadout: Attachments, perks, setup ActivisionSeason 5 is finally here and the new TEC 9 SMG is now available for players to use in Black Ops Cold War. Here are the attachments and loadout you’ll want to use to drop the Nuke. The Season 5 update brought a ton of new content to Cold War. From returning maps like Slums, a classic game mode in Demolition, and new weapons, this update is sure to pack-a-punch. With Cold War multiplayer bringing in new weapons, it is almost certain that there can be a meta shift, and this new gun is sure to deliver just that. This gun has a lot of options, as it is unlike traditional SMGs and it’s a semi-auto gun at its base. Here are the attachments to run to help go on high kill streaks in Cold War. Best TEC 9 loadout for Cold War Attachments Muzzle: Burst Fire Repeater – Barrel: 7.3″ Reinforced Heavy – Underbarrel: Field Agent Grip – Ammunition: Salvo 33 Rnd Fast Mag – Handle: Dropshot Wrap – When using this new SMG, players have the option to make this weapon a burst or fully automatic. For Multiplayer, you’ll want to use the Burst Fire Repeater muzzle, as the TEC 9 will become a deadly 3-round burst. Next up is pairing the 7.3″ Reinforced Heavy barrel and the Field Agent Grip underbarrel. The barrel gives the gun a higher damage range, as well as a faster bullet velocity. The grip will allow you to control the recoil better now that this has a faster fire rate, which makes these two perfect for the TEC 9. The Dropshot Wrap on this weapon gives you better flinch resistance as well as being able to drop shot while ADS. This pairs up nicely with the Salvo 33 Rnd Fast Mag, which gives you 12 more bullets and a faster reload time opening opportunities for multi kills. Best TEC 9 setup (Perks & equipment) Perk 1: Flak Jacket & Tactical Mask – Perk 2: Scavenger & Tracker – Perk 3: Ghost & Ninja – Secondary: Knife – Wildcard: Perk Greed – Field Upgrade: Trophy System – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stimshot – While running around trying to get scorestreaks or get a Nuclear, you’ll definitely need the Perk Greed Wildcard. This allows you to run both Flak Jacket and Tactical Mask to protect from the stuns and explosives. Scavenger will let you pick up ammo from dead bodies and Tracker can help you flank opponents and know where they are sitting. Finally, Ghost and Ninja pair up well to help remain sneaky and stay undetected while running around. The Trophy System can be deployed while playing objective based modes like Demolition to help you keep those nades away. Since you’re using a SMG, Stimshot is perfect to keep up the pressure and regenerate your health. How to unlock the TEC 9 in Cold War The TEC 9 is free for all players, all you need to do is reach Tier 31 in the Season 5 Battle Pass. Having done this, players can visit the gunsmith, where they can start leveling up the weapon to unlock all of the attachments and camos. Players can also purchase blueprints of this weapon when it appears with a bundle in the store. Alternative to the TEC 9 loadout If you need a loadout to use in the meantime until you unlock the TEC 9, then the best weapon to use would be the OTs 9. This submachine gun has great damage range as well as mobility, which allows the player to run at opponents and gun them down. For more updates regarding Season 5 of Cold War, make sure to check out everything on our Call of Duty Page.

Best Cold War EM2 class loadout: Attachments, perks, setup ActivisionBlack Ops Cold War Season 5 is live and, with it, comes the new EM2 assault rifle. This rifle has high damage at medium range but here are the attachments and everything else you need to know to pop off in your games. The EM2 is part of Season’s 5 content drop that brought in classic maps, new game modes, and a new Battle Pass. This AR is listed as a powerful weapon that requires precision to truly master. Uniquely, it has a low-zoom, built-in sight that can save players from needing to put a red dot on. Here is everything that you need to know — from attachments to the loadout you’ll want to run while using this gun. Best EM2 loadout for Cold War Attachments Muzzle: SOCOM Eliminator – Barrel: 26.3″ Takedown – Underbarrel: Field Agent Grip – Magazine: 30 Rnd – Handle: Airborne Elastic Wrap – On the EM2 you don’t need an Optic as the iron sight of the weapon is very good so we’ll use one of the five slots elsewhere. The SOCOM Eliminator muzzle is great as it tones down the vertical recoil on the gun. By far the best barrel is the 26.3″ Takedown, because this increases the damage range by 150% making this mid-range AR viable in nearly every gunfight. Pair this with the Field Agent Grip for great recoil control. This will allow you to be able to control the gun while going for long-range engagements. You’ll want to use the Airborne Elastic Wrap as it allows for a much faster ADS time and gives nearly double the flinch resistance. Finally, the 30 Rnd mag is perfect for the EM2 because the additional 10 bullets really help for multiple fights. Best EM2 setup (Perks & equipment) Perk 1: Flak Jacket & Tactical Mask – Perk 2: Scavenger & Gearhead – Perk 3: Ghost & Ninja – Secondary: Diamatti – Wildcard: Perk Greed – Field Upgrade: Trophy System – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stun Grenade – Pair up the EM2 with the Diamatti, this burst pistol is great for up close encounters that the AR may struggle in. Also, running Semtex and stuns are really useful for pushing enemies out of position and into the open to gun them down. Perk Greed is extremely helpful as the EM2 doesn’t need more than five attachments. Running Flak Jacket and Tactical Mask will help with the spamming of stuns and nades. Also having Scavenger and Gearhead should increase your chances to go on higher streaks. The Field upgrade recommended would have to be the Trophy System. Using the EM2 you’ll want to post up and pick off enemies one by one. Having your trophy up faster, with Gearhead, will help make sure you don’t get naded out of your spot. Lastly, using Ghost and Ninja for the final perk slot is perfect for nearly every situation as it allows you to be stealthy. How to unlock the EM2 in Cold War The EM2 is free for every player in Cold War, all you need to do it reach Tier 15 in the Season 5 Battle Pass. Looking for a faster way? Players can also buy a blueprint from a bundle when it appears in the store and start using the gun right away. Alternative to the EM2 loadout If the EM2 seems like too much to grind for, or you need a class to reach Tier 15 with, then try using the Krig 6. This weapon has high damage just like the EM2, but a bit more range so it could feel better for long range. There are so many viable ARs in Cold War right now and the EM2 is definitely looking to make a splash in Multiplayer. Give it a try when you unlock and find out for yourself if this gun fits in the AR meta.

Best Cold War AUG Warzone class loadout: Attachments, setup, perks ActivisionBlack Ops Cold War’s AUG is a strong medium-range weapon in Warzone Pacific, but what’s actually the best loadout in terms of damage? Well, it’s actually a pretty simple setup with the perfect Perks and Attachments. Ever since Warzone first launched, players have been scrambling to put together the best loadouts possible to have the most efficient TTK for a weapon. For the most part, Warzone players will run an Assault Rifle or SMG alongside a Sniper, so that they get the best of both worlds. Not only does the AUG have fantastic mid to long-range accuracy, but it also packs a mighty punch that can tear through even the most well-armored of foes and it’s come back into the Warzone meta in Season 4. With that in mind, it’s key you have an AUG setup that fits your playstyle and can consistently perform in your games. Luckily, we’ve got a meta loadout that can do exactly that. Contents Best Cold War AUG loadout for Warzone – Best Cold War AUG setup for Warzone – How to unlock Cold War AUG in Warzone – Alternative Cold War AUG Warzone loadout – Best Cold War AUG loadout for Warzone Attachments Muzzle: Agency Silencer – Barrel: 17″ Titanium – Optics: Axial Arms 3x – Underbarrel: Field Agent Grip – Ammunition: 45 Round Drum – The AUG Tactical Rifle works best with the Agency Silencer and Axial Arms 3x sight. However, you’ll also need a bigger magazine. That’s where the 45 Round Mag comes into play. On top of that, the best barrel to use is the 17″ Titanium. This significantly boosts the AUG’s rate of fire, allowing you to get the first shot off on your opponent and kill them as quickly as possible. To utilize the AUG’s great damage range, you’ll want to prioritize accuracy when building this loadout as well. This is where the Field Agent Grip comes in to help stabilize the rifle. Whether you’re up close or trying to beam from afar, this underbarrel gives you the best advantage possible in Caldera, Rebirth, or Fortune’s Keep. Best Cold War AUG setup in Warzone Perks Equipment Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stim – When it comes to perks, you can’t look past the typical EOD, Overkill, and Amped combo. Overkill is absolutely essential in just about every Warzone loadout, else you’ll be left with a sidearm until you get a loadout. The same can be said for Amped, which lets you swap between your two primary weapons faster than normal. Having these two perks complement one another is crucial to winning a lot of fights if you run out of ammo mid-skirmish. In terms of equipment, the choice is always yours depending on your playstyle. However, a Semtex grenade is usually the best pick for its versatility. Whether you’re trying to flush out enemies in a building or attempting to destroy a vehicle, the quick explosive can get the job done. Whereas the Stim can either help you to survive the gas or give you a quick pick-me-up during a 1v1. How to unlock Cold War’s AUG in Call of Duty: Warzone Fortunately, those of you looking to get a hold of the Cold War AUG won’t have to complete any challenges. In fact, the only requirement is that you reach Rank 28. The majority of Warzone and Black Ops Cold War players will be way past this level requirement, but if you aren’t, simply keep playing and you’ll naturally acquire this lethal gun. Alternative AUG loadout If you’re looking for a different approach, you’ve always got plenty of options. With dozens of attachments to sift through, the possibilities are just about endless. Another solid choice for the AUG though comes from none other than the top Warzone earner. Aydan’s custom AUG setup has helped him dominate Warzone tournaments for the past few months. If you’re looking to up your game and match his aggressive playstyle, here’s everything the popular streamer runs in his loadout. For more of Warzone’s top loadouts, check these out below: Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Sniper Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | MAC-10 loadout | FFAR Warzone class | Top 20 highest-earning players

Best Cold War AK-47 Warzone class loadout: Setup, Attachments, Perks Treyarch/ActivisionThe AK-47 is arguably the most iconic weapon in the Call of Duty franchise and is known for its high damage potential. This deadly AR can make short work of squads in Season 3 Classified Arms, particularly when kitted out with the best attachments. While the Cold War AK47 is not as popular as it used to be back on Verdansk, it’s still a solid pick in Warzone Season 3, and one of the most versatile ARs in the game. With an impressive TTK, damage range, and a manageable recoil pattern, the weapon can be extremely effective in medium to long-range gunfights. Not only that, it can be kitted out with sniper support attachments if you’re looking for a loadout that shreds at close quarters. So, without further ado, let’s jump into the best Cold War AK-47 loadout for Warzone Season 3 Classified Arms. Contents Best Cold War AK-47 build for Warzone – Best Cold War AK-47 setup (Perks & Equipment) – How to unlock the Cold War AK-47 in Warzone – Best Cold War AK-47 loadout Warzone tips – Alternative Cold War AK-47 Warzone loadout (Sniper Support) – Best Cold War AK-47 build for Warzone Attachments Barrel: 20″ Spetsnaz RPK Barrel – Muzzle: GRU Suppressor – Optic: Axial Arms 3x – Underbarrel: Spetsnaz Grip – Ammunition: 45 Rnd – This particular build transforms the AK-47 into a long-range monster, allowing you to beam players down from afar. For starters, you’ll want to run the 20″ Spetsnaz RPK Barrel for the increased strafe speed and bullet velocity. When combined with the added recoil control and sound suppression from the GRU Suppressor, you have a deadly AR that can lock onto your enemies. Next, you’ll want to equip the Spetsnaz Grip to help bolster the AK-47’s heavy recoil pattern. This means you’ll be able to consistently land your shots and take out enemies in an instant. For the ammunition, you’ll want to add the 45 Rnds to the AK-47. This will ensure you never run out of ammo in an intense gunfight and allow you to take out multiple enemies with a single mag. Finally, finish off the class with the Axial Arms 3x, an optic that provides a clear sightline and is perfect for long-range skirmishes. Best Cold War AK-47 setup (Perks & Equipment) Perks & Equipment Perk 1: EOD – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: MP40 – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – This AK-47 class utilizes the ever-popular EOD and Amped perks. After all, having perks that reduce the effectiveness of enemy explosives, while also enabling you to quickly swap to your secondary weapon is a must. Don’t forget to use Overkill so you can run an SMG just in case you run into any close-quarter encounters. While the AK-47 can pack a punch at any range, the Owen Gun or the MP40 will always perform better up close and provide more mobility. Lastly, both the Semtex and Heartbeat Sensor help track down nearby enemies and flush out pesky campers – an area this loadout greatly excels in. How to unlock the Cold War AK-47 in Warzone If you’ve played Cold War and Warzone for even just a few hours, then chances are, you already have the AK-47. If you don’t, then all you need to do is reach rank 7. Unlike the Warzone’s other Assault Rifles, adding the AK-47 to your arsenal doesn’t require any challenges. Simply play the game and you’ll get yourself one of the most powerful weapons in Season 3 Classified Arms. Best Cold War AK-47 loadout Warzone tips The Cold War AK-47 is definitely a hard hitter in Warzone. While the recoil pattern may be a bit difficult to control at first, once you get the hang of it, this assault rifle can be deadly in-game. For those looking to improve with this Cold War AK-47 loadout, we’ve got you covered with a few tips: This weapon has a high damage output, especially when you manage to land those shots. Even though this weapon isn’t the most stable, going for headshots and body shots are 100% worth it. – Our best Cold War AK-47 loadout excels in medium to long-range engagements. While it’s more than capable of downing enemies at close range, most SMGs and shotguns will have an advantage. – Pairing this weapon with an SMG allows you to be effective at basically all ranges. For maximum close-range effectiveness, we recommend using the MP40 or Owen Gun. – Alternative Cold War AK-47 Warzone loadout (Sniper Support) Attachments Ammunition: 45 Round Mag – Barrel: 18.2″ Takedown – Muzzle: GRU Suppressor – Stock: KGB Skeletal Stock – Rear Grip: Serpent Wrap – Rather than building the weapon for long-range engagements, this build focuses on turning the Cold War AK-47 into a top-tier sniper support class. That involves optimizing the attachments so the gun performs best at close to medium range, allowing you to take on any opponents who push your position. While the setup above won’t contest enemies from a distance, it’ll absolutely shred enemies at close quarters, giving you the best chance to win a skirmish. When it comes to picking a sniper to run alongside this setup, we recommend the HDR after the Season 3 balance changes as the Modern Warfare rifle packs a punch at long range. That rounds off our Cold War AK-47 loadout guide for Call of Duty: Warzone. Don’t forget to adjust any attachments based on your preference, it’s all about experimenting until you find a build for you. Make sure to check out our other Warzone guides and lists such as: | Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Assault Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | Mac-10 loadout | FFAR Warzone class | Top 20 highest earning players

Best CoD: Vanguard settings for FPS, visibility, performance on PC & console ActivisionThe best Call of Duty: Vanguard graphics settings will give you a huge advantage in multiplayer, especially when they increase your FPS and visibility. Finding the best CoD Vanguard graphics settings is incredibly important. Not only will adjusting them enable you to increase your FPS, but they can also drastically improve visibility – an area that is imperative to your survival. While every player has their own personal preferences, the best Vanguard graphics settings can greatly level up every aspect of your gameplay. Whether you’re looking to get the best performance from your system or just wish to improve your KD, adjusting Vanguard’s graphics can enable you to do just that. By utilizing the best Vanguard FOV settings, weapons, and graphics settings, you’ll be able to dominate the game’s competition in no time. Contents Best Vanguard PC settings for visibility & performance – How to upgrade graphic drivers in Vanguard – Best Vanguard console settings – Call of Duty Vanguard PC requirements – Best Vanguard PC settings for visibility & performance The best CoD Vanguard graphics settings for PC are those that boost the game’s FPS settings, while also giving you great visibility. If you find yourself having trouble spotting enemies in Vanguard’s multiplayer maps, then lowering the game’s lighting effects, shadows, and level detail can greatly improve your ability to spot enemy players. Read More: Best controller settings for CoD Vanguard – There are a lot more options to adjust in the PC version of Vanguard, so be sure to tweak these options and tailor them to your own preferences. Once you’ve used these settings, be sure to adjust your FOV to see how everything looks. Display Display Mode: Fullscreen – Monitor: Your primary gaming monitor – Refresh Rate: Monitor’s refresh rate – Sync Every Frame (V-Sync): Off – Framerate Limit: Custom – Gameplay Custom Framerate Limit: Monitor’s refresh rate – Menu Custom Framerate Limit: 60 – Minimized Game Custom Framerate Limit: 15 – NVIDIA Reflex Low Latency: Enabled – Display Resolution: Your monitor’s resolution – Display Gamma: 2.2 (sRGB) – Focused Mode: Off – Focused Mode Opacity: 0 – Display Adapter: Your graphics card – On-Demand Texture Streaming: Off – Quality Render Resolution: 100 – VRAM Usage Target: 80% – Details & Textures Texture Resolution: Low – Texture Filter Anisotropic: Medium – Particle Quality Level: Low – Particle Resolution: Low – Bullet Impacts & Sprays: Off – Tesselation: Off – Level of Detail: Low – Level of Detail Distance Quality: Low – Volumetric Quality Level: Low – Shadow & Lighting Shadow Map Resolution: Low – Sun Shadow Cascades: Low – Cache Spot Shadows: Off – Spot Cache Size: Off – Cache Sun Shadows: Off – Spot Shadow Quality: Low – Particle Lighting: Low – Ambient Occlusion: Off – GTAO: Low – Screen Space Reflection: Low – Post Processing Effects Anti-Aliasing: SMAA T2X – Filmic Strength: 0 – Gameplay Field of View: 100-105 – ADS Field of View: Affected – Camera Movement: Least – World Motion Blur: Off – Weapon Motion Blur: Off – Depth of Field: Off – How to upgrade graphic drivers in Vanguard It’s extremely important that you have the latest graphics card driver installed on your PC. While many players may overlook this, you’d be surprised on the difference it can make when paired with our best Vanguard settings. Updating your AMD driver Right-click on your desktop. – Select ‘AMD Radeon Settings.‘ – From here, click ‘Home.‘ – At the bottom left, you’ll see ‘New Updates.‘ Click that. – Select the ‘check for update‘ option. – Continue to follow the information displayed on your screen to download the update. – Updating your NVIDIA driver Open GeForce Experience. If you don’t have it installed, you can download it very easily here. – At the top left of the application, click the ‘Drivers‘ button. – Towards the top right of the tab, you’ll see ‘Check for Updates.‘ Click that. – You may also see that a driver is already listed for download. If that’s the case, click ‘Express Installation.‘ – A window will probably pop up asking if you’d like to proceed. Click ‘Allow.‘ – The update will now install, and you’re ready to go! – Best Vanguard console settings The best Vanguard console settings also lower the graphics and visual clutter of the game, improving visibility on darker maps and giving you even greater clarity. While the adjustable options on offer may be significantly lower than those seen on PC, there are a few things you can do to get the best advantage on Xbox and PlayStation. Graphics Camera Movement: Least – World Motion Blur: Off – Weapon Motion Blur: Off – Depth of Field: Off – On-demand Texture streaming: On – So, there you have it, the best Vanguard settings for PC and console. While changing these options won’t instantly increase your in-game performance, they will help give you a noticeable advantage in the long run. Call of Duty Vanguard PC requirements If you’ve been running into issues using these Vanguard settings, specifically on PC, then this could be due to your PC not being capable of running Vanguard. Unlike a gaming console that comes ready to play your favorite games, your PC needs to have the necessary components. According to Activision, these are the PC requirements you’ll need to run Vanguard effectively: Minimum System Requirements OS: Windows 10 64-Bit (latest update) CPU: Intel Core i3-4340 or AMD FX-6300 RAM: 8 GB RAM STORAGE SPAGE (at launch): 36 GB (Multiplayer and Zombies only), 177 GB all game modes HIGH-REZ ASSET CACHE: Up to 32 GB VIDEO CARD: NVIDIA GeForce GTX 960 or AMD Radeon RX 470 VIDEO MEMORY: 2 GB GRAPHIC DRIVER: NVIDIA 472.12 or AMC 21.9.1 Recommended System Requirements OS: Windows 10 64-Bit (latest update) or Windows 11 64-Bit (latest update) CPU: Intel Core i5-2500K or AMD Ryzen 5 1600X RAM: 12 GB RAM STORAGE SPAGE: 177 GB HIGH-REZ ASSET CACHE: Up to 32 GB VIDEO CARD: NVIDIA GeForce GTX 1060 or AMD Radeon RX 580 VIDEO MEMORY: 4 GB GRAPHIC DRIVER: NVIDIA 472.12 or AMC 21.9.1 So, there you have it — the best CoD Vanguard graphic settings for PC and console. Remember that you can always experiment with these settings to find your perfect fit. Make sure you check out our best CoD Vanguard loadout guides to get a competitive edge over your foes: Best Itra loadout | Best MP40 loadout | Best M1928 loadout | Best STG44 loadout

Best CoD Vanguard operators to stay silent when using Ninja ActivisionCall of Duty: Vanguard players have found that certain operators in the game won’t make any noise when using Ninja, while others grunt and make noise. After months of waiting, Call of Duty players are finally getting stuck into Vanguard, beginning the annual tradition of figuring out which multiplayer class works best for them – including which weapons to use, which perks to select, and what grenades to take into battle. Aside from new additions like Forward Intel and Piercing Vision, the perks in Vanguard are pretty much the same as previous CoD titles, though, Ninja has been moved from the third perk slot to the first. The Ninja perk still works the same as ever – in that it helps you make less noise while moving. However, if you want stay ultra quiet, there are a few operators you want to use. Even when using Ninja, some operators still give themselves away with grunts and breathing noises while mantling or falling. However, as Twitter user TylerrWRLD pointed out, there are three female characters that won’t do this – Beatrice, Constanze, and Padmavati. Instead, they remain silent and make the jumps without any noise. Dexerto has tested the claim by using these operators in-game and confirmed that they don’t make any noise, while the other operators will all grunt and complain – especially when mantling. If you’re using Ninja use the following operators for quieter mantle/fall: •Padmavati •Constanze •BeatriceThe rest of them grunt when you mantle or fall. The ones mentioned above are “silent” Credit to @TylerrWRLD for pointing this out. — CDL Intel (@intelCDL) November 8, 2021 As some players have pointed out, pair this issue with Dead Silence and you will be pretty undetectable by enemies as you move around the map. In terms of fixing this supposed issue, it appears as if Sledgehammer Games will either have to give the characters some voice lines or just fix some rogue bit of code that is preventing them from talking when Ninja is equipped.

Best CoD Vanguard FOV settings for PC, PlayStation, Xbox Activision / Sledgehammer GamesFinding the best FOV settings in any Call of Duty game will give you a huge advantage on both PC and console, but what are the best CoD Vanguard FOV settings you should be using? Choosing the best FOV settings in Vanguard is incredibly important. Not only does it enable you to see more of the map, but it can also help reduce visual weapon recoil. Unlike past Call of Duty titles, Vanguard allows both PC and console players to adjust their FOV to whatever they like. Of course, finding the best Vanguard FOV settings can take some time. This is especially true if you’re used to the default options present in Warzone and Cold War. Whether you’re looking to increase your KD or just want to get a competitive advantage, then our best Vanguard FOV settings have you covered. Contents Best CoD Vanguard FOV settings The best Vanguard FOV settings sit around the 100 to 105 mark. While this comes down to personal preference, these settings offer the biggest advantage without negatively impacting gameplay. Having a FOV of 100 will greatly increase the amount you can see, while also not dramatically impacting the overall distance of your gun when aiming down sight. After all, being able to see your enemies clearly is incredibly important in any FPS game. Have a play around with Vanguard’s FOV settings and try to acclimate yourself with anything around 100-105. It may take some getting used to at first, but these are the best Vanguard FOV settings for competitive gameplay. How to change CoD Vanguard FOV settings In order to change your FOV in Vanguard, you’ll first need to load into the game’s lobby screen. Once you’ve done that, follow the instructions below: Click on the Settings button (bottom left of the screen). – Select Graphics from the menu tab. – Scroll down to Display. – Simply adjust the bar to whatever level you want. – What is CoD Vanguard FOV? Field of view, also known as FOV is a setting that determines how much of the game you see on your screen. A lower FOV means you’ll see less, while a higher field of view means you’ll see more. Read More: Call of Duty Vanguard Zombies release date – Bumping up Vanguard’s FOV settings to 120 may seem like a good idea, but this can greatly impair your vision and even obscure certain in-game objects. As a result, finding the best FOV settings in Vanguard is incredibly important. If you’re looking to find the best guns in Vanguard, then be sure to check out our weapon guides ahead of the game’s official launch: Best Itra loadout | Best MP40 loadout | Best M1928 loadout | Best STG44 loadout

Best CoD player to never win Champs? Enable & Pacman debate Dexerto / Call of Duty League With some time before CDL 2021 Stage 4, Reverse Sweep’s Enable, Pacman, and Katie Bedford tackled a historic Call of Duty question: Who are the best CoD players to never win Champs? Big stats, highlight plays, and earnings will always earn recognition, but there is no greater sign of CoD success than glory at Champs. Still, some of the best players ever haven’t won a ring — so Ian ‘Enable’ Wyatt, Jonathan ‘Pacman’ Tucker, and Katie Bedford broke down the best of the ringless. Each Reverse Sweep analyst selected one player who they think is the greatest of all time to not win a CoD Champs, including both retired and currently active players. The best CoD players to never win Champs Enable got things started with his own former teammate, Kenny ‘Kenny’ Williams, while Pacman opted for Ulysses ‘AquA’ Silva. In contrast to those two current Call of Duty League pros, Bedford went for her retired co-host, Enable. Here’s how each argued for their picks. Enable had to go with a former teammate, who currently is a star for LA Thieves: “It has to be Kenny. Kenny’s gotten second at back-to-back Champs, World War II and Black Ops 4 … He was hands-down the best WWII player.” Pointing out that Kenny was not only dominant in a number of games, but also came close to winning Champs, Enable felt comfortable calling him the best ringless CoD player ever. For Pacman’s selection, he went with a current Paris Legion player whose current struggles can’t overwhelm his former dominance: “[AquA] might be getting dogged now, but there was a point where he was truly nasty and the true hard carry for the team.” And this is a point Enable couldn’t help but agree with, comparing AquA’s run to Allen Iverson’s in the NBA — where the Hall of Famer was talented enough to carry unimpressive teams deep into the playoffs. While both Enable and Pacman chose hard carries who were inches away from winning rings, Bedford went with the homer pick: Enable. Noting that Enable was on those same second-place teams as Kenny, the analyst pointed out that the current Reverse Sweep analyst was dominant across multiple FPS titles and easily could have come away with a ring. While the Reverse Sweep crew have some strong answers, there are obviously other players who also deserve a nod. Guys like Joe ‘Merk’ DeLuca and Raymond ‘Rambo’ Lussier have popularly gotten mentions on YouTube and social media. Hit those YouTube comments, though, and let us know who you think is the best ringless CoD player of all time!

Best Renetti Pistol loadout in CoD Mobile: perks, Gunsmith attachments, more ActivisionCall of Duty Mobile’s new Renetti Pistol is one of the stronger secondary weapons in the game with the right setup. Here’s a breakdown of the best Renetti Gunsmith Loadout to get the most out of the powerful gun. Halfway through CoD Mobile’s third season, developers added a new weapon into the Gunsmith. The new Renetti Pistol is an absolute beast of a secondary, making the lengthy unlock process worth your time. While the default setup is powerful in its own right, it’s not until you get some specific attachments that the Renetti truly comes alive. In particular, with burst-fire enabled, players can mow down targets with just one or two taps of the trigger. It’s undoubtedly one of the best sidearms in the game today so if you’re looking to jump on the hype train, here’s our optimal loadout to get the most out of the Renetti in CoD Mobile. Best Renetti Gunsmith Loadout in CoD Mobile Renetti Gunsmith Attachments Your primary focus with the Renetti is to line up precise shots. Fast movement isn’t critical, neither is getting up close. The pistol shreds from just about any range so long as your accuracy is on point. Therefore, prioritizing aim is the biggest factor with this Loadout. Barrel: OWC Ranger – Stock: Folding Stock – Laser: MIP Laser 5mW – Trigger Action: Match Grade Trigger – Ammunition: Large Extended Mag B – With the five attachments above, you’ll be maximizing recoil control over all else to do just that. Range, Accuracy, Control, and even Fire Rate will see dramatic improvements with this setup. Damage will remain consistent at 43, more than enough to one-burst targets with shots to the upper chest. The only key downside here comes in terms of reduced mobility. You won’t be flying across the map like certain pistols allow. However, a slower pace can help keep shots on target. Best Renetti Gunsmith Loadout in CoD Mobile: Perks & Equipment Renetti Loadout Perks & Equipment Getting the right attachments is crucial but the rest of your Loadout can help complement the Renetti in CoD Mobile. When it comes to primary weapons and Operator Skills, the choice is yours. Pick something that works with your playstyle to backup high-kill streaks if the Renetti runs low on ammo. Primary: RUS-79U (first firing SMG) – Operator Skill: Purifier (personal preference) – Lethal: Thermite – Tactical: Trophy System – Perk 1: Lightweight – Perk 2: Cold-Blooded – Perk 3: High Alert – The real focus here should be on equipping the right perks. For starters, Lightweight is essential in this setup. To counter the reduced mobility, Lightweight provides a 10% increase to your overall sprint speed. Read More: $2m CoD Mobile World Championship announced – Moreover, High Alert will keep the kill-feed active as you’ll always be aware of enemies nearby. You’ll be aiming down sights most of the time when wielding a Renetti, making this pick a no-brainer. That’s everything there is to know about the Renetti in CoD Mobile. Be sure to check out our CoD Mobile page to keep up with all the latest guides.

Best close-range Warzone loadouts to replace MP-40 meta ActivisionIn the Call of Duty: Warzone mid-season patch, the MP-40 meta is expected to be nerfed. If so, there are some interesting SMG and close-range builds that could replace the beloved close-quarters behemoth. The MP-40 quickly rose to the top of the Warzone Pacific ladder. It’s no surprise it ranks as the most-used gun in the game, as its ground loot version is deadly and its loadouts wreak even more havoc. Its time in the sun may be coming to an end, though, as January 7’s update promised nerfs to the Bren and MP-40 meta in the “near future.” We’ve already covered the guns that could replace the Bren, but there are some candidates to fill the MP-40’s void as well. With a close-range gun, you typically want mobility and high damage, with firing rate, magazine size, and recoil control all also considered (in that order of importance). Here are the guns that might fit the bill. Best Warzone SMG loadouts to replace MP-40: Type 100, PPSh, Owen Gun Three Warzone SMGs stand out as the best options to take up the MP-40’s mantle: the Type 100, PPSh, and Owen Gun. Each plays a little differently but has the right blend of damage, firing rate, and mobility to put in work. The Type 100 loadout might be the most versatile option, with the ability to prioritize either damage or magazine size depending on personal preference. The PPSh loadout, by contrast, has a very specific, very deadly hipfire build – which has already become popular for its ludicrous highlight plays. Uhhh… might need to take a shower after seeing this @Destroy_215 clip 🤮 Hipfire PPSh is absolutely filthy in Warzonepic.twitter.com/Novn3pXyY4 — Dexerto Esports (@DexertoEsports) January 10, 2022 Lastly, the Owen Gun loadout is getting some attention, as it has better recoil than the others. You can build this option out to outgun enemies in the intermediate ranges, giving it some interesting potential. Other Warzone close-range loadouts to replace MP-40: Sten, AS44, more Of course, you can’t limit the replacements to just three and there are some other options which could come into play. For SMGs, the two that jump to mind are the Sten and Welgun. Some non-SMGs, like the AS44 and Einhorn Revolving Shotgun, also deserve consideration. The Sten loadout feels about average at everything, but players are giving it some love on social media – so we’ll have to see. The Welgun, introduced in Vanguard’s Season 1.5 patch, got a JGOD shoutout, meaning it’s definitely worth keeping an eye on. New Welgun is very nice in Vanguard and Potential to be very good in Warzone based on the fire rate and recoil which are huge for ease of use. pic.twitter.com/VulwWyxgOf — James – JGOD (@JGODYT) January 12, 2022 Past those, a close-quarters build of an AS44 loadout is intriguing, as streamers like Swagg have already demonstrated its hipfire lethality. The notorious Einhorn Revolving Shotgun loadout also gets a nod here, as it wasn’t nerfed and everyone knows how good shotguns can be in Warzone. While these guns are all good options to keep in mind, who knows what the mid-season patch will change. Depending on any additional adjustments, different close-quarters weapons may rise or fall out of consideration.

Best class setups to use in Black Ops 4 Multiplayer after balancing updates The last few weeks have seen multiple patch updates rolled out for Call of Duty: Black Ops 4 which have dramatically changed weapon balancing. With so many weapons having been either buffed or nerfed, the meta class setups in the Multiplayer have also evolved, with players changing their preferences as to which weapons and attachments they want to use. Call of Duty expert YouTuber TheXclusiveAce has been keeping with all of the updates and has adjusted his preferred classes in accordance with the new balancing changes. In a video he published on November 23, Ace breaks down his new four preferred class setups in Multiplayer, which now feature certain guns and attachments he previously didn’t enjoy or use too often. The first class he talks about is his Rampart 17 setup, which he has equipped with the Recon Sight, High Caliber I, High Caliber II, and Fast Mags attachments, Stim Shot Gear, Tac Mask, Gung-Ho, and Dead Silence Perks, and the Primary Gunfighter Wildcard. “Before this update, I’d say that the Rampart was probably my least favorite Assault Rifle,” he said. “And now it’s up there as one of my favorites with this particular class setup.”

Best Chopper LMG loadout for Call of Duty: Mobile ActivisionThe Chopper LMG is now available in Call of Duty: Mobile, but what is the best set-up and class for it? Well, there are a few tips and tricks that you should follow for now. CoD: Mobile has been a smash hit with Call of Duty fans around the globe and is now its seventh season of content. Radioactive Agent, as the season is called, has seen a brand-new map added to the mix, as well as a huge expansion to the Isolated battle royale mode, and new cosmetics. On top of all that, there are new weapons too. The newest comes in the form of the Chopper light-machine gun – which is the ChainSAW from CoD: Ghosts. The fast-firing weapon is available for free by completing challenges and you can also purchase it from the lucky draw. Once you get your hands on it, however, there a few key attachments that you should be running with it. Best setup for Chopper LMG in CoD Mobile According to YouTuber HawksNest, the recoil of the weapon is pretty easy to control but if you’re wanting to play aggressively, you can be hampered by the mobility – LMGs do cause you to move slowly, after all. In terms of class set-up, he recommends using a Stock, a Laser Sight, and Quickdraw. This will allow you to add a tiny touch of speed to the Chopper LMG. As for perks, you want to go with Lightweight, Hard Wired, and Dead Silence. Again, this should help with mobility. Chopper LMG best attachments Quickdraw – Stock – Laser Sight – Perks Lightweight – Hard Wired – Dead Silence – Of course, setting up a class that you like means that you can switch things around based on how the weapon is feeling. If you’re feeling the Laser Sight, something like the Extended Mags or Fast Reload isn’t a bad choice either. Though, you will have to level up the weapon once you’ve unlocked it in order to get these attachments. That might take a minute but it’ll be worth the effort and you’ll be running riots in game with the Chopper.

Best Chimera Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks The Chimera is a powerful AR that thrives at medium range but you’ll need the best loadout possible to take advantage of its strengths in Warzone 2. Based on the real-world AAC Honey Badger that also appeared in Ghosts, the Chimera is a unique assault rifle that can outgun just about anything. Whilst most assault rifles excel at long range it’s during mid-range gunfights where the Chimera truly dominates. It also performs extremely well at close range making it an effective sniper support. The Chimera is somewhat underrated as its TTK outperforms almost every other gun in Warzone 2. Plus its recoil isn’t that difficult to control and it has an incredible headshot multiplier if you can hit your shots. Contents Best Chimera Warzone 2 loadout – Best Chimera Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Chimera in Warzone 2 – Best Chimera alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best Chimera Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Polarfire-S (-0.36, +0.84) – Barrel: 6.5″ EXF OP-40 (-0.26, -0.28) – Laser: 1mW Quick Fire Laser (-0.34, -34.52) – Optic: Slimline Pro (-0.87, -2.25) – Magazine: 45 Round Mag – Since the Chimera has great weapon handling already it’s best to focus on improving its recoil and bullet velocity. The best attachment to reduce recoil is the Polarfire-S which massively reduces our vertical kick whilst also slightly decreasing horizontal recoil. To lower recoil further we combo the muzzle with the 6.5″ EXF OP-40 barrel. The 1mW Quick Fire Laser improves ADS speed and comes without any cons. A big weakness of the Chimera is its iron sights. We believe that players should use some sort of optic while using this AR. Finally, the 45 Round Mag is a must to be able to down multiple enemies before having to reload. This does slow down our reload a little but it’s still relatively fast given the size of the magazine. Best Chimera Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Scavenger – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Quick Fix – Lethal: Drill Charge – Tactical Equipment: Heartbeat Sensor – Since the Chimera excels at close and medium range it’s best to use perks that compliment an aggressive playstyle. The only exception to this is Overkill which is useful as it lets you take a secondary that covers the Chimera’s weaknesses like a sniper or DMR. For the other basic slot, Scavenger is great as it makes it easy to keep ammo supplies refreshed and causes dead players to drop an extra armor plate. Any time you are using two primary weapons Fast Hands is worth equipping to switch between them faster. It also speeds up reload times leaving few situations where you aren’t prepared for a gunfight. Quick Fix partners particularly well with Scavenger as it replenishes your health immediately after getting a down or using an armor plate. It’s the best combination for taking multiple fights in quick succession. A Drill Charge is a good choice to make aggressive play more effective as it lets you flush out static players from rooms more easily. For tactical equipment, we use a Heartbeat Sensor which acts as a portable radar to quickly scout buildings. How to unlock the Chimera in Warzone 2 In order to unlock the Chimera in Warzone 2, you’ll need to get 2 assault rifle kills in 15 separate matches. While this will take a long time in Warzone, it’s easy enough if you own MW2 and can hop into multiplayer. Alternatively, exfiling with any Chimera variant in DMZ will also unlock the assault rifle. Best Chimera alternatives in Warzone 2 Assault rifles that excel at close and medium range aren’t all that common but the Kastov-74u is a good alternative with many similar characteristics to the Chimera. If that doesn’t suit your playstyle the Kastov 545 and Vaznev-9K can be built to perform comparably whilst putting a bigger focus on mobility and less focus on TTK. That’s all for our Chimera loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Best Warzone 2 loadouts: Meta weapons and classes to dominate in Al Mazrah | Call of Duty 2024: Early leaks, concept art, Warzone 2.0, Treyarch & more | Call of Duty 2023: Early leaks, Modern Warfare 2, Warzone 2, more | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons: Ultimate tier list with the best classes | Modern Warfare 2 best settings on PC for FPS, graphics, visibility, more

Best Chimera Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisonThe Chimera or Honey Badger in Modern Warfare 2 is an aggressive AR that’s designed for close to medium-range combat, but you’ll need a meta MW2 loadout if you want to dominate your foes. If you’re looking to rack up countless kills in Modern Warfare 2 multiplayer, it’s important to play aggressively and take gunfights whenever you can. While camping will protect your overall KD, it will limit your skill potential and will result in you losing a lot of intense 1v1s. So, if you’re a fan of challenging your opponents and enjoy guns with a lethal TTK, the Chimera or Honey Badger AR in MW2 is the perfect weapon. Equipped with impressive mobility, damage, and an in-built suppressor, this AR is powerful if used with a meta loadout in Modern Warfare 2. Best Chimera Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best Chimera Modern Warfare 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Chimera in Modern Warfare 2 – Alternative to the Chimera Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best Chimera Modern Warfare 2 loadout Attachments Stock: Ravage-8 – Optic: SZ Mini – Laser: VLK LZR 7MW – Underbarrel: FTAC Ripper 56 – Rear Grip: Bruen Flash Grip – First of all, you’ll want to equip the VLK LZR 7MW laser and FTAC Ripper 56 underbarrel. These attachments will significantly improve the gun’s ADS time, aiming stability, and overall recoil control. While you could opt to run a barrel or muzzle, the Chimera already has plenty of damage, so focusing on enhancing mobility and control is the direction we’ve opted to go for. Following this, utilize the Ravage 8 stock for better sprint speed and overall mobility, as well as the Bruen Flash Grip for the enhanced ADS time. Finally, round off the loadout with the SZ Mini optic for a clear and concise sight that will allow you to deal maximum damage to your enemies. Best Chimera Modern Warfare 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Battle Hardened – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Stun Grenade – Tactical: Stim – Start off with Double Time for base perk 1 as it will allow you to outplay your opponents with ease, giving you the speed to aggressively push enclosed spaces and take out your foes before they have a chance to respond. After that, you’ll want to equip Battle Harderend as opponents will attempt to stop your killing sprees with stuns and flashes. This perk reduces the effects of lethal grenades, making you extremely difficult to take down. When it comes to your bonus perk, Fast Hands is a strong option as you want to be able to switch to your secondary quickly just in case you run out of ammo. As for equipment, we suggest a Stun Grenade to help you in your 1v1s, as well as a Stim for a boost of health when you need it most. How to unlock the Chimera in Modern Warfare 2 In order to unlock the Chimera in Modern Warfare 2, you’ll need to get 2 rifle kills in 15 separate matches. Keep in mind, you can speed up the process by securing two kills and then immediately backing out of a match and queuing for another one, it still counts towards the challenge. Alternative to the Chimera Modern Warfare 2 loadout If the Chimera doesn’t fit your style of play, consider checking out the Fennec 45 SMG for a close-range powerhouse that melts enemies. With the best-in-class fire rate, it’s hard to find a weapon with a better TTK than the Fennec, and with our meta loadout, it’s a top-tier contender for multiplayer. Now that you have the best Chimera loadout, you can check out some other guides we’ve compiled for Modern Warfare 2: All Modern Warfare 2 beta maps and game modes | How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to unlock MP5 SMG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 | How to Slide Cancel in the Modern Warfare 2 Beta | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best Carrack .300 Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionAll signs still point toward the Signal 50 still being Warzone 2’s best fast-firing sniper rifle. However, the Carrack .300 flies under the radar and may surprise those trying it. Here is how you can maximize the new sniper rifle’s untapped potential. In June, Treyarch banned sniper rifles from Warzone 2 Ranked Play. The ban hammer came down partly because pro players complained that one-shot snipers and fire shotguns “killed’ Ranked Play. Little did the community members realize that they had unleashed a new monster in the Signal 50. It didn’t take much time for the fast-firing sniper rifle to take over Ranked Play lobbies and the 2023 World Series of Warzone. Despite the Signal 50, taking over WZ2’s competitive meta, Raven Software argued that a nerf to the sniper rifle was “not necessary” in Season 5. Community members were stunned by the decision, but fortunately for those disgruntled players, Season 5 also provided a direct competitor to the Signal 50. Let’s jump right into what players need to know about the Carrack .300 Contents Best Carrack .300 Warzone 2 loadout – Best Carrack .300 Warzone 2 class: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the Carrack .300 in Warzone 2 – Best Carrack .300 alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best Carrack .300 Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Bruen Agent 90 (+0.81, +0.90) – Laser: VLK LZR 7MW (0.00, -42.77) – Barrel: Heavy-TAC 300 (+0.50, -0.40) – Rear Grip: TV Nought Grip (+0.58, +0.45) – Ammunition: .300 High Velocity (-0.70, +9.00) – COD veterans will be familiar with WA 2000. The bullpup, semi-automatic sniper rifle appeared in Modern Warfare 2 & 3 and the original Black Ops game. The sniper rifle was ironically regarded as one of the worst weapons in each title due to its horrible handling stats. The Carrack .300 is inspired by the WA 2000, but thankfully, it vastly outperforms the original design and dominates long-range engagements. For our loadout scopes come down to personal preference, and the Carrack .300 default scope is kind of bulky and could be annoying for some players. If players can’t get along with it, we recommend replacing the muzzle with a new optic. Best Carrack .300 Warzone 2 class: Perks & Equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Overkill – Bonus Perk: Resupply – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Drill Charge – Tactical Equipment: Smoke Grenade – For Base Perks, Double Time is useful as it doubles your tactical sprint duration, making getting around both Al Mazrah and Ashika Island faster. It’s also recommended to use Overkill to run a secondary weapon. There are plenty of reliable sniper support options in Season 5, such as the Chimera or Kastov-74u. Resupply is an effective Bonus Perk, as it constantly regenerates both Equipment slots and Field Upgrades. Given the importance of equipment for pushing other teams and maneuvering, having constant access to them is fantastic. For the Ultimate Perk, High Alert is a superb choice, as it provides free intel by highlighting the direction of enemy players aiming at you from behind. With Warzone 2’s short TTK, this is one of the few ways to give yourself enough time to react before being downed. Equipment is flexible as there are several strong choices but a Drill Charge and Smoke Grenade are the top picks here. Drill Charges are excellent for flushing out players from hard-to-reach areas, while Smoke Grenades allow you to reposition through open spaces without being punished. How to unlock the Carrack .300 in Warzone 2 If you’re looking to unlock the Carrack .300 in Warzone 2, there are no challenges to complete. Instead, you just have to progress the Season 5 Battle Pass. The sniper rifle can be found in Sector E7, so just keep playing matches and performing well, and you’ll have it unlocked in no time. Best Carrack .300 alternatives in Warzone 2 If the Carrack .300 isn’t checking off every box for you, the Signal 50 boasts a similar damage profile and arguably outperforms the new sniper rifle across the board. Most professional Warzone teams have at least one Signal 50 user, and the sniper rifle also dominates Ranked Play lobbies. That’s all for our Carrack .300 loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Best Warzone 2 loadouts: Meta weapons and classes to dominate in Al Mazrah | Call of Duty 2024: Early leaks, concept art, Warzone 2.0, Treyarch & more | Call of Duty 2023: Early leaks, Modern Warfare 2, Warzone 2, more | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons: Ultimate tier list with the best classes | Modern Warfare 2 best settings on PC for FPS, graphics, visibility, more

Best Carrack .300 Modern Warfare 2 class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup The Carrack .300 is here and it’s already taken over the sniper rifle meta. This unusual-looking gun isn’t just nostalgic, but also one of the best guns in MW2. To fully take advantage of its strengths you’ll want to use our best Carrack .300 loadout for Modern Warfare 2 multiplayer. Added to MW2 in Season 5, the Carrack .300 is a unique-looking bullpup sniper rifle based on the real-world Walther WA 2000. Long-term COD fans will recognize this semi-auto sniper as it appeared in the original Modern Warfare 2 and Black Ops. Despite being a relatively fast firing semi-auto, the Carrack .300 can reliably secure one-shot kills. It’s not quite as consistent as the slower-firing MCPR or SP-X 80 but that trade-off seems worthwhile given how much more forgiving it is. To get the most out of the Carrack .300 you’ll want to have the best Modern Warfare 2 loadout for multiplayer, and we’ve got you covered. Contents Best Carrack .300 MW2 Loadout – Best Carrack .300 MW2 class: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the Carrack .300 in MW2 – Best Carrack .300 alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 – Best Carrack .300 MW2 Loadout Laser: Accu-Shot 5mW Laser – Optic: Forge Tac Delta 4 – Stock: LEX V14 Stock – Magazine: 10 Round Mag – Rear Grip: Engage-20 Grip – The recipe for creating a strong sniper in multiplayer is consistent across all of the available guns in class. You’ll want to speed up ADS as much as possible while not hurting aiming stability so much as to make hitting shots harder than it needs to be. To maximise handling it’s recommended to use the Accu-Shot 5mW Laser with the LEX V14 Stock and Engage-20 Grip rear grip. These three attachments provide various benefits with their boost to ADS speed and Aiming Stability being the main pros. They will hurt the Carrack .300’s recoil somewhat though which can make landing follow-up shots difficult, especially with a higher zoom optic. For this reason, we recommend running a lower zoom optic like the Forge Tac Delta 4 which offers clear sights and is more versatile than the default scope. Unusually for a multiplayer gun, an extended magazine like the 10 Round Mag is worth using on the Carrack. Even though it slows down the sniper’s handling, being able to fire twice as many rounds without reloading makes that trade-off worthwhile. Best Carrack .300 MW2 class: Perks & Equipment Base Perk 1: Bomb Squad – Base Perk 2: Battle Hardened – Bonus Perk: Resupply – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal Equipment: Proximity Mines – Tactical Equipment: Flash Grenade – Since you’re more likely to play slow with the Carrack .300 it makes sense to run defensive Perks like Bomb Squad and Battle Hardened. These combine to greatly reduce the impact of incoming equipment and explosives making it harder for enemies to push you. Similarly, Cold-Blooded and Fast Hands have limited impact with a class like this so we opt for the next best thing, Resupply. The main advantage to running Resupply is that it will keep your equipment topped up which is perfect for controlling key areas of the map. Finally, Ghost remains by far the best Ultimate Perk to use as it has been since MW2’s launch. Outside of specific objective game modes where Quick Fix is competitive there just isn’t a perk that is nearly as competitive as Ghost with the value of staying off the enemy radar being so strong. To complement a slower playstyle a Proximity Mine is a great choice. They can be used to shut down flank routes and control areas of the map. Your choice of Tactical Equipment isn’t too important but a Flash Grenade can give you the edge in an otherwise unfavorable gunfight. How to unlock the Carrack .300 in MW2 To unlock the Carrack .300 you’ll need to complete Sector E7 of the Season 5 Battle Pass. This will take a minimum of 25 Battle Pass Tokens to reach and finish. Players can expect an in-game challenge to be added beyond Season 5 that will let you unlock the .300 Carrack once the Battle Pass expires. Best Carrack .300 alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 The most obvious alternative to the Carrack .300 is the Signal 50. Both are semi-auto sniper rifles that can secure one-shot kills at the cost of handling and recoil. Those looking for a more mobile alternative should consider using the Tempus Torrent. It’s a powerful semi-auto Marksman Rifle that can kill in one shot to the head and two shots to the body at an impressive range. That’s all for our Carrack .300 loadout! For more of Modern Warfare 2 & Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Best Warzone 2 loadouts: Meta weapons and classes to dominate in Al Mazrah | Call of Duty 2024: Early leaks, concept art, Warzone 2.0, Treyarch & more | Call of Duty 2023: Early leaks, Modern Warfare 2, Warzone 2, more | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons: Ultimate tier list with the best classes | Modern Warfare 2 best settings on PC for FPS, graphics, visibility, more

Best Call of Duty players of 2021: Top 5 ranked Call of Duty LeagueThe second season of the Call of Duty League saw a litany of insane plays, high-octane moments, and some serious cash handed out. But which CDL players were the very best? Here are our top 5 CoD players of 2021. The upper echelon of Call of Duty competition seems to only get more and more impressive each season, and 2021 was no different. While Atlanta FaZe had a truly dominant year to help towards securing their dynasty status, teams like Toronto Ultra and Minnesota RØKKR had their share of moments in the limelight, too. That said, certain players just stood out above the others. Every year, some players have a bigger impact on the map, or come seemingly out of nowhere to become dominant forces in the CDL. You can also check out our rankings for the best League of Legends players, best Valorant players, and best Warzone players here. Here is our list of the five best CoD players in 2021. 5. Jamie ‘Insight’ Craven Insight started the 2021 Cold War season on Toronto Ultra’s bench, but his addition to the starting roster was met with immediate MVP-calibre performances. He provided the spark that ignited Toronto Ultra’s Stage 2 Major win, and made them a formidable force throughout the remainder of the 2021 season, including with runner-up medals at the Stage 5 Major and Call of Duty Championship. Insight’s rookie year was one for the ages, and he has firmly made his name as one of the most fearsome players in the CDL. 4. Jovel ‘Cellium’ McArthur Despite teaming with a group of players that will no doubt go down as some of the greatest of all time, Cellium still found ways to stand out in the CDL in 2021, especially in the latter stages of the season. As Atlanta FaZe’s flex player, Cellium was proficient in just about any scenario and with any weapon in hand. He was instrumental in FaZe’s success, especially from Stage 4 onwards, taking over in the respawn modes as well as being the annoying opponent that other CDL teams have come to fear in Search & Destroy. He finished the season with an overall K/D of 1.15, short only of his teammate Simp, making him one of the most efficient slayers in the league. 3. Cameron ‘Cammy’ McKilligan Scottish star Cammy had been a solid performer in previous years, but his Cold War season was absolutely sensational. One of the very few flex players who could truly match Cellium both in terms of skill, adaptability, and pure gunny, he was a constant thorn in the side of his CDL opponents. His partnership with Insight made for one of the most formidable assault rifle duos in Call of Duty, while his ability to clutch up and put on a show — such as his insane 4-piece against FaZe at Champs — was truly astounding, helping keep Toronto one step ahead of the competition. 2. Tyler ‘aBeZy’ Pharris One half of the Tiny Terrors duo, aBeZy is often regarded as the best entry SMG in the game, and that’s hard to dispute. His ability to break a hill, take down multiple enemies and live to hold the objective is second to none, while his first-blood capabilities made Search & Destroy a walk in the park for Atlanta FaZe. Few other SMGs in the league could come close to competing with him in close-quarters combat. Fortunately for FaZe, his best competition is actually his teammate. 1. Chris ‘Simp’ Lehr It’s hard to look past Simp when debating the best Call of Duty player in recent seasons, and the Cold War year in 2021 was proof of that. He finished the season ranked number one for overall K/D at 1.17, and it’s hard to recall a single map where Simp wasn’t a standout player. Recognized almost unanimously as the best CoD player in 2021, Simp was the CDL MVP this year, leading the league in multiple stat lines across all modes and never slowing down. Alongside aBeZy, you may never find a more dominant SMG duo than the Tiny Terrors, and don’t expect that form to disappear in 2022. The question is, can Simp help lead Atlanta FaZe to a similarly successful year? With three Major championships and a world championship ring, it’s hard to imagine these guys getting even better. It’s hard to look past these five individuals as the greatest Call of Duty players of 2021. While names like Arcitys, Standy, HyDra and Shotzzy had great seasons — especially impressive for rookies HyDra and Standy — these five were simply too good, and on the two best teams in the game. Whether their form continues into the 2022 Vanguard season remains to be seen, but it’s safe to say Simp and aBeZy will still be the ones to beat once the year kicks off. Be sure to check out the rest of Dexerto’s Best of 2021 series, for the best players, influencers and games of the year.

Best Call of Duty games of the decade Call of Duty has gone from strength to strength over the past ten years. Activision’s first-person shooter franchise has stayed at the forefront of action gaming for the entirety of the decade, selling hundreds of millions of copies worldwide. Activision has hired the talents of three separate video game developers throughout the course of the past decade. While Call of Duty has dabbled in a variety of time points over the years, consistent gameplay and gripping storylines have ensured that fans return year after year. Call of Duty’s fast-paced action is complimented by its fluid in-game mechanics, which has seen the series’ competitive multiplayer experience mature into a fully fledged esport, as we look forward to the inaugural season of the Call of Duty League. From a realistic game based in the heart of the Battle of Normandy, to futuristic conflict rooted in outer space; Call of Duty has certainly pushed the boundaries over the past ten years. But what were the best Call of Duty games of the decade? We count down the decade’s best titles in descending order. 10. Infinite Warfare Infinite Warfare allowed us to peer into the future, as we moved into outer space conflict. While the franchise’s first-person ethos remained, just about everything else from the franchise felt foreign. From zero-gravity environments to a boost-pack fueled movement system, this iteration was a far cry from what we’ve all come to love about Call of Duty. Come to think of it, we were two lightsabers and a Skywalker short of a Star Wars game. Thankfully, Infinity Ward decided to pursue this avenue further and returned back to their Modern Warfare series in their next release. While on the surface the gameplay mechanics were closer to Halo, it wasn’t all doom and gloom. Infinite Warfare bolstered Call of Duty’s competitive circuit, with a dog-eat-dog season which saw OpTic Gaming break their curse as they claimed their first world championship. Albeit a risky move on Infinity Ward’s part, the series still maintained its loyal fanbase and shattered sales records. 9. WWII If Infinite Warfare is the chalk, then WWII would be the cheese. Sledgehammer Games ushered in a new era of Call of Duty with Advanced Warfare’s ‘jetpack’ style, and after a three-year wait, boots-on-the-ground made its highly anticipated return. Based around the historic events of ‘Operation Overlord,’ WWII’s single player campaign received a ton of criticism for its lack of health regeneration — leaving players scouting for health packs. However, the title’s multiplayer experience introduced the ‘Headquarters’ social space (akin to ‘The Tower’ from Bungie’s Destiny). Playing host to a Quartermaster, 1-versus-1 arena and a firing range, the social space allowed up to 48 players to connect at any given moment. Alongside a well-rounded multiplayer, WWII welcomed back Nazi Zombies, where players would fend off hordes of the Third Reich’s undead. While on paper these features seemed novel, a convoluted progression system which was complimented by difficult contracts were off-putting enough. Add to the mix the extensive list of server issues and plenty of players were counting down the days to Treyarch’s Black Ops 4, mere months after its release. 8. Black Ops 4 After boots-on-the-ground didn’t quite go to plan, Treyarch’s fourth entry into their Black Ops series was met with open arms. After scrapping the traditional single-player campaign to focus more on the multiplayer experience, Black Ops 4 was hyped up by the masses. By carrying over the ‘Specialists’ system from Black Ops 3, Treyarch delivered a meta-driven online experience which remoulded Call of Duty’s player-versus-player combat. While Specialists brought another tactical aspect to the table, automatic health regeneration was removed for the first time in the franchise’s history. Treyarch dedicated plenty of resources into Zombies, by bringing in a plethora of content for their flagship mode. Oh, and did we mention a dedicated battle royale game mode (which quite frankly could have been a game in itself)? Blackout combined the mechanics of Black Ops gameplay with the methodical style which the likes of H1Z1 and PUBG both boasted. An enthralling competitive season stamped Black Ops 4 firmly into the history books. Yet, there always felt like something was missing from a run-of-the-mill Call of Duty — and no, we’re not referring to the aforementioned lack of campaign. Specialists, manual healing, sliding and game-changing abilities all combined into one heap were perhaps a bit too much too soon? 7. Modern Warfare While Black Ops 4 attempted to reinvigorate the Call of Duty multiplayer experience, Modern Warfare brought the franchise back to its roots with Infinity Ward’s reboot of their staple series. A widely successful beta and insightful campaign ensured that Modern Warfare shattered the previous sales record in its opening weekend, set by Black Ops 4. Although, it is the multiplayer which is Modern Warfare’s crown jewels and keeps fans coming back for more. Built on the foundation of its predecessors, Modern Warfare completely overhauled the progression system to a season-based framework, which is designed to value continuous play. An abundance of gun customization options compliment the refined ‘create-a-class’ system, which gives players a sense of ownership over their rig of choice. However, after being inundated with issues from the get-go, Modern Warfare has left fans underwhelmed from a gameplay standpoint. Although, with Infinity Ward at the helm, there is still time to turn their title into a success. With Activision’s Call of Duty League set to kick-off in January 2020, there is no doubt that the developers will be looking to polish their game ready for the world to see. 6. Ghosts Before returning to their roots, Infinity Ward’s last boots-on-the-ground game came in the form of Ghosts. Bridging the gap between console generations, Ghosts was a very consistent game — but that’s about as far it goes. Aside from adding dynamic map elements (similar to what was previously a big feature in Battlefield), there wasn’t really anything worth shouting about. Ghosts’ single-player campaign lacked the ‘wow moment’ that we’ve all come to expect from a Call of Duty storyline, while the multiplayer seemingly played it safe. Perhaps unintentional, Ghosts fortuitously kickstarted a trend which would go on to make Activision billions — character customization through microtransactions. After replacing the create-a-class system with ‘create-a-soldier,’ players could customize everything – from their loadout right the way through to the reticle on their weapon – in one neat bundle. On the whole, Ghosts was a well-rounded game which boasted well-designed multiplayer with solid in-game mechanics — setting up for some remarkable esports moments. The compLexity and OpTic Gaming rivalry is one that still echoes in conversations years on. After coL’s dominant showing at Champs, the GreenWall edged out the compLexity dynasty squad in a close semi-final before going on to take gold at the MLG X Games Invitational. Rivalries such as this effectively planted the seeds for Call of Duty esports to grow into what we know it to be today. 5. Advanced Warfare After Riley’s introduction to the franchise was the pinnacle to an otherwise blasé season, Sledgehammer Games entered the arena in style. Advanced Warfare completely changed the meta with the exo-suit, which quite literally took Call of Duty to new heights. The game’s thrilling futuristic campaign delved into the politics behind military contractors while integrating Call of Duty’s trademark plot twists along the way. Combine the gripping narrative with a newfound way to traverse the battlefield, and long-time fans were hooked back into the Call of Duty franchise and veered away from Respawn’s Titanfall and Bungie’s Destiny. Advanced Warfare injected a new level of excitement into its content-rich multiplayer. Black Ops 2’s ‘Pick 10’ system was renovated into ‘Pick 13,’ which neatly tied gun customization, exo-suit abilities and scorestreaks into a user-friendly system. Weapon variations could be unlocked through supply drops, which issued fans an incentive to grind the multiplayer (in the hopes that they’d unlock a fresh cosmetic to rock in the server). Alongside all of the above, Sledgehammer Games commemorated a successful esports season by releasing a ‘Call of Duty World Championship Personalization Pack’ for fans to flaunt in-game. All in all, Advanced Warfare was a trendsetter and was widely considered a success. 4. Modern Warfare 3 Prior to leading their own title, Sledgehammer Games collaborated with Infinity Ward to develop the third installment to the Modern Warfare series. With big boots to fill from Modern Warfare’s previous installments, the game did not disappoint. Modern Warfare 3 wrapped up the trilogy which singlehandedly redefined the first-person shooter genre. Its single-player campaign followed on from Modern Warfare 2’s final mission, and left fans with a sense of closure while simultaneously providing an action-packed story along the way. However, it was Modern Warfare 3’s multiplayer which captivated a generation. Building on from its precursor, Infinity Ward delivered a well-balanced online experience that possessed all of the key elements which became standard Call of Duty fare. Strike packages were tailored to each playstyle, meaning that there was something for everyone. Assault packages had the most impact, while Support packages worked on total points accrued (rewarding players for a more objective-based playstyle). Incredibly designed maps meant that competitive Call of Duty flourished. The season got underway with Call of Duty XP, where the GreenWall bagged the lion’s share of the first ever $1 million prize pool in the franchise’s history. OpTic Gaming would go on to dominate the remainder of the season, with various trips across the pond to EGL tournaments — which was the first real hint that Call of Duty was going international. 3. Black Ops 3 After fans were left giddy from Advanced Warfare’s innovative movement system, Treyarch were tasked with taking Black Ops into the new era while building on the success of Black Ops 2. Black Ops 3 built on its second installment’s storyline, in a world plagued by the ramifications of climate change and new technologies. Set 40 years in the future, your character was cybernetically enhanced for combat, which opened up the avenue for Specialists — a novel character system which played into futuristic warfare while adding an additional strategic layer to gameplay. By employing momentum-based movement system, players could utilize their thruster packs to perform a variety of movements both on the ground and in the air — a natural evolution from Advanced Warfare’s system. The Gunsmith also allowed for a seemingly endless list of possibilities when it came to customizing your weapon’s aesthetic. Players were more nimble than ever before, which lended itself into thrilling and adrenaline-fueled gameplay rendering fans on the edge of their seats. Perhaps it was fitting, then, that this was the first year that Activision supported the game’s competitive circuit with the Call of Duty World League. A host of international tournaments later and who’d have thought that four seasons on we’d be staring franchised Call of Duty in the face? 2. Black Ops The OG. Where it all began. Treyarch’s first installment into the Black Ops series helped them to break free from Infinity Ward’s shackles and allowed them fully spread their wings. Black Ops’ storyline revolved around exploring conspiracy theories alongside dabbling in politics and espionage, while holding apt references to their previous ‘World at War’ title. Players were taken on a journey as Alex Mason, a CIA agent who’d constantly refer back to ‘the numbers’ throughout the course of the story. Although Treyarch delivered a blockbuster campaign, the multiplayer experience was an essential ingredient which transcended Call of Duty into a new era. Weapon customization. Co-op zombies. Wager matches. Theatre mode. Nuketown… oh Nuketown. Treyarch pulled off the seemingly impossible with Black Ops, by giving fans a thoroughly designed, well-balanced online experience while maintaining the fun and competitive nature at the root of Call of Duty. A campaign which left fans desperate for more, alongside a revolutionary multiplayer… It’s safe to say that Treyarch firmly placed their name on the map with Black Ops. 1. Black Ops 2 What could top the original Black Ops you might ask? Well, somehow, Treyarch managed to outdo themselves with the second iteration in their Black Ops series. Continuing on from its compelling Cold War story, the subsequent installment offered players diverging narratives based around two plots — one from the 1980s and another from the not-too-distant future of 2025. While both plots revolved around a mutual protagonist, each player would experience a different ending to the next due to its branching storylines. Black Ops 2’s campaign gave players a feeling of ‘being at the wheel’ as opposed to simply being along for the ride. Yet again, though, it’s the outstanding multiplayer experience which took centre stage. The introduction of the ‘Pick 10’ system put players in the driver’s seat of their class choices, meaning that when orchestrating your point allocation, you could opt for a perk-heavy loadout or a rig that would emphasize on gun optimization. Well-balanced maps, iconic weapons (who could forget the M8A1 or the MSMC?) and the introduction of Hardpoint into the competitive map pool ramped up interest in competitive Call of Duty. Alongside all of this, Treyarch implemented a ‘League Play’ playlist which pitted players against one another of similar abilities. Heck, teams could even qualify for the World Championships at the end of the season if they accrued enough points. On the topic of Champs, Fariko Impact cemented their legacy as one of the best teams to touch the game in an enthralling weekend of action which showcased the true value of Call of Duty esports. The Grand Final between Impact and Team EnVyUs was arguably one of the most tense and entertaining matches in Call of Duty history.

Best Call of Duty campaigns of all-time ranked Infinity WardThe last 10 years have seen the meteoric rise of the Call of Duty name. A genre-defining series that revolutionized the first-person shooter experience. Its award-winning gameplay has profited millions and gained countless fans, so we present to you a list of the best Call of Duty campaigns of all-time, ranked. [jwplayer Q7ySHZq9] Excluding the PS Vita and mobile, there have been a grand total of 16 COD campaigns since its debut in 2003. Some have been intense classics, worthy of gracing the big screen, while others have been more forgettable. But, which are truly the best? We’ve ranked the top 9. Remember, this list is just our opinion – there’s always going to be a debate about your own personal favorite. 9. Call of Duty: WW2 This is where the series finally shifted away from jetpacks and aerial superiority and decided to put its feet back down. A great WW2 story that featured a slow burner involving our squad’s unhinged Sgt. Pierson. It didn’t do anything unfamiliar, but it was an enjoyable slog through the grim surroundings of World War II 8. Call of Duty: Infinite Warfare Despite being negatively received by a lot of the COD community. Infinite Warfare’s campaign tends to get lost in the shuffle, despite one of the franchise’s deepest offerings. The emotional connection formed between Reyes and Ethan is amazing and makes the conclusion heartwarming. Throw in a great performance from Kit Harrington and the sub-par gameplay can be overlooked. 7. Call of Duty: Classic Whilst the start of the COD journey isn’t rife with story and action-packed cutscenes, it is filled with great missions. Some of the all-time COD missions are here such as the Prison Camp, The Dam, Pavlov’s House, etc. The first Call of Duty is a true brute in terms of difficulty – with no regenerating health – and deserves more recognition. 6. Call of Duty: Modern Warfare 3 The Modern Warfare game that is probably remembered the least. It sold well at the time making nearly $1 billion in its opening week. But this is where the campaign’s started to go a bit OTT. It still revels in its inch-perfect gunplay and has some great moments and set-pieces. The destruction of the Eiffel Tower is still an image that still feels hauntingly real and spectacular to this day. 5. Call of Duty: Modern Warfare (2019 Reboot) As a collective package, the reboot is sensational. Judging the standalone campaign, it’s still very good. This was the COD where it went for the jugular in terms of harsh reality. The true horror of war demonstrated for all to see. From meticulous building clearings to disturbing scenes, the Modern Warfare Reboot is a must-play, highly-polished shooter. 4. Call of Duty: World at War Treyarch had the unenviable task of following Call of Duty 4: Modern Warfare, they did so admirably. Returning to the very familiar surroundings of the Second World War, World at War crescendos into a stunning third act. There’s nothing more satisfying than storming the Reichstag and living out one of the finer moments in human history – ending WW2. 3. Call of Duty: Modern Warfare 2 Based solely on campaigns, MW2 places third. Its online is exceptional – as is Spec-Ops – but its main campaign just narrowly falls short in terms of our final two’s quality. We still get classic characters like Captain Price and Soap – and some missions are instantly familiar, even if they are controversial. Modern Warfare 2 still demonstrates the series’ signature gameplay and provides lots of variety. 2. Call of Duty: Black Ops Alex Mason’s scrambled senses make for a compelling, twisty-turny narrative and deservedly earns Black Ops second place. His inability to recall his recent past keeps you hooked until its shocking twist at the very end. We got a brand new time period to visit too which only added to the game’s intrigue and Gary Oldman is sensational as Viktor Reznov. 1. Call of Duty 4: Modern Warfare It just had to be. The importance of this game simply cannot be quantified – particularly its campaign. The online gets a lot of praise, but COD4’s story is second-to-none and is probably the best FPS campaign in history. Superb performances, one blockbuster moment after another, terrifically tight gameplay, and top missions. COD4 is the pinnacle of the Call of Duty campaigns, will another one ever dethrone Infinity Ward‘s masterpiece? And that’s our list folks. Did you disagree with any of our Call of Duty Campaigns ranked choices?

Best Warzone landing spots on Caldera map in Season 4 ActivisionWarzone Pacific Season 4 changed a great deal on Caldera, the vast island map that replaced Verdansk. While this enormous landscape is tough to master, here’s how you can get an early lead with the absolute best landing spots in the game today. With Warzone Season 4 now in full swing, Caldera has seen arguably its biggest shakeup to date. From returning locales to a drought sweeping the area, there’s plenty new to keep in mind when dropping in. Steep hills, massive underground facilities, and wide-open fields come together across Caldera’s diverse range of POIs, making it a difficult area to fully comprehend. You’ll need to play dozens of games to properly get a grip with all the latest changes, but we’ve got you covered with a full guide. From the hottest drop spots in Caldera to the smartest landing zones, here’s a breakdown of the best places to start your run in Warzone Season 4. Contents Best Solo landing spot in Caldera – Best Duo landing spot in Caldera – Best Trios & Quads landing spot in Caldera – Best landing spot for high-kill games in Caldera – Hottest drop spot in Warzone Season 4 – Best landing spot for easier Warzone wins – Best Solo landing spot: Sub Pen When playing alone, the best landing spot is often the safest. Dropping into a huge, open area won’t do you any favors. As a result, Sub Pen is arguably the ideal Solo drop spot to get you on your way to a victory. Loot is plentiful here, so you’ll easily be able to armor up and equip some strong early-game weapons ahead of the Loadout Drops. Though the biggest upside of Sub Pen is its small, enclosed spaces. With plenty of corridors and underground hangars, there’s a slim chance you’ll get third-partied in here. So take your time, loot up, and advance out of Sub Pen with the best odds for survival. Best Duo landing spot: Arsenal When you’re landing as a Duo in Warzone, you always want to ensure there’s enough loot to go around. Dropping into a small POI or even one that’s hotly contested might end your run short. So we’ve settled on Aresnal as a safe bet for any Duo game. Not only is it stacked with tons of weapons, ammo, and cash, especially with the major additions that arrived in Season 4, but vehicles are also present in the area. When you’re done looting up and taking down any early game threats, you can rotate right away and start pushing the pace. Best Trios & Quads landing spot: Fields With a full team by your side, it’s wise to land in a more open area and take advantage of your numbers. Dropping into Fields and specifically rushing for a few quick kills can be more than enough to set your team up for success. Fields is obviously known for its long sightlines, but there are plenty of smaller buildings to keep you out of danger. Keep these in mind and always try to block off at least one angle as you advance, reducing the odds of a third-party interfering and spoiling the fun. Best landing spot for high-kill games: Storage Town Whether you’re familiar with the POI through its time in Verdansk, or it’s new for you in Caldera, Storage Town is an extremely rewarding POI to start you run with. While it’s a hot drop in itself, especially being new in Season 4 with plenty of early fights to be expected, it’s the wide range of loot that makes it a great place to kickstart a high-kill game. After wiping out any initial teams, you should be well-equipped for the first few rotations with a bunch of cash, weapons, and armor. Read More: Best perks to use in Warzone – Moreover, Storage Town’s location allows for some easy navigation no matter where the gas decides to close in. Hottest drop spot in Warzone Season 4: Peak With the layout of Caldera, Peak is naturally the hottest drop spot in Season 4. As the name implies, it’s the highest point of the island. Landing at Peak and clearing out any early squads – of which there will be plenty – gives your team a huge advantage. From this high point, you can easily control the flow of the match. Regardless of where the zone may be focused, you rotate by jumping off and soaring down in any direction. Moreover, you’ll have the upper hand in any gunfight on your descent, with verticality slowing down all those below you. It’s almost always a bloodbath at the beginning of any lobby, so don’t expect to control Peak without a huge effort. Drop in preparing for an early engagement and do your best to keep the entire team standing. Best landing spot for easier wins in Warzone Season 4: Mines If you’re looking for easier wins in Warzone and want to avoid the gamble with a hot drop, Mines is the POI for you. It’s one of Caldera’s biggest locations with plenty of space out in the open and underground as well. Dropping here should give you enough cash to wait for the first available Loadout Drops, getting you on your way to a win. Just be sure to keep an eye on the hills as teams rotating in can get the jump on your team if you’re not careful. Ultimately, each team is always going to have its preferred landing spots. Some are undeniably stronger than others, but just about any POI can be an effective place to start in Caldera. But if you’re looking to get an edge, you can’t go wrong with our suggestions listed above. Let us know your favorite drop in Caldera by tweeting us at @DexertoEsports!

Best C9 loadout in Black Ops 6 beta: Class setup, attachments, perks DexertoThanks to a buff, the C9 has everything needed to become the best close-range weapon in Black Ops 6, and that’s why we’ve put together the ultimate loadout guide, complete with attachments, perks, and much more. Treyarch listened to community feedback and nerfed the Jackal PDW’s damage range after the powerful SMG outclassed ARs during the first beta weekend. With that in mind, if you’re looking for a new SMG to take its place, look no further than the C9. Best Black Ops 6 C9 loadout Barrel: Reinforced Barrel – Underbarrel: Ranger Foregrip – Magazine: Flip Mag – Rear Grip: Quickdraw Grip – Stock: Infiltrator Stock – With this loadout, we focused on improving firepower and mobility without losing the signature balance that makes this weapon so popular in the first place. To start, we recommend using a Reinforced Barrel because it improves damage range and bullet velocity, making medium-range engagements more manageable. Next up, the Ranger Foregrip tackles two glaring weaknesses at once by improving sprinting and movement speed and horizontal recoil. For our magazine, Flip Mag also helps mobility by addressing aim-down sight and sprint-to-fire speeds. This attachment does slightly reduce the magazine ammo capacity but improved reload quickness and other movement buffs make the tradeoff worth it. This loadout would be nothing without the Quickdraw Grip, which provides a massive boost to aim-down-sight speed. And to round out our build, the Infiltrator Stock improves movement when aiming down sights. Players can use an optic if they like, but the C9 has an easy-to-use iron sight that provides a clean sightline with little obstruction. Despite Rapid Fire being a popular attachment for most loadouts during the beta’s first weekend, the gunsmith initially didn’t show that the improved fire rate came at the cost of vertical and horizontal recoil. A faster fire rate would be nice, but the C9 struggles with horizontal recoil, so I would stay away from this attachment even though it’s tempting. Best C9 Perks, Equipment & Combat Specialty Enforcer is the best Combat Specialty in Black Ops 6, at least for SMGs. After getting a kill, this specialty grants a temporary buff to movement speed and health regen rate, both useful for pushing players and chaining kills together. To get these benefits, you’ll need to use the following perks and equipment on your C9 loadout: Wildcard: Perk Greed – Perk 1: Assassin – Perk 2: Gung-Ho – Perk 3: Double Time – Perk 4: Ghost – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stim Shot – Field Upgrade: Trophy System – For attachments, a concerted effort was made to address every C9 weakness. But for our Perks and equipment, we strictly focused on improving mobility and staying off the mini-map while you go on long flanks around the map. Accomplishing that goal starts with choosing Enforcer Perks, as equipping three perks under the same Combat Speciality category activates a special ability. Using Perk Greed grants an extra Perk slot, so it shouldn’t be an issue to reach the required threshold. In this case, the Enforcer Combat Speciality grants a temporary buff to movement speed and health regeneration rate, which will come in handy when you are trying to weave and out around multiple enemies at once. The same applies to Gung-Ho and Double Time as one increases the duration of tactial sprinting, while the other reduces the movement penalties while reloading and also makes it possible to reload while tactical sprinting. Both perks used in tandem, allow operators to freely run around the map and get into multiple gunfights without ever needing to slow down. Omnimovement revolutionized movement in Call of Duty and arguably made SMGs the game’s best class, now that players can sprint and dive in every direction right in front of an enemy. With that in mind, Dexterity is essential as it reduces weapon motion while sliding, jumping, and diving, meaning you will be able to shoot while doing these actions easier. To round out our equipment, Ghost comes with the benefit of being undetectable by radar pings and UAVs. Lastly, the Stim Shot heals wounds and refeshes tactical sprint, which is perfect for aggressive players and Semtex Grenades are the ideal tool for flushing an enemy out from behind cover. C9 SMG pros and cons Where is the C9 in the Black Ops 6 meta? The C9 finds itself in a precarious position as a jack of all trades but a master of none. Other SMGs have better handling and mobility, while other options deal more damage. After the September 6 update, both SMGs have a similar medium damage range of around 26 to 27 meters. Entering the second beta weekend, the C9’s pick rate experienced an uptick to just over 10%, making it the third most popular weapon in the game according to WZStats. The XM4 only beats out the SMG by 0.56%, while the Tanto .22 ranks first at 10.97%, although that could be skewed by the excitement of it being a new weapon. We fully expect a shift in popularity, and the stats agree. Since the C9’s 246-millisecond time-to-kill speed bests the Jackal PDW’s 264 ms time in the first damage range, we expect the C9 to become one of the best weapons in Black Ops 6 and possibly the best of its class. How to unlock the C9 SMG The C9 is unlocked as soon as you get access to custom loadouts at level 4, making it one of the easiest guns to unlock in the beta. Simply play a few games to reach the required level, and you’ll be able to use the SMG in your classes. Black Ops 6 C9 alternatives If you don’t like the C9, the Jackal PDW and Tanto .22 will be the best alternative options. Despite getting nerfed, the Jackal still shreds through enemies up close and personal and boasts class-leading mobility and handling. Meanwhile, the Tanto .22 offers a refreshing change of pace, as the SMG fires much slower than other class options but packs a devastating punch in medium-range gunfights. And for a better idea of which other weapons stand out so far, check out our Black Ops 6 weapon tier list.

Best Bullfrog Warzone class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup ActivisionIn Warzone, the Bullfrog is an undervalued SMG, distinguished by its large magazine, swift fire rate, and potent damage. While it may not be the first choice for every player, it proves its worth when equipped with the optimal attachments. The Black Ops Cold War Bullfrog often gets lost among the dominant Vanguard weapons. Still, its comfortable recoil and substantial magazine size make it a versatile contender, capable of handling foes from a distance without needing constant reloading. Putting together a full Bullfrog loadout can really maximize the gun’s potential. Whether you want the best Bullfrog loadout for Warzone Season 5 or BOCW multiplayer, our loadouts can be tweaked to suit any play style. Here are the best Bullfrog loadouts for you to consider in Season 5. Contents Best Bullfrog loadout for Warzone – Best Bullfrog loadout for Black Ops Cold War – How to unlock the Bullfrog in Warzone – Best Bullfrog loadout Warzone tips – Alternative to the Bullfrog loadout – Best Bullfrog loadout for Warzone Attachments Muzzle: GRU Suppressor – Barrel: 7.4″ Task Force – Underbarrel: Bruiser Grip – Stock: KGB Skeletal Stock – Laser: Tiger Team Spotlight – Perks First Perk: E.O.D – Second Perk: Overkill – Third Perk: Amped – Equipment Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Throwing Knife – First of all, you’ll want to equip the GRU Suppressor in the muzzle slot for the increased bullet velocity, damage range, and of course, sound suppression. After that, pick up the 7.4″ Task Force barrel for even more bullet velocity and the Bruiser Grip to boost the weapon’s hip-fire accuracy. Finally, round off the loadout with the KGB Skeletal Stock for a reduction in ADS time. As far as potential modifications, if you want even more mobility — feel free to swap out the GRU Suppressor for the Sound Suppressor as a possible alternative. See the latest Call Of Duty deals here E.O.D is a well-renowned Perk commonly used by many Warzone players as it allows you to survive explosion damage, whereas Overkill gives us the security of another weapon in the event of the first weapon needing to reload, you needing a closer-range weapon, or going dry with your Primary altogether. The MP40 or Marco 5 will do this job nicely. Amped finishes off the Perks as, again, it allows you to switch to your other weapon in much-needed scenarios. Best Bullfrog loadout for Black Ops Cold War Attachments Optic: Microflex LED – Muzzle: Spetsnaz Compensator – Barrel: 7.4″ Task Force – Body: Steady Aim Laser – Underbarrel: Spetsnaz Grip – Magazine: VDV 85 RND Fast Mag – Handle: GRU Elastic Wrap – Stock: KGB Skeletal Stock – Perks First Perk: Flak Jacket – Second Perk: Scavenger – Third Perk: Ninja – Equipment Tactical: Stimshot – Lethal: Grenade – Field Upgrade: Field Mic – Wildcard Gunfighter – Black Ops Cold War’s maps offer plenty of opportunities for players to best their opponents in close-quarters combat. This Gunfighter loadout aims to bolster every aspect of the gun, making it more stable and deadly than ever before. First up is the Microflex LED. This optic offers excellent clarity thanks to its unobtrusive design, while the 1.25x zoom makes it perfect for spotting out close to mid-range targets. The Bullfrog does have some pretty strong vertical recoil, so the Spetsnaz Compensator and Spetsnaz Grip will keep the gun in control, allowing you to lock onto your target. Even with these attachments, you’ll still need to pull down on your mouse/analog stick to control the bullet spread during mid-range firefights. However, the increased damage range/bullet velocity from the 7.4” Task Force does make it more viable outside of the usual SMG range. Of course, it’s still often best to avoid any areas that have particularly big sightlines. Instead, focus on flanking and use the Bullfrog’s great mobility to aggressively rush your enemies. The Steady Aim Laser, KGB Skeletal Stock, and GRU Elastic Wrap allow you to be more reactive in your playstyle. Not only do these speed-enhancing attachments give you increased hip fire accuracy and sprint to fire time, but they also bolster your ADS. These attachments are the bread and butter of any good SMG class, so you want to use them if you wish to pull off those all-important flanks. Lastly, the VDV 85 RND Fast Mag gives you a huge amount of ammo to melt multiple foes with. Whether your aim isn’t as accurate as it used to be or you just want to crack that reload habit, then be sure to equip this magazine. Even if you do find yourself constantly reloading after every shot, the Bullfrog’s reload animation is incredibly fast. How to unlock the Bullfrog in Warzone In order to unlock the Bullfrog in Warzone, you either need to raise your account up to Level 43 or buy a bundle with the gun in either Warzone or BOCW. If you do decide to buy a bundle, the Racer 01 Blueprint is your best bet. It’s part of the Super Charged: Reactive pack, which comes with the AUG Racer 02 Blueprint and a spinning rim charm, so there’s a bang for your buck. Most importantly, though, the Racer 01 Blueprint comes equipped with the best Muzzle and Barrel for the Bullfrog, as well as viable Stock and Ammunition options — making it the best Blueprint for the gun. Best Bullfrog loadout Warzone tips Warzone’s Bulldog SMG is a perfect fit for players who enjoy using SMGs but also like having the range benefits that not all SMGs offer. This weapon may have a slightly slower fire rate, but it makes up for that with very controllable recoil and accuracy. To take full of advantage of our best Bullfrog loadout listed above, here are some tips you should take into consideration: Even though the Bulldog is classified as an SMG, it’s more than capable of downing enemies at farther distances than normal thanks to its accuracy, huge magazine size, and range benefits. This means you can be a lot more versatile when using this weapon. – Despite having solid range, you’ll still want to use this weapon like a typical SMG. This means playing a bit more aggressively when it’s equipped and avoiding enemies with ARs, snipers, and LMGs. – The tactical equipment Stimshot allows you to replenish your health and sprint when used. For those gunfights that leave you vulnerable, this is ideal for getting you back into action. – Alternative to the Bullfrog loadout If you’re looking for an alternative loadout to the Bullfrog, then check out our MP40 loadout. This powerful SMG packs a punch and can be a great substitute for the Bullfrog. Since the release of Vanguard and a reworked in-game meta, the MP40 has turned into an absolute beast. The weapon now sits comfortably as one of the strongest contenders on our SMG rankings for Warzone, thanks to its damage range and excellent mobility. Its fast fire rate, decent damage output, and great accuracy will enable you to mow down multiple foes in Warzone Season 5. There you have it, some dangerous Bullfrog loadouts for Warzone Season 5. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Call of Duty news and updates, then follow us over on @DexertoEsports. If you’re looking for more of the best Warzone loadouts and tips? Check out our list of guides below: C58 | Grau 5.56 | Kilo 141 | Krig 6 | CR-56 AMAX | FFAR 1 | MAC-10 | MP5 | Kar98k | HDR | Best controller settings | Top 10 best class setups and loadouts | Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Sniper Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | FFAR Warzone class | Top 20 highest-earning players | Best Warzone Weapons | Bren Loadout | Cooper Carbine Loadout If you click on a product link on this page we may earn a small affiliate commission.

Best Bryson 890 Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments & Perks Season 4 has seen shotguns rise in popularity thanks to a class-wide buff with the highly mobile Bryson 890 now being a great pick for those for a top-tier close-range weapon. This is our recommended loadout to use with the Bryson 890 in Warzone 2. The Bryson 890 is a pump action shotgun based on the real-world Mossberg 590M. It is effectively a Bryson 800 that reloads using magazines rather than being a traditional tube-fed shotgun like its cousin. It also offers superior mobility than any other shotgun in the category making it an excellent choice for more aggressive Warzone 2 players. Being able to run into a building, down an enemy in two shots, and quickly escape is not something many other guns can do. Despite its strengths the Bryson 890 can struggle if you don’t build it correctly, so you’ll want to be using this loadout to get the most of it in Warzone 2. Contents Best Bryson 890 Warzone 2 loadout – Best Bryson 890 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Bryson 890 in Warzone 2 – Best Bryson 890 alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best Bryson 890 Warzone 2 loadout Muzzle: Bryson Choke (+0.07, -0.01) – Barrel: 21.5″ Bryson Tacfire (-0.21, +0.14) – Laser: VLK LZR 7mW (-0.19, -32.90) – Stock: Stockless Pistol Grip – Guard: Demo Dropzone Pump (-0.20, -0.07) – First and foremost it’s important to optimize the Bryson 890’s two-shot kill potential. To make the 890 even more consistent we use the 21.5″ Bryson Tacfire barrel to increase Damage Range and the Bryson Choke muzzle to tighten Pellet Spread. To avoid the 890 becoming too slow and clunky we recommend using the VLK LZR 7mW laser which greatly improves Aim Down Sights speed. However, be aware that this laser is highly visible when aimed and will give away your position if used carelessly. Since the 890’s specialty is its mobility it’s best to make the most of it by using the Demo Dropzone Pump. This Guard attachment increases Sprint Speed and Hip Walking Speed letting you play faster and more aggressively. Finally, the Stockless Pistol Grip is an excellent attachment that offers sizable boosts to ADS speed, Sprint to Fire Speed, and even Movement Speed. The only downside to this attachment is an increase in recoil but that’s negligible due to the 890’s slow fire rate. Best Bryson 890 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Double Time – Bonus Perk: Spotter – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Grenade – Tactical Equipment: Stun Grenade – Partnering Overkill with Double Time makes a lot of sense when using such a mobile primary. Overkill lets you run a versatile secondary like an assault rifle of choice to cover the Bryson 890’s weaknesses. Meanwhile, Double Time will help you get around faster and close the gap on enemies. As for the Bonus Perk, Spotter is a great way to keep safe from any hidden tricky Claymores or Proximity Mines. It’s an ideal Perk to use when you’re most likely going to be running around constantly pushing buildings. With how prevalent UAVs are in Warzone 2 it’s never a bad idea to use Ghost. Not only does Ghost keep you off enemy UAVs, but it also provides immunity to Heartbeat Sensors which have seen more playtime since they were buffed in Season 2. Lastly, we recommend using Frag Grenades and Stun Grenades for your lethal and tactical. Both will allow you to easily storm a room by both damaging and confusing them before cleaning up with the Bryson 890. How to unlock the Bryson 890 in Warzone 2 You can unlock the Bryson 890 by reaching level 16 with the Bryson 800, a weapon you get access to from the beginning of the game. It shouldn’t take too long to level up the mag-fed shotgun’s cousin with a few successful games or an XP Token. Best Bryson 890 alternatives in Warzone 2 If you’re tired of the Bryson 890 but still want to stay in the Shotgun category, we recommend trying out the Lockwood 300, a devastating double-barreled shotgun that can also down enemies in two shots. Alternatively, if it’s the 890’s close-range mobility that you enjoy then a strong SMG like the Lachmann Sub can also work. That’s all for the best Bryson 890 loadout in Warzone 2. Be sure to take a look at some of our other handy MW2 and Warzone 2 content: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work? | How to use armor plates while running | Do you need PS Plus and Xbox Live Gold to play Warzone 2? | Best Warzone 2.0 AR class loadouts | Best Warzone 2.0 Sniper Rifle class loadouts

Best Bryson 890 Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, Attachments & Perks ActivisionModern Warfare 2’s Bryson 890 is a powerful shotgun capable of wiping out the enemy in only a few hits. However, the lack of range and handling can force you into positions you’d rather stay away from. With the right loadout, this can be easily eliminated and you can get back to taking down enemies with ease. Modern Warfare 2 has a plethora of weapons ranging from quick-burst SMGs to long-range deadly snipers. While staying away from the fight is undeniably safer, some players want to be right in the action while still dealing that fantastic damage. This is where shotguns come in. They’re powerful, quick, and make taking objectives easy. The Bryson 890 is no different. It contains that desired power but does have some rather frustrating flaws. Luckily, those flaws can be fixed with a great loadout. We’ve got the best Bryson 890 loadout in Modern Warfare 2 along with what perks, equipment, and attachments you should use. Contents Best Bryson 890 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best Bryson 890 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock Bryson 890 in Modern Warfare 2 – Best alternatives to Bryson 890 in Modern Warfare 2 – Best Bryson 890 Modern Warfare 2 loadout Muzzle: Bryson Improved Choke – Underbarrel: VX Pineapple – Laser: STOVL Tac Laser – Barrel: 21.5” Bryson Tacfire – Stock: Sawed Off Mod – The Bryson 890 already has the damage required to take down an enemy but lacks any sort of range, meaning you essentially have to be right in their face before being able to take them down. This is why we recommend using the Bryson Improved Choke muzzle which offers a tighter pellet spread and extends the weapons range. To add to that, we added the 21.5” Bryson Tacfire barrel to again tighten that pellet spread and increase your damage range by helping your bullet velocity. A tighter pellet spread means more control and quicker kills. While increasing your range and tightening your pellet spread is useful, you still need to be able to accurately aim, which can be a challenge with a shotgun like the Bryson 890. Therefore, we recommend using the VX Pineapple underbarrel and the STOVL Tac Laser for that bonus to hip fire accuracy and hip fire recoil control. It’s likely you’ll be using the shotgun by hip firing rather than looking down the sight but we’ve added the Sawed Off Mod stock to keep the weapon versatile by increasing your ADS, sprint to fire, and hip fire recoil control. Best Bryson 890 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Double Time – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Shock Stick – As for the perks and equipment, we recommend using the two base perks, Overkill and Double Time. Overkill will allow you to equip something with a bit more range like the M4 while Double Time will grant you some extra sprint time to get to the objective. Due to the use of Overkill, we suggest using the Bonus Perk, Fast Hands. This will help you reload, change weapons, and use your equipment much quicker, getting that all-important first shot. When it comes to Ultimate Perks, nothing beats Ghost. It’s undeniably one of the best perks in the game and will keep you safe from all those UAVs. Lastly, the best equipment for the Bryson 890 is Semtex and Shock Sticks. Semtex is fantastically powerful and will take the enemy down when you can’t. Shock Sticks will confuse anyone on the objective and allow you to get the drop on them How to unlock Bryson 890 in Modern Warfare 2 Unlocking the Bryson 890 is relatively simple. All you need to do is get the Bryson 800 to level 16. Luckily, you get access to the Bryson 800 from the start of the game so it’s likely you’ll be able to use the Bryson 890 relatively soon after. Best alternatives to Bryson 890 in Modern Warfare 2 If the Bryson 890 just isn’t quite cutting it then we recommend heading back to the Bryson 800 and working with that. It’s arguably one of the best shotguns in Modern Warfare 2. However, if the shotguns are a bit too slow or you want to try something new, we recommend trying out the Fennec 45 SMG for a quicker match. Now you have the best Bryson 890 loadout in Modern Warfare 2, you can get right back to wiping out the enemy. While loading up a new game, take a look at some of our other handy Modern Warfare 2 guides: How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to unlock MP5 SMG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2 | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best Bryson 800 Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks Outside of bugs, pump action shotguns haven’t seen much use throughout Warzone’s history. However, buffs to all shotguns in Season 4 have seen them become more effective than ever and the Bryson 800 might be the best of all. This is our best Bryson 800 loadout to use in Warzone 2. The Season 4 update for Warzone 2 saw all shotguns receive a big buff with their pellets dealing much more reliable damage. Additionally, the Bryson 800 had all of its range multipliers increased giving it some extra firepower when used at an appropriate range. When combined these buffs result in the Bryson 800 being able to consistently down enemies in just two shots. That gives it a TTK that even the best SMGs and other close-range weapons struggle to compete with. Although the Bryson isn’t quite as versatile as those weapons keeping it reasonably balanced. To get the most out of this shotgun you’ll need the best Bryson 800 loadout for Warzone 2, and luckily we’ve got you covered. Contents Best Bryson 800 Warzone 2 loadout – Best Bryson 800 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Bryson 800 in Warzone 2 – Best Bryson 800 alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best Bryson 800 Warzone 2 loadout Muzzle: Bryson Choke (+0.05, +0.24) – Barrel: 29.5″ Rifled Barrel (-0.24, +0.23) – Laser: VLK LZR 7mW (-0.18, -51.00) – Stock: Stockless Pistol Grip – Guard: Demo Dropzone Pump (-0.12, -0.12) – Most shotgun loadouts benefit greatly from Tighter Pellet Spread and increased Damage Range, and the Bryson 800 is no exception. To optimize these key stats it’s recommended to use both the Bryson Choke and 29.5″ Rifled Barrel which are the most impactful attachments on this shotgun. The downside to those two attachments is they can leave the Bryson 800 feeling slow, especially in terms of aim-down sights time. To counteract this use the VLK LZR 7mW which greatly improves ADS speed and even provides a nice bonus to the 800’s Sprint to Fire Speed. Speaking of Sprint to Fire Speed, the Stockless Pistol Grip is an incredibly powerful attachment that makes the Bryson 800 feely snappy and responsive. Even better, the only downside to this stock is increased recoil which is negligible on a pump action shotgun like this due to its slow fire rate. Finally, the Demo Dropzone Pump is chosen for its increased mobility via Sprint Speed and Hip Walking Speed. This increase in mobility is really nice as it enables more aggressive play and allows you to get around faster while using the Bryson 800. Best Bryson 800 Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Double Time – Bonus Perk: Spotter – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Drill Charge – Tactical Equipment: Stun Grenade – For Base Perks, we recommend Overkill and Double Time. Overkill is a must as it lets you use a secondary AR or LMG to cover the Bryson 800’s obvious weaknesses. Meanwhile, Double Time lets you sprint around for longer enabling the kind of aggressive play that’s suitable for a shotgun. As for your Bonus Perk, Spotter is a great way to keep an eye on any hidden killstreaks, Proximity Mines, and Claymores before you set them off. The last Perk is High Alert which is a strong choice providing intel on an enemy’s location whenever they aim at you without Cold-Blooded. Since Cold-Blooded is quite rare in Warzone you can expect this Perk to constantly proc. Lastly, we recommend using a Drill Charge and a Stun Grenade to help you quickly flush out a room filled with enemies, letting you quickly get in there with your shotgun and finish them all off. How to unlock the Bryson 800 in Warzone 2 Thankfully, you don’t need to do anything to unlock the Bryson 800 in either Modern Warfare 2 or Warzone 2. The Bryson 800 is unlocked as soon as you get into the game, making it nice and accessible. Be aware that even more so than with most other types of guns shotguns are heavily reliant on weapon tuning. Until you have the Bryson 800 at max level with the appropriate tuning it may be difficult to use. Best Bryson 800 alternatives in Warzone 2 If the Bryson 800 just isn’t the type of Shotgun you’re looking for, we recommend trying its cousin, the Bryson 890. At the slight cost of some range the 890 offers better handling and a far faster reload. Alternatively, the KV Broadside is a more spammable shotgun that is perfect for fulfilling that run-and-gun fantasy while mowing down enemies one after another. That’s the best Bryson 800 loadout in Warzone 2. For more useful information consider checking out some of our other handy Modern Warfare 2 and Warzone 2 guides: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work? | How to use armor plates while running | Do you need PS Plus and Xbox Live Gold to play Warzone 2? | Best Warzone 2.0 AR class loadouts | Best Warzone 2.0 Sniper Rifle class loadouts

Best Bryson 800 Modern Warfare 2 loadout: Class setup, Attachments & Perks ActivisionModern Warfare 2’s Bryson 800 can pack a serious punch with the right build. That’s why we’ve got the best Bryson 800 class and loadout with the best attachments, Perks, and equipment to keep you at the top of the leaderboard. Modern Warfare 2 has a variety of powerful weapons in its Meta. The game’s filled with deadly assault rifles, snipers, and shotguns. One such deadly shotgun is the Bryson 800. It deals fantastic damage, has impressive recoil control, and has excellent mobility. However, you can only capitalize on those positives with the right loadout. We’ve got the best Bryson 800 loadout with all the best attachments, Perks, and equipment to help you dominate the battlefield with this superb shotgun. If you’re looking for a powerful Warzone 2 Bryson 800 loadout instead, we’ve got a perfect choice. Contents Best Bryson 800 Modern Warfare 2 loadout – Best Bryson 800 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock Bryson 800 in Modern Warfare 2 – Best alternatives to Bryson 800 in Modern Warfare 2 – Best Bryson 800 Modern Warfare 2 loadout Muzzle: XTEN Modified Choke – Barrel: 16″ Bryson Shockwave – Stock: Sawed Off Mod – Guard: Demo X50 Tactical Pump – Underbarrel: VX Pineapple – The key to the Bryson 800 is stopping power and the XTEN Modified Choke Muzzle paired with the 16″ Bryson Shockwave Barrel will get the job done. To circumvent the Shotgun’s mighty recoil, using the Sawed-Off Mod, Demo X50 Tactical Pump Guard and VX Pineapple Underbarrel will keep the Bryson 800 under control. Best Bryson 800 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Battle Hardened – Base Perk 2: Double Time – Bonus Perk: Quick Fix – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Shock Stick – You’ll need Battle Hardened to reduce the impact from Flash, Stun, EMP, Gas Grenades, and Shock Sticks. Double Time will add some extra Tactical Sprint time as you dash around the map. Quick Fix is a lifesaver for this loadout, as you’ll gain health faster from each enemy killed, as well as faster health regeneration. Lastly, Ghost will shield you from UAVs, Portable Radars, and Heartbeat Sensors. How to unlock Bryson 800 in Modern Warfare 2 The Bryson 800 is unlocked automatically within the game’s multiplayer, but you’ll need to level up the base receiver to Level 16 if you want the Bryson 890. Best alternatives to Bryson 800 in Modern Warfare 2 If you’ve experimented with the Bryson 800 and would like to try something new, we’d recommend swapping over to the Fennec 45 – a premier quality SMG. Be sure to check out some other guides we’ve compiled for Modern Warfare 2: All Modern Warfare 2 beta maps and game modes | How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to unlock MP5 SMG loadout in Modern Warfare 2 | How to Slide Cancel in the Modern Warfare 2 Beta | How to unlock Oni Operator & Blueprint in Modern Warfare 2 | All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best Bruen Mk9 Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks This powerful LMG has proven itself to be a solid weapon in Season 4 Reloaded, and this is the best loadout to use with the Bruen Mk9 to dominate in Warzone. Those who played the original Call of Duty: Warzone should already be familiar with the Bruen Mk9 with the LMG having previously dominated Verdansk for a period. This interpretation of the M249 SAW has now returned to Warzone and once again established itself as a serious meta contender. You’ll need a top-tier loadout to help you get the most out of this heavy-duty LMG in Season 4 Reloaded. Contents Best Bruen Mk9 LSW loadout – Bruen Mk9 loadout: Perks and equipment – How to unlock Bruen Mk9 in Warzone – Best alternative to Bruen Mk9 in Warzone – Best Bruen Mk9 Warzone loadout Muzzle: VT-7 Spiritfire Suppressor – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Underbarrel: Bruen Heavy Support Grip – Magazine: 60 Round Mag – Rear Grip: Stip-40 Grip – The Bruen Mk9 has a lot of horizontal recoil which makes it difficult to control, especially on a controller. To fix this it’s best to use both the Bruen Heavy Support Grip underbarrel and the Stip-40 Grip rear grip which makes its recoil much more predictable. You’ll want to then equip the VT-7 Spiritfire Suppressor which not only silences the LMG but also further improves recoil control and damage range. The range with this muzzle is so good that a barrel attachment is unnecessary which helps avoid making the Bruen Mk9 feel too slow. Those familiar with the Bruen will already know that its signature 60 Round Mag attachment is amongst one of the best in Warzone. While a smaller mag is not typically a good idea it is worthwhile here as the improvements it provides to handling and reload speed are nothing short of spectacular. Finally, a suitable medium to long-range optic like the JAK Glassless Optic is recommended to make it easier to track and down enemies from a distance. Bruen Mk9 Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time Increases Tactical Sprint duration and reduces refresh time. – – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand Reload faster. The slower the base reload time, the bigger the bonus. – – Perk 3: Quick Fix Killing players or inserting a plate immediately starts health regeneration. – – Perk 4: Resolute When taking damage from gunfire, it grants a short bonus to movement speed. Movement speed increased by 5%. – – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Battle Rage – Double Time offers an appealing option in Perk slot 1 as the enhanced tactical sprint it provides can cover up the Bruen’s low mobility. For Perk Slot 2, we like Sleight of Hand as it makes reloading this massive clip much easier than it normally is. Quick Fix is never a bad option for Perk slot 3 as it will kickstart your health regeneration and help keep you alive longer when you are in a bind. The Perk 4 Resolute works well with the Bruen Mk9 as it speeds you up after getting fired at. This can be especially useful to avoid follow-up shots which would otherwise be difficult to dodge with a heavy LMG like this. Equipment-wise, a combination of a Throwing Knife for a fast and efficient lethal and Battle Rage for some fast healing during heated moments which can be the defining moment in a close gunfight. How to unlock Bruen Mk9 in Warzone The Bruen Mk9 is unlocked after reaching Level 31 by playing either Warzone, multiplayer, or Zombies. Alternatively, extracting with a Bruen Mk9 in Zombies will also unlock the gun letting you skip the grind. Best alternative to Bruen Mk9 in Warzone The DG-58 LSW is a strong alternative to the Bruen Mk9. Just like the Bruen, it’s also a forgiving LMG with above-average handling, great range, and an impressive TTK There are plenty of powerful weapons in Warzone, so check out how to deck out the Kar98k, the MCW, the Superi 46, and the FJX Horus.

Best Bruen Mk9 Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks ActivisionThe Bruen Mk9 is one of the strongest Light Machine Guns in Warzone Pacific that can easily help you win gunfights from just about any range. To help get the most out of this lethal weapon, we’ve got you covered with the best Bruen Mk9 loadout, along with Perks and attachments. While Assault Rifles and Submachine Guns have been the go-to weapons for many seasons in Warzone, you can never truly count LMGs out. Even though the Bruen is not as effective as it once was, you can still find some measure of success with it in the game. Even though there are various LMGs in Warzone, the Bruen Mk9 has still managed to be one of the better picks. To get the most out of the weapon, take a look at our optimal loadout to help you obliterate enemies in Caldera. Contents Best Bruen Mk9 Warzone loadout – Best Bruen Mk9 setup (Perks & equipment) – How to unlock the Bruen Mk9 in Warzone – Alternative to the Bruen Mk9 loadout – Best Bruen Mk9 Warzone loadout Attachments Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: XRK Summit 26.8” – Optic: VLK 3.0x Optic – Underbarrel: Commando Foregrip – Magazine: 60 Round Mags – First and foremost, it’s vital that you combine the Monolithic Suppressor and XRK Summit 26.8” barrel. Both of these attachments will boost your Bullet Velocity by a total of 50%, helping you beam targets up close and afar. The second you pull the trigger, you’ll feel your shots landing much faster than usual. The VLK 3.0x Optic, a popular pick for any LMG setup, perfectly compliments these attachments. Not only will this attachment keep you fast on your feet, but it allows you to engage in gunfights from across the map with accuracy and precision. With the Commando Foregrip underbarrel in effect as well, you won’t have to worry about outrageous recoil. Vertical spray patterns will be kept in check, helping you laser down foes in a matter of moments. Last but not least, no LMG would be fit without a magazine upgrade. While you can equip a 200 Round Belt on the Bruen, we recommend the 60 Round Mags instead. This adds to your mobility, keeps you in control, and also aids you in the action rather than forcing you to hide and reload. Best Bruen Mk9 setup (Perks & equipment) Perk 1: Cold-Blooded – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: OTs 9 – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Plenty of players are still running Combat Scout in 2022, so it’s best that you have Cold-Blooded to counter it. It’ll stop you from being pinged when hit by someone with Combat Scout equipped, and is invaluable to have. Meanwhile, Amped and Overkill combine to give you a powerful secondary weapon. When the Bruen runs dry or you simply find yourself in a close-range fight, these Perks let you swap to an SMG and instantly engage with anyone nearby. To round it off, there’s no better equipment than the Semtex grenade and a Heartbeat Sensor. Both will help finish your kills and give you more intel than any other tools in Warzone today. How to unlock the Bruen Mk9 in Warzone In order to unlock the Bruen Mk9 in Warzone, you need to kill 3 players near smoke with an LMG in 15 different matches. While it may sound like your target needs to be near smoke, that’s not actually the case. Instead, you can be the one standing inside a Smoke Grenade while shooting out of it. Therefore, equipping a Thermal Smoke and dropping your own Smoke Grenades at your feet is the easiest way to get this done. You’ll be able to spot enemies through your smoke and quickly wipe them out. Drop into a few quick games of plunder to smash through this challenge as efficiently as possible. Alternative to the Bruen Mk9 loadout We understand that many players are maining either the Bren, MG42, or Bruen as their LMG of choice. So if you fancy moving away from an LMG, then you can’t go wrong with some tried and tested ARs and SMGs. The STG is always a beastly option to use in Caldera, and you could even pair it up with something deadly like the PPSH-41, MP40, or MAC-10. So there you have it, the best Bruen Mk9 setup for Warzone Pacific Caldera and Rebirth Island. Keep your eyes peeled on @DexertoIntel as the meta continues to evolve. Looking for more Warzone loadouts and tips? Check out our list of guides below: C58 | Grau 5.56 | Kilo 141 | Krig 6 | CR-56 AMAX | FFAR 1 | MAC 10 | MP5 | Kar98k | HDR | Best controller settings | Top 10 best class setups and loadouts | Top highest-earning Warzone players

Best Bruen Mk9 MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachment, perks This Bruen Mk9 loadout in MW3 transforms this typically sluggish weapon into a surprisingly agile primary weapon that can compete against assault rifles and LMGs alike. The Bruen Mk9 is a surprisingly versatile weapon that can effectively be used like an AR. However, unlike most assault rifles, it has unbelievable range making the Bruen one of the strongest weapons in MW3 Season 3. This is the best Bruen Mk9 loadout to use and get the most out of this highly adaptable light machine gun, turning it into an LMG-AR hybrid that thrives in medium-range gunfights. Contents Best Bruen Mk9 loadout in MW3 – Best Bruen Mk9 MW3 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Bruen Mk9 in MW3 – Best Bruen Mk9 alternative in Modern Warfare 3 – Best Bruen Mk9 MW3 loadout Attachments Barrel: 23″ EXF Foresight Barrel – Optic: MORS Red Dot – Stock: Lane-56 Stock – Underbarrel: XRK Edge BW-4 Handstop – Magazine: 60 Round Mag – The main strength of the Bruen Mk9 is that it’s an LMG that can be built for mobility and handling. To take advantage of this you must use the 60 Round Mag. It is one of the best attachments in Modern Warfare 3 as it boosts ADS speed, sprint-to-fire speed, and movement speed with very few downsides. To further improve mobility it’s recommended to also equip the 23″ EXF Foresight Barrel and XRK Edge BW-4 Handstop. When combined these give the Bruen movement speed not dissimilar to an assault rifle letting you move around in a way that just isn’t possible with other LMGs. Using these three attachments has no real impact on the Breun Mk9’s damage output or effective range. By using this exact loadout you get the punchiness of an LMG and the mobility and handling of an assault rifle. It is a fantastic build that is competitive even in the sweatiest lobbies. Rounding off this class is the Lane-56 Stock which lowers recoil to keep the Bruen Mk9 accurate, especially when trying to extend out its effective range. Finally, the MORS Red Dot added in Season 3 is the new best optic that you’ll want to be using on the majority of your loadouts. Best Bruen Mk9 MW3 class: Perks & equipment Vest: Infantry Vest – Gloves: Commando Gloves – Boots: Lightweight Boots – Gear: Ghost T/V Camo – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Flash Grenade – Since this Bruen Mk9 loadout is fairly mobile you should use perks that benefit that like the Infantry Vest. This vest lets us move around faster by regularly refreshing Tactical Sprint and reducing its cooldown. This combines well with the Lightweight Boots which boosts movement speed making you extremely fast. To truly maximize mobility you will also want to use the Commando Gloves which let you reload while sprinting. Similar to Gung-Ho in previous CoD games, this is effectively a must-use perk if you want to play as fast as possible without getting caught out reloading. Ghost T/V Camo is always a strong option as without it you will show up on enemy UAVs and have a hard time moving around the map without being noticed. Since this loadout doesn’t use a suppressor this is less about being stealthy and more about getting into power positions where the Bruen Mk9 can dominate. For equipment, a Flash Grenade is ideal for blinding enemies and giving yourself a huge advantage in a gunfight you may have otherwise lost. Partner that with a classic Frag Grenade that can be cooked to explode at just the right moment with some practice leaving enemies with no chance of escaping. How to unlock the Bruen Mk9 in Modern Warfare 3 The Bruen Mk9 is unlocked after reaching Level 31 by playing multiplayer or Zombies. After unlocking the Bruen Mk9 you will have to work through 20 gun levels to acquire all of its unique attachments. Best Bruen Mk9 alternative in Modern Warfare 3 The Pulemyot 762 with the JAK Annihilator Bullpup Kit equipped serves as another fantastic LMG-AR hybrid that offers assault rifle-level handling and the suppression and damage expected of a light machine gun. After trying out this Bruen Mk9 loadout, consider using these other MW3 classes to continue dominating multiplayer: Best MW3 loadouts | DG-58 LSW loadout | Holger 26 loadout | TAQ Evolvere loadout | TAQ Eradicator loadout

Best ‘broken’ CoD Vanguard Bayonet loadouts: Weapons, attachments, Perks ActivisionCoD Vanguard lobbies are being torn apart by a number of ‘broken’ Bayonet Assault Rifle loadouts. We’ve got the full rundown on how to build your own setup to boost melee range. With CoD Vanguard now out in the wild, players have quickly flocked to a handful of extremely powerful loadouts. From banned STG44 builds to insane Shotgun classes calling in the world’s quickest nukes, there’s plenty to be cautious of. If you’re a fan of Assault Rifles though, one key setup has likely grabbed your attention already: The Bayonet. With the right Perks around the attachment, the Bayonet can have you insta-killing anyone from meters away. From the optimal ARs you should be using with Bayonets to the best attachments that complement each build, we’ve got you covered with a complete Vanguard guide. Contents Ultimate Vanguard Bayonet loadout – Ultimate Vanguard Bayonet loadout (Perks, Equipment, & Field Upgrade) – Alternate Vanguard Bayonet loadout – Alternate Vanguard Bayonet loadout (Perks, Equipment, & Field Upgrade) – Ultimate CoD Vanguard Bayonet loadout: Volkssturmgewehr setup Muzzle: F8 Stabilizer – Barrel: VDD 287MM – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: SA Converted – Underbarrel: Bayonet – Magazine: 7.62 Gorenko 30 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Granular Grip – Proficiency: Fleet – Kit: Reach – Before you even jump into the Gunsmith, it’s crucial you pick the perfect gun for the job. Coming in with the best movement speed of any AR in Vanguard, the Volkssturmgewehr is a must-pick for the best Bayonet class today. Everything from here on out is designed to boost movement speed by any means necessary. From the 7.62 Gorenko 30 Round Mags to the SA Converted Stock, every attachment helps you zoom through the map. Most importantly with this build, however, is the Fleet Proficiency and the Reach Kit. The former provides a massive boost to movement speed and it’s an option that’s not available on every AR, so take full advantage of it here with the Volk. Similarly, Reach is essential to buff your melee range more than anything else in this build. With these two attachments at the ready, you’ll be the fastest player in any lobby and more than capable of a one-hit melee kill from maximum range. Ultimate CoD Vanguard Bayonet loadout: Perks & Equipment Perk 1: Dauntless – Perk 2: Tracker – Perk 3: Lightweight – Secondary: FS Fighting Knife – Lethal: Thermite – Tactical: Stim – Field Upgrade: Armor – This Volk loadout is already deadly with the right attachments but picking optimal Perks and equipment adds a little extra to the melee-based playstyle. First up comes Dauntless in the Perk 1 slot. While it’s not the most popular option, this Perk completely negates any movement-reducing effects. Whether it’s stuns, dampening bullets, or anything in between, Dauntless will keep you moving at full speed through it all. It’s also crucial you bring Stims into the equation through your Tactical slot. Not only do these replenish health, but they also reset Tactical Sprint as well. So if you’re chasing an enemy down, quickly popping a Stim can keep you full sprinting longer than usual. Alternate STG44 CoD Vanguard Bayonet loadout Muzzle: F8 Stabilizer – Barrel: VDD 320MM 02B – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Removed Stock – Underbarrel: Bayonet – Magazine: 7.62 Gorenko 30 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Granular Grip – Proficiency: Vital – Kit: Reach – If you’d rather use something other than the Volk, or you simply haven’t unlocked it yet, fear not. With the Bayonet unlockable on every AR, the choice is ultimately yours as to where you use it. But for the second-best option in Vanguard today, you can’t look past this STG44 Bayonet class. Using most of the same attachments, you’ll be boosting movement speed a great deal while keeping the ‘broken’ melee range intact. The only notable difference here is that the STG can’t run with the Fleet Proficiency to further buff move speed. As a result, we’ve traded it out with Vital to help in a jiffy if you ever need to fire the gun as a last resort. Alternate STG44 CoD Vanguard Bayonet loadout: Perks & Equipment Perk 1: Dauntless – Perk 2: Tracker – Perk 3: Lightweight – Secondary: FS Fighting Knife – Lethal: Thermite – Tactical: Stim – Field Upgrade: Armor – The same logic applies here with the STG Bayonet build. Every Perk and every piece of equipment is designed to maximize movement speed at all costs. Read More: Is CoD Vanguard Cross-Platform? – Armor is also the most important Field Upgrade for any Bayonet class due to its extra health. Surviving a few more shots on your way to stabbing a target will always come in handy. So that’s everything there is to know about the very best Bayonet classes in Vanguard today. If you’d rather play with a more regular style and actually shoot targets, however, be sure to brush up on our top Vanguard loadouts below: Best Automaton loadout | Best Itra loadout | Best MP40 loadout | Best M1928 loadout | Best STG44 loadout

Best Bren Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks Treyarch/ActivisionARs and SMGs are often the go-to categories for Warzone players when creating a loadout, but it may be time to head over to the LMG section and give the lethal Bren a try with this optimized class. Warzone Season 3 tinkered with many of the game’s top guns leaving some gaps to be filled regarding the game’s meta. Despite this, as always, a lot of the LMGs are still struggling to find a foothold in the meta, with only a single one maintaining a high pick rate, and that’s the Bren. It was given a much-needed nerf during Season 2, but it’s still arguably the most effective LMG in the game if placed in the right hands. Of course, to get the most out of the weapon you’ll need to run a meta loadout, and luckily, we’ve got you covered. Contents Best Bren Warzone loadout – Best Bren Warzone class – How to unlock the Bren in Warzone – Alternative to the Bren Warzone loadout – Best Bren Warzone loadout Attachments Muzzle: MX Silencer – Barrel: Queen’s 705mm Royal – Optic: SVT-40 PU Scope 3-6x – Stock: Queen’s Model 11 BH – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 6.5 Sakura 40 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Perk: Tight Grip – Perk2: Fully Loaded – First of all, you’ll want to equip the MX Silencer and the Queen’s 705mm Royal barrel to significantly increase the gun’s bullet velocity and overall control. Not only that, the silencer keeps your gunfire off the radar making it harder to pinpoint your position, which is key in Warzone. After that, utilize the Queen’s Model 11 BH, m1941 Hand Stop, and Polymer Grip to bolster the LMG’s heavy recoil pattern and boost the gun’s aiming stability, making it easy to beam enemies down from a distance. These attachments paired with the SVT-40 PU Scope 3-6x optic turn the Bren into a specialist long-range weapon that’s a force to be reckoned with. When it comes to bullets, make sure you run Lengthened to maximize your damage, as well as the 6.5 Sakura 40 Round Mags so you can take out multiple opponents without having to reload. Finally, round off the loadout with the Fully Loaded perk so you’re never short on ammo, as well as Quick to make up for the Bren’s overwhelming lack of mobility. Best Bren Warzone loadout class Perks & Equipment When it comes to perks, our Bren setup runs the typical meta choice with E.O.D to protect you from explosive damage, as well as Amped to make it easier to switch to your SMG for close-quarter skirmishes. Next, you’ll definitely want to run Overkill with this class as the Bren may pack a punch at long range, but you’ll need your favorite SMG alongside you for when opponents push your position. We recommend the MP40 as it’s currently the most popular SMG in the game and tears down enemies at close quarters. If you’d prefer to run AR in the secondary slot, consider testing out the Cooper Carbine as it’s absolutely lethal at medium to long-range. Finally, finish off the class with a Semtex to clear out enemies from cover and a Stim for a boost of health in the middle of a skirmish. How to unlock the Bren in Warzone To unlock the LMG, players to reach level 53 of the Battle Pass, which is just two levels off the maximum rank. Of course, this does mean there’s no strange challenge to pick up the Bren, but it will take quite a few hours of grinding. While the Bren may be a strong pick in the current meta, you’re going to have to work hard to get your hands on the weapon. Alternative to the Bren Warzone loadout If the Bren isn’t your style of LMG, it may be time to head back to the days of Modern Warfare and create a Bruen MK9 setup. This deadly weapon deals serious damage at long range and is perfect for those who prefer to hold down power positions, rather than rushing in aggressively. So, if you think the Bruen is a better option for you, consider checking out our dedicated loadout guide for the weapon. On the other hand, you can always try out the STG44 assault rifle, another Vanguard gun that’s established itself as a top-tier and versatile. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Warzone and Vanguard news and updates, then be sure to check out our Call of Duty page. Plus, here’s some more COD guides for you to check out:

Best Bren CoD Vanguard class loadout: attachments, perks, proficiency, setup ActivisionThe Bren can be the strongest Light Machine Gun in all of CoD Vanguard but you need to have the right setup. With the best attachments, perks, and proficiency, here’s the ultimate Bren loadout guide. In Vanguard, LMGs offer the highest damage output of all weapons, but due to their mobility, can go unused. Even though the Bren is the final Light Machine Gun unlocked it is well worth the wait as it is by far the best in its class. If you’re looking to play at a slightly slower pace than the STG44 then you’re going to want to use this gun. Here’s the best Bren class loadout that will surely have you dropping V2 rockets in CoD Vanguard. Contents Best Bren Vanguard loadout – Best Bren Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment & Field Upgrade) – How to unlock Bren in Vanguard – Alternatives to Bren Vanguard loadout – Best Bren Vanguard loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: Queen’s 775m Scepter – Optic: Monocular Reflector – Stock: Oak & Shield Padded – Underbarrel: M1930 Strife Angled – Magazine: .303 British 100 Round Drums – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Proficiency: Tight Grip – Kit: Fully Loaded – To start off the best Bren loadout, use the Recoil Booster because it will increase the rate of fire. Pair it up with the Queen’s 775m Scepter as this will make up for the lost accuracy from the muzzle. For the Optic, it comes down to personal preference but overall the best one is the Monocular Reflector. The M1930 Strife Angled gives the Bren accuracy and aiming stability, making it the best choice. The Oak & Shield Padded helps immensely increase flinch resistance as well as giving the weapon aiming stability which is essential for LMGs. Use it with the Polymer Grip for even more flinch resistance. Next, you’ll want to use the .303 British 100 Round Drums as it gives the Bren 100 bullets in one clip and works really well with the Tight Grip Proficiency which gives improved accuracy over time. To round out the Bren, use Lengthened for even faster bullet velocity, or if you want to wallbang enemies use FMJ. Pair it up with Fully Loaded and have 400 bullets to spray down enemies. Best Bren Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment & Field Upgrade) Perk 1: Ghost – Perk 2: Piercing Vision – Perk 3: Double Time – Secondary: Machine Pistol – Lethal: MK2 Frag Grenade – Tactical: No 69 Stun Grenade – Field Upgrade: Dead Drop – For the Bren, you will want to run Ghost as Spy Planes are constantly being called in. Also, use Double Time in your third perk slot to get around the map faster and back in the fight. The big change comes with the second perk slot. Use Piercing Vision because it will highlight enemies through the wall for a short period of time after hitting them. The bullet penetration from the Bren makes this extremely valuable. Keep a Machine Pistol in the back pocket if you run out of bullets but with 100 it likely won’t be needed. Use the Dead Drop Field Upgrade as this will help you build your streaks a lot faster and get more kills. For equipment, the MK2 Frag Grenade and No 69 Stun Grenade are more than plenty as these will set up free kills. How to unlock Bren in Vanguard It can take a bit of time to unlock the Bren in Vanguard as you need to reach level 53 which is just two levels from the highest. Take advantage of Double XP events or the 24/7 playlists on Shipment and Das Haus and you’ll level up in no time. Alternatives to Bren Vanguard loadout While leveling up to get the Bren, try out the DP27 as this LMG has similar stats to the Bren and is unlocked at level 18. LMGs are great at spraying down enemies and carrying an incredible amount of DPS so definitely give this loadout a try. Looking for more Call of Duty: Vanguard updates and information? Check our list of guides below: Best CoD Vanguard FOV settings | Best MP40 Vanguard loadout | Best M1928 Vanguard loadout | Every CoD Vanguard perk | Best Vanguard controller settings | Unlock Atomic camo

Best BP50 Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks A classic Call of Duty AR has returned yet again with the BP50, and this assault Rifle has become one of Warzone’s best. This is our recommended loadout to get the most out of it in Season 4 Reloaded. Since its introduction during Season 2, it’s clear that the BP50 is an excellent weapon that can work in a variety of situations. Though not quite top-tier, it is still extremely competitive and can hold its own against just about everything else. The BP50 is an especially great sniper support, perfect to partner with a one-shot sniper loadout of choice. As long as you can stay within its effective range this AR is strong and well worth using. With that said, here is the best BP50 loadout to use in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded to get the most out of this fantastic assault rifle that many players have come to love. Contents: Best BP50 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Casus Brake – Conversion Kit: JAK Revenger Kit – Laser: Kimura RYL33 Laser Light – Ammunition: 9MM High Grain Rounds – Rear Grip: TRST-IV Grip Tape – This loadout starts with the JAK Revenger Kit, which will help the BP50 become more viable at a close range through improved ADS and movement speed, as well as better vertical recoil control and magazine ammo capacity. The Casus Brake is going to provide more recoil control and stability, while the Kimura RYL22 Laser Light will give you aim walking stabilty, better accuracy whenusing Tac Stance, and better ADS and Sprint-to-Fire speed. The 9MM High Grain Rounds are going to offer you some improved damage and range for the weapon, which can help with the conversion kit restricting that range slightly. Finally, the TRST-IV Grip Tape is going to help you with some more stability while firing to help you land your shots, and recover in a much quicker fashion. BP50 Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time increases Tac Sprint duration – – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand reload faster – – Perk 3: Quick Fix regenerate health when killing a player or inserting a plate – – Perk 4: Resolute speed boost when hit with an enemy bullet – – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Flash Grenade – Double Time is going to help keep you moving as fast as possible with more Tac Sprint than you would usually have. Sleight of Hand will make it so that those times when you have to stop and reload won’t be as long. Finally, Quick Fix and Resolute will help you stay alive, as you will be able to heal faster after taking a hit and be able to move faster while doing it. The Frag Grenade and the Flash Grenade are both solid options for clearing out enemy locations. Toss a frag in a window while they reload, or blind them with the flash and jump in to blast them away. How to unlock BP50 in Warzone The BP50 is unlocked by activating its Armory Challenge and finishing 5 Daily Challenges. You can also extract it in Zombies to instantly unlock the weapon. Best alternative to BP50 in Warzone Just like the BP50, the RAM-7 is another laser-accurate assault rifle that is easy to use at just about any range. Assault Rifles have remained some of the most popular kinds of weapons in Warzone, so learn more about kitting out other ARs like the SVA 545, MTZ-556, and Holger 556.

Best BP50 Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks A classic Call of Duty AR has returned yet again with the BP50, and this assault Rifle has become one of Warzone’s best. This is our recommended loadout to get the most out of it in Season 4 Reloaded. Since its introduction during Season 2, it’s clear that the BP50 is an excellent weapon that can work in a variety of situations. Though not quite top-tier, it is still extremely competitive and can hold its own against just about everything else. The BP50 is an especially great sniper support, perfect to partner with a one-shot sniper loadout of choice. As long as you can stay within its effective range this AR is strong and well worth using. With that said, here is the best BP50 loadout to use in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded to get the most out of this fantastic assault rifle that many players have come to love. Contents: Best BP50 Warzone loadout Muzzle: Casus Brake – Conversion Kit: JAK Revenger Kit – Laser: Kimura RYL33 Laser Light – Ammunition: 9MM High Grain Rounds – Rear Grip: TRST-IV Grip Tape – This loadout starts with the JAK Revenger Kit, which will help the BP50 become more viable at a close range through improved ADS and movement speed, as well as better vertical recoil control and magazine ammo capacity. The Casus Brake is going to provide more recoil control and stability, while the Kimura RYL22 Laser Light will give you aim walking stabilty, better accuracy whenusing Tac Stance, and better ADS and Sprint-to-Fire speed. The 9MM High Grain Rounds are going to offer you some improved damage and range for the weapon, which can help with the conversion kit restricting that range slightly. Finally, the TRST-IV Grip Tape is going to help you with some more stability while firing to help you land your shots, and recover in a much quicker fashion. BP50 Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time increases Tac Sprint duration – – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand reload faster – – Perk 3: Quick Fix regenerate health when killing a player or inserting a plate – – Perk 4: Resolute speed boost when hit with an enemy bullet – – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Flash Grenade – Double Time is going to help keep you moving as fast as possible with more Tac Sprint than you would usually have. Sleight of Hand will make it so that those times when you have to stop and reload won’t be as long. Finally, Quick Fix and Resolute will help you stay alive, as you will be able to heal faster after taking a hit and be able to move faster while doing it. The Frag Grenade and the Flash Grenade are both solid options for clearing out enemy locations. Toss a frag in a window while they reload, or blind them with the flash and jump in to blast them away. How to unlock BP50 in Warzone The BP50 is unlocked by activating its Armory Challenge and finishing 5 Daily Challenges. You can also extract it in Zombies to instantly unlock the weapon. Best alternative to BP50 in Warzone Just like the BP50, the RAM-7 is another laser-accurate assault rifle that is easy to use at just about any range. Assault Rifles have remained some of the most popular kinds of weapons in Warzone, so learn more about kitting out other ARs like the SVA 545, MTZ-556, and Holger 556.

Best BP50 MW3 Loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks The best BP50 loadout in MW3 takes advantage of this assault rifle’s fast mobility and handling which is further enhanced with the incredible JAK Revenger Kit. The BP50 is an accurate weapon that remains a threat at just about any range. Despite this, it also has great handling and mobility making it one of the most versatile weapons in multiplayer, even after various nerfs. A big reason for this is the introduction of the JAK Revenger Kit in MW3 Season 3 which has continued to dominate in Season 4 Reloaded. This unique Aftermarket Part transforms the AR into an SMG giving it unmatched mobility. Here is the best BP50 loadout in Modern Warfare 3, including attachments and perks plus how you can unlock the meta assault rifle. Contents Best BP50 MW3 loadout in MW3 – Best BP50 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock BP50 in Modern Warfare 3 – Best alternative to BP50 in Modern Warfare 3 – Best BP50 MW3 loadout Attachments Conversion Kit: JAK Revenger Kit – Muzzle: Zehmn35 Compensated Flash Hider – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Laser: EXF Solarflare – Rear Grip: TRST-IV Grip Tape – The JAK Revenger Kit is the attachment that makes the BP50 so good right now. This powerful conversion kit changes the AR into a hypermobile SMG. In this configuration, the BP50 has an incredible TTK, great damage range, and yet also has some of the best mobility and handling of any weapon in MW3. One downside to the conversion kit is that it increases recoil considerably. To offset this, it’s recommended to equip both the Zehmn35 Compensated Flash Hider and TRST-IV Grip Tape. Another key attachment for improving the BP50’s ease of use is the JAK Glassless Optic. This meta optic makes landing shots easier by providing a clear reticle that is better than the iron sights. The final attachment slot should be used on the EXF Solarflare which boosts your mobility through an improved sprint-to-fire speed and aiming stability. It will cause your flashlight to be visible to enemies, but that’s well worth the pros you are getting with it. Best BP50 class: Perks & equipment Vest: Ninja Vest Eliminates footstep sounds, makes you immune to movement reduction effects, and provides bonus throwing knives. – – Boots: All-Terrain Boots Significantly increased movement speed. Disables Tactical Sprint. – – Gear: Ghost T/V Camo While moving, blocks detection by UAVs, enemy radar sources, and Heartbeat Sensors. – – Lethal: Thermobaric Grenade Cookable fragmentation grenade. – – Tactical: Stun Grenade Slows victim’s movement and aiming. – – These perks are used to make it easier to move around the map silently while also having as much mobility as possible. This is excellent with the BP50 as it’s such a mobile weapon that is perfectly suited to playing fast and aggressively. Added in Season 3 Reloaded, the All-Terrain Boots are a standout here as when partnered with the Ninja Vest and Ghost T/V Camo, they let you move fast and silently. This is a deadly combination that can catch even the most experienced players off guard. As for equipment, a Thermobaric Grenade is the best lethal in the game as long as you can cook it properly to explode at just the right moment. Equally, a Stun Grenade is extremely strong slowing down enemies letting you rush in with the BP50 to secure easy kills. How to unlock BP50 in Modern Warfare 3 The BP50 is unlocked through the Armory by completing three daily challenges or winning three games after activating the assault rifle. How to unlock JAK Revenger conversion kit in Modern Warfare 3 The JAK Revenger Kit is unlocked by completing any 5 weekly challenges from Season 3 Week 4. This challenge can be completed across multiplayer, Warzone, and zombies. Best alternative to BP50 in Modern Warfare 3 The MTZ-556 is a direct competitor to the BP50 with both being accurate AR-SMG hybrids that offer better mobility and handling than other assault rifles. Be sure to check out these other MW3 loadouts for more alternatives to the BP50: There are plenty of other Assault Rifles you can bring with you in MW3, so learn more about the best loadouts for the SVA 545, MTZ-556, and Holger 556.

Best Black Ops Cold War weapons to use in Warzone Activision / TreyarchBlack Ops Cold War’s integration with Warzone brought a range of new and powerful weapons to the game. However, it can sometimes be difficult to tell which of these Cold War weapons is worth using. Here’s our list of the best Cold War weapons to use in Warzone to dominate your matches. Black Ops Cold War features plenty of deadly weapons that have drastically shaken up the Warzone meta, giving players even more choice when it comes to crafting the perfect loadout. Although we’re finally past the DMR and MAC-10-only meta that plagued the game for months after the Season One update, there’s still plenty of Cold War weapons that perform incredibly well in the game’s battle royale environment. 9. AK-47 Whether you prefer to run and gun your way to victory, or methodically pick off targets from afar, there is an AK-47 loadout that caters to every kind of playstyle. After all, one of the most infamous Black Ops Cold War loadouts had no recoil at all. Read More: Best Bullfrog loadout in Black Ops Cold War – This reliable rifle may not be as potent as it is in Black Ops Cold War’s multiplayer, but it is still very powerful and can down targets pretty quickly, provided you manage its high recoil. 8. MP5 Multiplayer lobbies were dominated by the lightning-fast MP5 during Black Ops Cold War’s launch week, and it’s not hard to see why. The weapon thrives in close-quarter gunfights and absolutely melts enemies with ease. Read More: Best AUG loadout in Black Ops Cold War – Although there’s a lot of incredible SMGs in Warzone, the MP5 is never a bad choice for a player who is looking to play aggressively and push opponents whenever they can. 7. Stoner 63 LMGs have been somewhat lacking in Black Ops Cold War due to their overall bulk and slower ADS times. However, this isn’t the case in Warzone. After all, the Bruen, PKM, and the FiNN are prime examples of how LMGs can dominate the competition. Read More: Best RPD loadout in BOCW – The Stoner 63 is arguably the best suited LMG for Warzone. This is partly down to a combination of speed and accuracy. While both the RPD and M60 offer better damage, their poor accuracy makes them difficult to recommend. Simply attach the 100 RND Mag and the Airborne Elastic Wrap to begin getting those game-winning squad wipes. 6. Krig 6 The Krig 6 has been making a name for itself thanks to its low recoil and methodical fire rate. While it doesn’t deal as much damage as the AK-47, it makes up for this with its fantastic precision, making it an amazing weapon for medium-long range gunfights. Read More: Best XM4 loadout in Warzone in BOCW – After all, being able to effortlessly hit players from across all ranges is a huge bonus to any Warzone player looking to increase their kill count. The Krig 6 also boasts excellent weapon control and quick reloads, making it a great pick for those that prefer to seek out those all-important headshots. 5. Bullfrog The Bullfrog may not be as strong as Black Ops Cold War’s MAC-10, but it still packs a mean punch, especially when you’ve kitted it out with the right attachments. Having an SMG that can take out multiple foes in a single clip, while also offering great hipfire accuracy is always going to prove popular in Warzone. Read More: Best Warzone shotguns – To make matters even better, the Bullfrog also has a little more range damage than most SMGs. This makes it particularly useful when you run out of AR ammo or find yourself needing to finish off a low health target. Whether you’re looking to get more multi-kills or just want to switch things up from the MAC-10/MP5 meta, then the Bullfrog is a solid option. 4. DMR 14 It’s safe to say, after a number of nerfs, the DMR-14 isn’t the powerhouse weapon it used to be, but it still offers plenty of kill potential. The semi-automatic rifle is perfect for use over long-distances. With an increased fire rate and incredibly minimal recoil, it’s a fantastic choice for any player’s loadout in Warzone. Read More: Best LW3 Tundra loadout in BOCW – Absurdly high-powered, you’ll be downing players incredibly quickly, destroying their armor, and sprinting through to a fantastic finish. Great for aggressive and counter-sniping plays, the loadout above will take this already lethal gun to new heights. 3. M16 Modern Warfare’s FAMAS demonstrated just how bad burst rifles could be in Warzone, but the M16 changes this notion completely. Unlike the FAMAS, Black Ops Cold War’s M16 can dish out highly accurate rounds in a matter of seconds. Despite receiving a number of nerfs, the M16 remains a great choice for any Warzone players looking for a solid AR. Any gun that can accurately drop an enemy in a couple of bursts is always going to pique the interest of Warzone players. This deadly rifle can quickly down even the most well-armored enemies, so we won’t be too surprised if it receives a nerf in Season 2. 2. MAC-10 Despite receiving a number of nerfs back in January, the MAC-10 is still a fan-favorite weapon in Warzone. The gun’s insanely fast time to kill and laser beam accuracy make the weapon extremely deadly in close-quarter gunfights. After all, Verdansk and Rebirth Island feature sneaky avenues players can take in order to finish off their foes quickly in a blaze of glory. With the right loadout, you’ll have everything you need to take down your enemies on the battlefield. 1. FFAR 1 The FFAR 1 is currently the most popular AR in Warzone. Not only does this Assault Rifle boast a ludicrous rate of fire, it also has minimal recoil and high damage output. This makes it an absolute beast in close to mid-range firefights. Read More: Best Warzone FFAR 1 loadout – It’s certainly not hard to see why the majority of Warzone Season 1 lobbies are currently filled with this deadly Assault Rifle. Simply pair it with a MAC-10 or a Kar98k and you have the best loadout in the entire game. So there you have it, seven of the best Black Ops Cold War guns you should be using in Warzone. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Call of Duty news and updates, then follow us over on @DexertoIntel.

Best Black Ops Cold War CARV.2 class loadout: Attachments, Perks, & Setup Activision / TreyarchThe CARV.2 is the latest Tactical Rifle to join Black Ops Cold War’s ever-growing arsenal in Season 3. Here are all the attachments you need to increase your kill potential in multiplayer. The CARV.2 (G11) is the latest burst rifle to join both Warzone and Black Ops Cold War in Season 3. This lethal Tactical Rifle comes packed with a fast rate of fire and high damage, which makes it extremely versatile when playing on the game’s standard multiplayer maps. Many Call of Duty players believe the burst rifle meta was over, but the CARV.2 could change both Warzone and the Cold War meta. If you’re looking for a replacement for the recently nerfed M16 and AUG weapons, then our Cold War CARV.2 loadout will give you the tools needed to claim those all-important killstreaks. Whether the CARV.2 has what it takes to overthrow Cold War’s current meta weapons remains to be seen, but this lethal loadout certainly demonstrates just how powerful this TAC Rifle truly is. How to unlock the CARV.2 in Cold War In order to unlock the CARV.2 in Cold War, you’ll need to rapidly kill 2 or more players in 10 different completed matches while using tactical rifles. The quick TTK makes this challenge pretty simple, particularly when you’re playing on the smaller maps like Nuketown ‘84. Best CARV.2 build for Cold War Attachments Optic: Millstop Reflex – Muzzle: Infantry Compensator – Barrel: 22.5” Task Force – Body: Tiger Team Spotlight – Underbarrel: Field Agent Foregrip – Ammunition: 54 Rnd Drum – Handle: Airborne Elastic Wrap – Stock: Raider Pad – This loadout makes the CARV.2 extremely potent in Black Ops Cold War and while it may not be as mobile as the game’s SMGs, it is capable of killing an enemy in just two bursts. While you can make a build without the Gunfighter Wild Card, the three additional attachment slots really make this gun pop off. Read More: Best Warzone CARV.2 class loadout – First up on the attachment list is that of the Millstop Reflex Optic, which provides just enough magnification without obscuring your sight in close-quarters combat. The CARV.2’s recoil is also non existent when you equip both the Infantry Compensator and Field Agent Foregrip. These attachments reduce any horizontal/vertical recoil, which allows you to effortlessly beam your targets with deadly precision. Combine this with the added damage from the 22.5” Task Barrel, and you have a recipe for success. The 50% increase in bullet velocity also helps you hit targets on larger maps and game modes. This can be switched out for the Steady Aim Laser if you’d rather increase the CARV.2’s hip-fire accuracy. Having a loadout with fast ADS and sprint to fire time has always been important in Cold War, so both the Airborne Elastic Wrap and Raider Pad Stock are a must, especially if you wish to compete against the MAC-10 and MP5 SMGs. Lastly, the 54 Rnd Drum provides you with enough ammunition to pick up those all-important multi-kills. While this attachment may not lower your ADS time, the -10% to reload quickness can prove fatal if you’re not careful. To avoid any frustrating deaths, it’s best to keep reloading to a minimum and duck behind cover when you do need to change mags. Best CARV.2 Cold War setup (Perks & equipment) Perk 1: Tactical Mask – Perk 2: Gear Head – Perk 3: Ghost – Secondary: M1911 – Wildcard: Gunfighter – Field Upgrade: Field Mic – Tactical: Stimshot – Lethal: Semtex – Just like most Black Ops Cold War loadouts in Season 3, our CARV.2 loadout utilizes both Tactical Mask, Gear Head, and Ghost. Tactical Mask reduces the duration of enemy tactical equipment, while Gear Head greatly decreases the cooldown time for Field Upgrades. This ensures you have plenty of opportunities to put down your Field Mic, which will help you spot your next target. Ghost will also keep you off any pesky enemy Spy Planes that fly overhead, enabling you to get the drop on your opponents. Lastly, both the Stimshot and Semtex will help you catch any pesky campers and keep your health topped up after particularly close firefights. Alternative CARV.2 loadout While the CARV.2 may be the latest burst-fire rifle in Cold War Season 3, it may not fit your overall playstyle. Fortunately, there are plenty of alternatives to choose from. First up, is the Krig 6. This powerful AR comes packed with great accuracy and range damage, which makes it perfect for both multiplayer and Warzone. You can check out our best Krig loadout right here. Of course, if the Krig doesn’t take your fancy, there’s always the AK-47. While the AK-47 has always been a decent pick in Cold War, the recent buffs have made it even more powerful in Warzone. Our AK-47 loadout transforms this AR into a close-quarters SMG, which absolutely dominates opponents in Call of Duty’s Warzone mode. There you have it, the best CARV.2 loadout you can use in Black Ops Cold War. Make sure you check out our Call of Duty page for all the latest news and updates.

Best Black Ops 6 PC settings for FPS: How to get the best performance ActivisionBlack Ops 6 is finally in focus with its Beta now live, and being a competitive shooter means getting the highest FPS you can is an advantage. So, here are the best settings for PC. With early access already well underway and the Open Beta raring to start on September 6, CoD fans are now getting a full look into BO6’s multiplayer. Although it isn’t the full experience we’ll get on release, we still have a fair few maps and game modes, enough for players to try out the new omnimovement and body shield mechanics. However, as you check out BO6 you’ll want to maximize your FPS to the fullest, so here are the best PC settings for you to use. Best PC settings for Black Ops 6 to get max FPS Here are the best settings to maximize your FPS in Black Ops 6: Display Display Mode: Fullscreen Borderless – Display Monitor: Your monitor – Display Adaptor: Your graphics card – Screen Refresh Rate: Preferably 144 Hz and above – Display Resolution: Preferably 1920×1080 – Dynamic Resolution: Off – Aspect Ratio: Automatic – NVIDA Reflex Low Latency: On+Boost – V-Sync (Gameplay): Off – V-Sync (Menus): Off – Display Gamma: Depends on your monitor – Brightness: Depends on your monitor – Focused Mode: Off – High Dynamic Range (HDR): Off – Global Quality Quality Presents: Custom – Render Resolution: 100 – Dynamic Resolution: Off – Upscaling/Sharpening: FidelityFX CAS AMD Fidelity CAS Strength: 85 – – Path Tracing + Ray Reconstruction: Off – VRAM Scale Target: 90 – Variable Rate Shading: Off – Details and Textures Texture Resolution: Low – Texture Filter Anisotropic: Normal – Depth of Field: Off – Detail Quality Level: Low – Particle Resolution: Very low – Bullet Impacts: On – Persistent Effects: Off – Shader Quality: Medium or Low (depending on preference) – On-Demand Texture Streaming: MinimalAllocated Texture Cache Size: 16Download Limits: On – – Local Texture Streaming Quality: Low – Daily Download Limit (GB): 1.0 – Shadow and Lighting Shadow Quality: Low – Screen Space Shadows: Off – Ambient Occlusion: Off – Screen Space Reflections: Off – Static Reflection Quality: Low – Environment Tessellation: Off – Volumetric Quality: Low – Deferred Physics Quality: Off – Weather Grid Volumes: Off – Water Quality: Off – View Field of View: To your preference, but the lower it is the more FPS you can get – ADS Field of View: Affected – Weapon Field of View: Wide – 3 Person Field of View: 90 – Vehicle Field of View: Default – Camera World Motion Blur: Off – Weapon Motion Blur: Off – Film Grain: 0.00 – 1 Person Camera Movement: Least (50%) – 3 Person Camera Movement: Least (50%) – Spectator Camera: Game Perspective – Inverted Flashbang: On – Depending on your PC specs, you can expect to get around triple-digit FPS, although it won’t make your game look the prettiest. When it comes to screen refresh rate, it is preferable that you use a 144 Hz or higher monitor, however, not everybody has this on hand. So make sure you choose the highest option available to you. Although it’s always preferable to choose 1920×1080 for your resolution. As for the brightness and gamma settings, it really depends on your monitor settings and how you’d like your game to look. We have ours set to 55 Brightness and 2.2 (sRGB) Display Gamma, but it will vary from user to user. Additionally, when it comes to your FOV, the lower you put it the more FPS you can get. However, you’ll be exchanging whatever competitive advantage you may get from having a higher FOV, so be aware. The FOV sweet spot for most players is around 100 to 115. So, that’s all you need to know about the best settings in Black Ops 6! If you want to see if your PC will be able to handle the game, you can check out the system requirements here.

Best Basilisk Akimbo Warzone 2 class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup Season 4 Reloaded has arrived and with it comes one of the craziest close-range metas we’ve ever seen. SMGs are on their way out and pistols are now top-tier. To take advantage of this you’ll want the best Basilisk Akimbo Warzone 2 loadout possible, and we’ve got you covered. There are a few factors that decide if a gun is meta or not. How easy is it to use? How long is its effective range? Does it have good iron sights? They’re all important factors but arguably nothing is more important than a gun’s time to kill potential and raw damage. A gun with huge flaws can still be meta if it kills so quickly that nothing else can compete against it. That’s exactly why the Basilisk Akimbo has become so popular. Its spectacular TTK of just 360 ms completely outclasses everything else. To dominate with the Basilisk you’ll need a meta class, and this is the best Basilisk Akimbo loadout you can use in Warzone 2. Contents Best Basilisk Akimbo Warzone 2 loadout – Best Basilisk Akimbo Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the Basilisk Akimbo in Warzone 2 – Best Basilisk Akimbo alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best Basilisk Akimbo Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Barrel: 10.5″ FTAC Arrow – Laser: Revo-LSD 7mW – Trigger Action: Bryson Match Grade – Ammunition: .500 Snakeshot – Rear Grip: Akimbo Basilisk – The Basilisk excels at one thing and one thing only. Killing enemy players extremely quickly at close range. Its close-quarters dominance comes from the .500 Snakeshot ammunition, a unique attachment that converts the Basilisk into a pocket shotgun. T to get the most out of the Snakeshot rounds you’ll want to use the Akimbo Basilisk rear grip. Simply put this grip gives you a second Basilisk effectively halving your time to kill within its effective range. To maximize killing potential it’s best to use both the 10.5″ FTAC Arrow barrel and Bryson Match Grade trigger. The former improves the Basilisk’s overall range while the latter increases the revolver’s fire rate, shortening its already lethal TTK even further. Finally, the Revo-LSD 7mW laser is a solid choice as it increases hip-fire accuracy. Since Akimbo weapons can only be fired from the hip it’s a natural choice for the Basilisk. Best Basilisk Akimbo Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Bomb Squad – Base Perk 2: Double Time – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Drill Charge – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – Unusually, since the Basilisk is a secondary there is no need to use Overkill. To take advantage of this freed-up Perk slot we recommend using Bomb Squad. The explosion resistance granted by Bomb Squad makes it one of the only Perks in Warzone 2 that can directly save your life. To get around faster and close the gap on your enemies it’s best to use Double Time. This Base Perk doubles the duration of tactical sprint and increases crouch movement speed by 30%. For Bonus and Ultimate Perk, Fast Hands and High Alert work well. Fast Hands is great on the Basilisk as it doesn’t have the fastest reload speed, something this Perk improves greatly. Meanwhile, High Alert provides intel by highlighting the direction of enemy players when they aim at you from behind. The best equipment to use is the Drill Charge and Smoke Grenade. Drill Charges are fantastic for dealing damage against enemies camping inside buildings, chipping away at their health before pushing in, and Smoke Grenades let you cover open areas to make it easier to move around the map. How to unlock the Basilisk Akimbo in Warzone 2 The Basilisk is unlocked in Warzone 2 by reaching player rank Level 39. This can be achieved by getting kills and playing the objective in Warzone, multiplayer, and DMZ with all three core modes providing XP. As for the Basilisk Akimbo attachment, that is unlocked separately by getting the revolver to gun rank Level 29. Best Basilisk Akimbo alternatives in Warzone 2 Despite it technically being a handgun, the Basilisk Akimbo has far more in common with a shotgun. As a result, we recommend trying out the full-auto MX Guardian which can also dominate up close. Alternatively, another extremely powerful pistol in Season 4 Reloaded is the X13 Auto. It doesn’t deal quite as much damage as the Basilisk, but it has superior range and is arguably easier to use. That’s all for our best Basilisk Akimbo loadout in Warzone 2. For more useful tips and content consider checking out some of our other guides: Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Best Warzone 2 loadouts: Meta weapons and classes to dominate in Al Mazrah | Call of Duty 2024: Early leaks, concept art, Warzone 2.0, Treyarch & more | Call of Duty 2023: Early leaks, Modern Warfare 2, Warzone 2, more | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons: Ultimate tier list with the best classes | Modern Warfare 2 best settings on PC for FPS, graphics, visibility, more

Best BAS-P Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks The BAS-P has received another round of buffs in the Warzone 2 Season 3 Reloaded update transforming it into a solid SMG. Here’s our best BAS-P Warzone 2 meta loadout to help you draw the guns full potential. Introduced back in Season 1, the BAS-P started out life as a weak SMG that not many players used. Despite its low recoil Warzone 2’s rendition of the real-world SIG-Sauer MPX just didn’t deal enough damage to be worth utilizing. In Season 2 Reloaded it received a buff to its sprint to fire time and damage ranges making it an okay option. Then at the start of Season 3, the BAS-P was buffed again seeing its damage ranges further enhanced and its strafe speed increased. And now it has been buffed once again in Season 3 Reloaded. With these latest buffs, the BAS-P has turned into a monster that shreds across all ranges. Here’s the best loadout for the BAS-P, including the attachments, Perks, and equipment to use. Contents Best BAS-P Warzone 2 loadout – Best BAS-P Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the BAS-P in Warzone 2 – Best BAS-P alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best BAS-P Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: XTEN RR-40 – Optic: Cronen Mini Pro – Stock: Ravage-8 – Magazine: 50 Round Drum – Rear Grip: D37 Grip – Even without attachments, the BAS-P is a superb close-range SMG but reducing its recoil helps extend its range making it competitive from further away. To do this we use a combination of the XTEN RR-40 muzzle, Ravage-10 stock, and D-37 Grip. When used in unison these three attachments massively reduce recoil without slowing down our ADS too much. The BAS-P doesn’t have the best ironsight system so it’s recommended to grab the Cronen Mini Pro as it comes in handy for both close and medium range firefights. Finally, the 50 Round Drum is a must as it makes it possible to down multiple enemies before having to reload. Without this attachment, you’ll be constantly reloading which can get you caught out during gunfights. Best BAS-P Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Overkill – Bonus Perk: Resupply – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – This loadout is all about repositioning quickly without being downed by other teams. The best perk for this playstyle is Double Time as it lets you move around Al Mazrah faster and increases crouch movement speed. Overkill is a fantastic choice too as the BAS-P can struggle at long range due to its damage falloff. You’ll need a suitable secondary weapon to cover its weaknesses like an assault rifle or sniper. The best Bonus Perk is Resupply as it refreshes our equipment. The equipment selected in this loadout is essential for repositioning safely so having it always available is ideal. For the Ultimate Perk, it’s recommended to use High Alert so that when moving around you can react to enemies aiming at you. For equipment, we opt for a Throwing Knife and Smoke Grenade. Throwing Knives let us instantly kill downed enemies without having to waste ammo whilst Smoke Grenades are the best tool in Warzone 2 to reposition safely across open areas. How to unlock the BAS-P in Warzone 2 The BAS-P can be unlocked by getting 25 headshot kills with SMGs or successfully exfilling with any BAS-P blueprint in DMZ. It was originally available through the Season 1 battle pass but is now unlocked through a simple gameplay challenge instead. Best BAS-P alternatives in Warzone 2 Much like the BAS-P, the PDSW 528 excels at close range. The PDSW 528 offers superior mobility which is great for aggressive playstyles and flushing teams out of buildings. Alternatively, the once-meta Fennec 45 is still an incredible SMG when used at close range. It’s a little harder to control than the BAS-P but has a fast TTK and amazing mobility. That’s all for our BAS-P loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Best Warzone 2 loadouts: Meta weapons and classes to dominate in Al Mazrah | Call of Duty 2024: Early leaks, concept art, Warzone 2.0, Treyarch & more | Call of Duty 2023: Early leaks, Modern Warfare 2, Warzone 2, more | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons: Ultimate tier list with the best classes | Modern Warfare 2 best settings on PC for FPS, graphics, visibility, more

Best BAS-P MW2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks The BAS-P received another round of buffs in the Season 3 Reloaded update that has seen the once underpowered SMG rise to the very top. Here’s our best BAS-P MW2 Warzone 2 meta loadout to help you make the most of the gun. Originally added in Season 1, the BAS-P did not have a good start to life. Both MW2 and Warzone 2 players alike quickly realized it was amongst the weakest guns in the game. This real world rendition of the SIG-Sauer MPX just didn’t deal enough damage to be worth using. However, Season 2 Reloaded would see the BAS-P buffed in key areas including damage range and sprint to fire time. Then in Season 3, it would be buffed again this time with the devs focusing on its mobility. Now in Season 3 Reloaded the BAS-P has been buffed yet again and this time it has become a monster. Here’s the best loadout for the BAS-P in MW2, including attachments, Perks, and equipment to use. Contents Best BAS-P MW2 loadout – Best BAS-P MW2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the BAS-P in MW2 – Best BAS-P alternatives in MW2 – Best BAS-P MW2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: XRK Sandstorm – Laser: 1Mw Quick Fire Laser – Stock: Bruen Flash V4 Stock – Underbarrel: Xten Nexus Grip – Rear Grip: Bruen Flash Grip – The BAS-P is now an SMG/AR hybrid of sorts that can maintain a competitive TTK out to around 50 meters. To capitalize on this our recommended loadout looks to improve accuracy at long range without slowing down the handling and mobility too much. The best way to improve effective range is to reduce recoil and for this, it’s best to use both the XRK Sandstorm muzzle and Xten Nexus Grip underbarrel. These both noticeably reduce overall recoil and also improve aiming stability making it easier to keep shots on target. While these attachments improve accuracy they also slow down our ADS. To make sure the BAS-P still feels like an SMG it’s recommended to use the 1MW Quick Fire Laser. Those who don’t mind playing with a visible laser should consider using the Accu-Shot 5Mw Laser instead. Finally, to improve mobility you’ll want to use the Bruen Flash V4 Stock and Bruen Flash Grip. Among other improvements, these reduce sprint to fire speed and increase ADS strafe speed making the BAS-P still work for run and gun play style. Best BAS-P Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Battle Hardened – Bonus Perk: Cold-Blooded – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Stim – This perk selection focuses on being effective in a wide range of situations to complement the BAS-P’s strengths. Therefore Double Time is perfect for moving around and playing aggressively whilst Battle Hardened makes playing defensively easier by weakening the effects of incoming tactical equipment. For Bonus Perk, Cold-Blooded is an excellent choice to stay hidden from dangerous killstreaks. Popular streaks like the VTOL Jet and Overwatch Helo won’t be able to touch you when using this Perk. In most cases, Ghost is the best Ultimate Perk to use as it keeps you from appearing on UAVs. With how prevalent UAVs are in MW2 it helps a lot to stay off the radar. The best choice for Lethal equipment is arguable but a good old Frag Grenade is always a fine choice. It has a large blast radius and can be cooked to prevent enemy players from having time to avoid it. For Tactical, a Stim works well to heal back up quickly enabling more aggressive play. How to unlock the BAS-P in Warzone 2 The BAS-P can be unlocked by getting 25 headshot kills with SMGs or successfully exfilling with any BAS-P blueprint in DMZ. It was originally available through the Season 1 battle pass but is now unlocked through a simple gameplay challenge instead. Best BAS-P alternatives in Warzone 2 Being another SMG/AR hybrid, the Kastov-74u is a natural competition to the BAS-P. It offers fantastic mobility for an assault rifle while being able to extend gunfights to longer ranges than most SMGs. Those looking for a more traditional SMG should consider trying out the PDSW-528 or Vaznev-9K. Both are SMGs that while excellent at close range are still capable of winning gunfights in mid-range just like the BAS-P. How to use Modern Warfare 2’s Gunsmith: Receivers and Blueprints explained | Modern Warfare 2 new equipment guide: Lethals and Tacticals explained | How to Slide Cancel in Modern Warfare 2| All Modern Warfare 2 Killstreaks | What is Modern Warfare 2 Spec Ops mode? | All Modern Warfare 2 Perks | All Modern Warfare 2 Field Upgrades

Best BAS-B Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisionThe BAS-B is a fantastic option in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded but to get the most out of it you’ll need to build it just right. To help you out we’ve put together the best BAS-B Warzone loadout that will dominate Urzikstan. Inspired by the real-world SIG MCX Spear, the BAS-B is a powerful battle rifle that quickly established itself as one of the strongest options in Warzone. Not only does it have a fantastic TTK but it also offers an impressive range. It’s recoil can be a handful but with the right setup, it’s easier to manage than you might expect. With that said here’s the best BAS-B loadout to use in Call of Duty: Warzone Season 4 Reloaded. Best BAS-B Warzone loadout Muzzle: VT-7 Spiritfire Suppressor – Barrel: Bruen Venom Long Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Underbarrel: Bruen Heavy Support Grip – Magazine: 45 Round Mag – Since the BAS-B does have a fair bit of recoil it’s important to use attachments that reduce kick. The combination of the VT-7 Spiritfire Suppressor muzzle and Bruen Heavy Support Grip does just that, providing a huge boost to recoil control making this battle rifle much easier to use at long range. Speaking of long-range, the Bruen Venom Long Barrel is an excellent choice as it not only provides even more recoil control but also improves the BAS-B’s effective range which is perfect for Warzone. To minimize reloading it’s also optimal to equip the 45 Round Mag. This is smaller than most other rifles get access to but still does the job thanks to the BAS-B’s impressive TTK and damage. Finally, a suitable medium to long-range optic is worthwhile to make tracking targets from afar much easier. The JAK Glassless Optic works perfectly for this as it has some of the best lines of sight for any optic in the game. BAS-B Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time Increases Tactical Sprint duration and reduces refresh time. – – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand Reload faster. The slower the base reload time, the bigger the bonus. – – Perk 3: Quick Fix Killing players or inserting a plate immediately starts health regeneration. – – Perk 4: Resolute When taking damage from gunfire, grants a short bonus to movement speed. – – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical Equipment: Smoke Grenade – For Perks 1 and 2, the combination of Double Time and Sleight of Hand works well for being mobile and keeping the pressure on your targets. You can physically move fast enough to close in on their position while reloading faster will allow you to keep your fire on them. Quick Fix is a solid choice for the third Perk slot as it allows you to stay healthy as much as possible throughout a match. The value of being able to kickstart your health regeneration cannot be understated. Although there is a counter, it’s still recommended to use Resolute as your fourth Perk as it will also allow you to maneuver around the battlefield with ease as you sustain enemy fire. To further reduce the risk of moving from building to building, we recommend using a Smoke Grenade which can provide impromptu cover when needed. Finally, a Throwing Knife is a great option for lethal equipment as it offers a quick way to take an enemy out. How to unlock BAS-B in Warzone Players can unlock the BAS-B by reaching Level 17 in Warzone or Modern Warfare 3. Alternatively, successfully extracting a BAS-B in Zombies will also unlock the powerful battle rifle. Best alternative to BAS-B in Warzone The MCW is a more accurate alternative to the BAS-B that sacrifices raw power in favor of low recoil and superior range. However, it is still very strong in Warzone and offers a meta option comparable to the BAS-B. Warzone greatly favors weapons that offer mid- to short-range capabilities, so check out the weapons that do just that like the FJX Horus, the Superi 46, and the Holger 556.

Best BAS-B MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks This is the ultimate BAS-B MW3 loadout to turn this meta battle rifle into a true powerhouse capable of dominating every multiplayer lobby thanks to its phenomenal damage output. Due to its early success, the BAS-B was the target of a few nerfs in Season 3. This might make you think it is no longer worth using but that isn’t the case. It is still a fantastic battle rifle that competes with the best guns in the meta. However, it’s no longer quite as easy to build without having to think about what attachments work best. This guide simplifies that process for you by listing the best BAS-B loadout in MW3, picked to make this as well-rounded as possible. Let’s get right into it. Contents Best BAS-B MW3 loadout – BAS-B MW3 loadout: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the BAS-B in MW3 – Best BAS-B alternative in MW3 – Best BAS-B MW3 loadout in Modern Warfare 3 Attachments Optic: Quarters Classic Reflex – Underbarrel: Bruen Heavy Support Grip – Stock: Ravage-20 Heavy Stock – Rear Grip: STT88 Grip – Magazine: 30 Round Mag – In its base form, the BAS-B doesn’t produce too much recoil but it is still worth using the Ravage-20 Heavy Stock and the STT88 Grip. These help to significantly improve the gun’s recoil control and firing aim stability, especially when using it in full auto which is recommended to get the best TTK possible. The Bruen Heavy Support Grip helps further mitigate its recoil. With all three of these attachments combined the BAS-B is a remarkably accurate gun that is effective both up close and from afar. Despite being a battle rifle, it is a true jack-of-all-trades primary weapon that just about anyone can use. Something to note about the BAS-B is that its relatively low fire rate can make missed shots especially costly. Due to this, it’s highly recommended to use an optic with a clear reticle like the Quarters Classic Reflex. This red dot sight isn’t just nostalgic, it’s also one of the easiest to use in MW3 Season 3. Another con of this rifle is that its magazine only holds 20 rounds by default which will leave you constantly reloading. Thankfully, this is easily solved by equipping the 30 Round Mag, providing 50% more shots per mag, and making it much easier to chain kills together. BAS-B MW3 loadout: Perks & Equipment Vest: CCT Comms Vest – Gloves: Marksman Gloves – Boots Lightweight Boots – Gear: Mission Control Comlink – Gear: Mag Holster – The CCT Comms Vest is an interesting option as it excels in gaining intel and marking enemies at the expense of lethal and tactical equipment. This works well with the aggressive playstyle suited to our BAS-B build. For Gloves, the Marksman Gloves work well practically negating all flinch and idle sway while aimed in. Since battle rifles in MW3 have relatively low firing aim stability this is a great option to offset that weakness. To make getting around the map easier you’ll also want to use the Lightweight Boots. These increase both movement and swim speed which is great for getting into power positions quickly and controlling key areas of each map. Mag Holster is an obvious choice for Gear given the BAS-B has a fairly slow reload compared to other comparable guns. This is especially true with the 30 Round Mag equipped which results in a full reload taking well over 3 seconds. Finally, Misson Control Comlink makes killstreaks easier to earn giving you a better chance of calling them in and taking over a match. How to unlock the BAS-B in Modern Warfare 3 Players can unlock the BAS-B by reaching Level 17 in Modern Warfare 3. Alternatively, successfully extracting a BAS-B in Zombies will also unlock the battle rifle. Best BAS-B alternative in Modern Warfare 3 A great alternative to the BAS-B is the SOA Subverter, which is one of the best battle rifles as of MW3 Season 3. It boasts nearly identical stats to the BAS-B, minus all the nerfs, with a decent rate of fire and solid damage if you hit your shots. For more meta loadouts like this BAS-B, check out these meta MW3 classes: Best MW3 loadouts | MTZ-762 loadout | Sidewinder loadout | RAM-7 loadout | SVA 545 loadout

Best BAR Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks Activision/Sledgehammer GamesThe best BAR loadout is capable of dishing out huge amounts of damage across Warzone’s Caldera map, making it one of the best ARs in the current meta. Find out which attachments you should equip to make the strongest BAR build. Vanguard’s BAR features high amounts of damage, great accuracy, and plenty of attachments that make it incredibly versatile in Warzone. While both the STG44 and Automaton have already proven popular, many streamers have been using the BAR to help them net game-winning kills. Not only is this loadout capable of increasing your kill count across Caldera, but it’s also incredibly easy to use. Whether you’re looking to replace your current Cold War and Modern Warfare loadouts or just wish to try out one of the strongest ARs in the game, then our best BAR Warzone loadout will set you on the path to victory. Contents Best BAR Warzone loadout – Best BAR setup (Perks & equipment) – How to unlock the BAR in Warzone – Alternative to the BAR loadout – Best BAR Warzone loadout Attachments Muzzle: MX Silencer – Barrel: CGC 30” XL – Optic: SVT-40 PU Scope 3-6x – Stock: CGC Wire – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 8mm Klauser 40 Round Mag – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Proficiency: Hard Scope – Kit: Fully Loaded – The best BAR loadout in Warzone is tailored around boosting the gun’s firepower, accuracy, and ammo. First up is the MX Silencer muzzle and CGC 30” XL barrel. Both these attachments greatly increase the BAR’s accuracy, while also adding damage and aiding recoil control. Next up is the CGC Wire, M1941 Hand Stop, and Polymer Grip. These attachments provide the BAR with aiming stability and improved levels of control. All of that pairs well with the SVT-40 PU Scope 3-6X, which offers a similar precision optic to that of Modern Warfare’s VLK 3.0x. With these accuracy-enhancing attachments, you’ll be able to eliminate opponents across close to mid-range engagements without constantly having to adjust your aim. Hardscope will make that tracking even easier in the long run. Fully Loaded will ensure you have the maximum starting ammo so that you’re not stuck having to run around, which isn’t the ideal playstyle for this build. Having a gun that you can rely on across all engagement ranges, particularly on maps with long sightlines, is incredibly important. Fortunately, this particular BAR loadout can take down enemies across all engagement ranges. Best BAR setup (Perks & equipment) Perks & Equipment Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Ghost – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: Top Break – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stim – Our BAR class utilizes all the standard meta Warzone perks. Both EOD and Amped keep you safe from any explosive blasts, while also giving increased speed when swapping to your secondary weapon. Ghost also helps keep you hidden from enemy squads. Despite the BAR’s high damage at close to mid-range engagements, you’ll want to switch to the Top Break. These akimbo pistols can instantly drop a fully armored foe with just a few well-placed rounds, which makes them incredibly powerful in close-quarter firefights. Lastly, both the Semtex and Stim will give you the tools needed to flush out pesky campers and survive any incoming fire. How to unlock the BAR in Warzone In order to unlock the BAR in CoD Vanguard, you’ll need to reach account level 25. This shouldn’t take too long if you make use of double XP tokens or play with the Assault and Blitz Combat Pacing. Once you’ve got your hands on the BAR, you’ll be able to start grinding out the best attachments in Warzone or Vaguard’s multiplayer. Alternative to the BAR loadout If the BAR doesn’t fit your playstyle, then consider using the Automaton as an alternative Assault Rifle. Not only does this deadly rifle boast impressive damage, but it also has great accuracy across all engagement ranges. This makes it an extremely versatile pick in Caldera, where mid to long-range firefights are more common. Just make sure you’re running an SMG or the Top Break revolvers alongside it to help shutdown close-quarter rushes. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Warzone and Black Ops Cold War news and updates, then be sure to check out our Call of Duty page.

Best BAR Vanguard class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Proficiency, Setup Activision/Sledgehammer GamesThe best BAR loadout in Vanguard is capable of obliterating multiple enemies in just a few shots, making it one of the best ARs. Find out which attachments you should equip to make the strongest BAR build. The BAR comes packed with high amounts of damage, laser-like accuracy, and more than enough rounds to pick up multiple kills. In fact, when this deadly CoD Vanguard AR is kitted out with the best attachments, there is very little it can’t do. While the STG44 may currently be the most popular Assault Rifle in the game, once players unlock the BAR, there is little reason to ever go back. Not only is this loadout capable of netting you plenty of kills, but it’s also incredibly easy to use. Whether you’re aiming to use the BAR when the Warzone integration releases or just wish to increase your KD, then this best Vanguard loadout for the BAR will give you plenty of power. Contents Best BAR Vanguard loadout – Best BAR Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment, & Field Upgrade) – How to unlock the BAR in Vanguard – Best BAR Vanguard loadout tips – Alternative to the BAR Vanguard loadout – Best BAR Vanguard loadout Muzzle: F8 Stabilizer – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Cooper SP – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: .50 BMG 30 Round Mag – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Fabric Grip – Proficiency: Sleight of Hand – Kit: Fully Loaded – The best BAR loadout is tailored around boosting the gun’s firepower, accuracy, and ammo count. First up on the list is the F8 Stabilizer muzzle and State Reflector optic. Both these attachments greatly increase the BAR’s accuracy, while also adding damage and aiding recoil control. This does come at a cost to ADS and sprint to fire speed, but the Fabric Grip does help mitigate the downsides of these attachments. Next up is the Cooper SP and M1941 Hand Stop. These attachments provide the BAR with aiming stability, further recoil control, and flinch resistance. Having a gun that you can rely on across all engagement ranges, particularly on maps with long sightlines, is incredibly important. Fortunately, this particular BAR loadout can take down enemies across all engagement ranges. In fact, once you’ve unlocked the 50 BMG 30 Round Mag and Lengthened ammo, you’ll be taking down foes incredibly quickly. The added bullet velocity from both attachments enables you to simply click on your targets without having to worry about any over-aiming, while the added damage only makes those head and body shots all the more lethal. Because of the BAR’s limited magazine, we’ve attached the Sleight of Hand and Fully Loaded. These attachments will make your quicken your reload speed and give you the maximum amount of starting ammo, which is especially important since we’re not running Scavenger. While you can opt for a barrel attachment, the decrease in accuracy, ADS speed, and recoil is not worth it. In fact, we have purposely avoided using a barrel to ensure the BAR is as accurate and easy to use as possible. Best BAR Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment, & Field Upgrade) First Perk: Ghost – Second Perk: Forward Intel – Third Perk: Demolition – Secondary: Machine Pistol – Lethal: MK2 Frag Grenade – Tactical: Stim – Field Upgrade: Armor – The best BAR loadout uses Ghost, Forward Intel, and Demolition as its perk choices. Just like previous CoD titles, Ghost keeps you hidden from Spy Planes and enemy equipment, which enables you to go for those all-important flanks. Next up is Forward Intel. This perk is arguably the most powerful in the game as it enables you to instantly gain knowledge on enemy locations without running any reconnaissance killstreaks. With the perk equipped, you’ll be able to see enemy spawn rotations and avoid any frustrating backstabs. Read More: Is CoD Vanguard Cross-Platform? – Demolition is a great choice for those that like to bring two Lethals – an area that is important if you wish to flush out any pesky campers with the MK2 Frag Grenade. The Machine Pistol has been a staple secondary in many CoD games. This is down to its high rate of fire and great accuracy. Whether you find yourself running low on BAR ammo or just need to quickly finish off a low health foe, then the Machine Pistol will give you the tools needed to finish the job. Lastly, both the Stim and Armor maximize your survivability, enabling you to turn the tide of even the fiercest of firefights. How to unlock the BAR in Vanguard In order to unlock the BAR in CoD Vanguard, you’ll need to reach account level 25. This shouldn’t take too long if you make use of double XP tokens or play with the Assault and Blitz Combat Pacing. The higher density of firefights may seem rather tough at first, but the increased player count ensures that there are plenty of targets to grind out the necessary experience. Best BAR Vanguard loadout tips The BAR assault rifle in Vanguard may not be the most popular, but it definitely packs a punch with its damage output. While this loadout mainly focuses on increasing damage and range, it results in slower handling speed compared to other ARs and SMGs. To use this loadout effectively, your best bet is to play slightly less aggressively while taking full advantage of the damage and range by holding lines of sight and ‘head glitches’. This weapon and loadout benefit from the incredibly fast time-to-kill in Call of Duty: Vanguard. So, as long as you manage to hit those shots, enemies will drop almost instantaneously. Alternative to the BAR Vanguard loadout If you’re looking for an alternative loadout to the BAR, check out our STG44 loadout. This punchy full-auto AR is also capable of melting enemies at medium-range, while also remaining competitive in close-quarter engagements. The STG44 has a faster fire rate than the BAR, and this weapon is probably the best all-rounded AR currently in Vanguard. Make sure to give the STG44 a go and kit it out best meta attachments to increase your kill count. So, there you have it, the best BAR loadout that can destroy even the most skilled Vanguard players. Make sure you check out our other Vanguard loadout guides to get a competitive edge over your foes: Best Automaton loadout | Best Itra loadout | Best MP40 loadout | Best M1928 loadout | Best STG44 loadout | Best CoD Vanguard FOV settings | Every CoD Vanguard perk | Best Vanguard controller settings | Unlock Atomic camo | Best Automaton loadout | Best Cooper Carbine loadout | Best Gorenko loadout | Best SVT-40 loadout | Best Automaton loadout | Best Itra loadout | Best M1 Garand loadout | Best Volkssturmgewehr | Best DP27 loadout | Best Type 11 loadout | Best Bren loadout | Best 3-Line Rifle loadout Best NZ-41 | Best Einhorn Revolving

Best BAL-27 Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks ActivisionThe has BAL-27 arrived to Warzone, bringing back an iconic Call of Duty weapon from Advanced Warfare. Here’s the best loadout to make the most of this futuristic assault rifle in Season 4 Reloaded. Back in 2014, the BAL-27 was the most used gun in Call of Duty. It defined Advanced Warfare’s meta alongside all-time greats like the ASM1 and MORS. Though unique variants like the Obsidian Steed that made the BAL-27 so dominant aren’t in Warzone, it is still a great weapon. What makes the BAL-27 so unique is that its first four shots are laser accurate and fire slower, while the following shots have a far faster fire rate but are harder to control. You can either master its unusual recoil pattern or fire the AR in bursts to make it easier to control. Either way, you’ll be using a powerful Warzone Season 4 Reloaded weapon, and this is the best loadout to make the BAL-27 as strong as possible. Contents Best BAL-27 Warzone loadout – Best BAL-27 Warzone class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the BAL-27 in Warzone – Best BAL-27 alternative in Wazone – Best BAL-27 Warzone loadout Attachments Muzzle: Casus Brake – Barrel: Crown-H3 Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Underbarrel: Bruen Heavy Support Grip – Magazine: 60 Round Mag – The BAL-27’s unusual recoil pattern makes it tricky to build, but there are a few attachments that are essential for getting the most out of it. It starts with the Casus Brake to give the weapon better horizontal recoil control and firing stability to help with that unusual pattern. Partner that muzzle with the Bruen Heavy Support Grip to make the BAL-27 more accurate. This underbarrel attachment will allow you better aiming stability and recoil control. Using the Crown-H3 Barrel is a no brainer with this unique barrel massively raising Damage Range and Bullet Velocity. Even better, its cons aren’t overly impactful as it only makes Hipfire Spread worse which is only relevant on close-range weapons like the HRM-9 and RAM-9. Round off the build by equipping the 60 Round Mag and JAK Glassless Optic. The 60 Round Mag is necessary in Warzone as the BAL-27 empties its magazine faster than most other guns. Meanwhile, the JAK Glassless Optic is one of the best optics in the game thanks to its clean sightlines and ability to land shots from any range. Best BAL-27 Warzone class: Perks & Equipment Perks Perk Slot 1: Double Time Increases Tactical Sprint duration and reduces refresh time. – – Perk Slot 2: Sleight of Hand Reload faster. The slower the base reload time, the bigger the bonus. – – Perk Slot 3: Quick Fix Killing players or inserting a plate immediately starts health regeneration. – – Perk Slot 4: Resolute When taking damage from gunfire, grants a short bonus to movement speed. – – Lethal: Throwing Knife Retrievable throwing knife that is lethal to unarmored targets and the head. – – Tactical: Smoke Grenade Deploys a smoke screen that blocks vision and automated targeted systems. – – Double Time is still the best Perk 1 in Warzone with the buffs it provides for mobility being unmatched. You will always have to run around regardless of playlist or map making this a perk that gets constant use. There really isn’t a reason to not use Double Time on every loadout where possible. As for Perk Slot 2, Sleight of Hand is typically not worth using in Warzone, but the BAL-27’s slower reload speed makes it worthwhile. This perk is also useful on the BAL-27 as the futuristic AR can empty its magazine very quickly when its fire rate ramps up, so you’ll be reloading frequently. Quick Fix is always a great option for Perk Slot 3 as it lets you kickstart health regeneration by equipping a new armor plate. With how often you will be replenishing your armor, it’s a huge help to also let it help with your health. Your fourth Perk should be Resolute to help you with your mobility. Whenever you are hit by enemy fire, you get a burst of speed to get out of that sticky situation much easier. If you are looking to use the most impactful equipment possible, then a Throwing Knife is your best bet. This lethal knife can be used to quickly dispose of downed enemies to avoid wasting ammo or even used in a pinch to instantly down unarmored players. Then in the Tactical slot, you’ll want to use a Smoke Grenade. This is the best tactical equipment in Warzone as it can be thrown to create cover to either escape or push other teams with your BAL-27. The utility provided by Smoke Grenades is superior to that of any other piece of equipment so it’s no surprise they are meta. How to unlock the BAL-27 in Warzone The BAL-27 was originally unlocked in Warzone by completing Sector 23 of the Season 3 Battle Pass. After the end of Season 3, the gun is now unlocked through completing 5 Daily Challenges in Warzone or MW3. Best BAL-27 alternative in Warzone While the BAL-27 speeds up as you fire, the SVA 545 does the exact opposite. It starts out fast and slows down after a few shots. Much like the BAL-27, this gives the SVA 545 an unusual recoil pattern but also one of the best TTKs in Warzone. Assault rifles have a solid place in the Warzone meta, so read up on other options like the Holger 556, MTZ-556, BP50, and MCW.

Best BAL-27 MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks ActivisionThe Season 3 Reloaded update adds the BAL-27 to MW3, and this is the best loadout to turn the sci-fi AR into a fantastic option in multiplayer. The BAL-27 is no stranger to dominating 6v6 with it once being Advanced Warfare’s best weapon. Ten years on and it is back and despite not being the best weapon anymore, the BAL-27 is still an excellent choice. Something to note about the BAL-27 is that it has a unique mechanic where its fire rate and TTK speed up as you fire. However, this comes at the cost of a massive spike in vertical recoil which can be difficult to control. To offset this it’s often better to burst fire the BAL-27 rather than shoot full auto for its entire magazine. Regardless of whether you use this technique or not, the BAL-27 is a strong option in MW3, and this is the best loadout to use with it. Contents Best BAL-27 MW3 loadout – Best BAL-27 MW3 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the BAL-27 in MW3 – Best BAL-27 alternative in MW3 – Best BAL-27 MW3 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Zehmn35 Compensated Flash Hider – Barrel: Crown-H3 Barrel – Stock: Ardent Tac Stock – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – Magazine: 60 Round Mag – The BAL-27’s unusual recoil pattern can make it a handful so it’s important to use attachments that reduce recoil. For this, your best options are the Ardent Tac Stock and Zehmn35 Compensated Flash Hider which combine to reduce Recoil Gun Kick by a staggering 29%. One area where the BAL-27 excels is Damage Range and this can be further improved by using the Crown-H3 Barrel. This unique barrel attachment boosts the BAL-27’s Effective and Minimum Damage Range by 20% while also improving other key MW3 stats like ADS Movement Speed and Bullet Velocity. In contrast, the BAL-27 has a slow reload time and empties its magazine quickly due to its rapid-fire rate. That combination is far from ideal, so you’ll want to use the 60 Round Mag to mitigate this problem and double the AR’s magazine capacity. Last but not least is the DR-6 Handstop which is a meta underbarrel that improves various Handling and Mobility stats. Most notably, the DR-6 Handstop boosts ADS Speed by 7%, Sprint To Fire Speed by 7%, and ADS Movement Speed by 6%. This makes the BAL-27 feel mobile and snappy while also maintaining its excellent damage range. Best BAL-27 MW3 class: Perks & Equipment Perks Vest: Ninja Vest Eliminates footstep sounds, immune to movement reduction effects, bonus Throwing Star/Knife ammo, and Resupply Throwing Stars/Knives every 25 seconds. – – Boots: All-Terrain Boots Significantly increased movement speed. Disables Tactical Sprint. – – Gear: Mag Holster Improved reload speed. – – If you want to play aggressively then the Ninja Vest is a must-use perk. This meta vest silences your footsteps and lets you flank more effectively without having to use up the boots slot. It also provides a good balance of perk options and equipment making it an all-around excellent choice. The All-Terrain Boots introduced in Season 3 Reloaded offer an interesting option. They effectively function a lot like the Lightweight Boots in older COD games by boosting key mobility stats like Sprint Speed and Movement Speed. This is great for getting around the map quickly even if it does come at the cost of being able to use Tactical Sprint. Typically, Mag Holster isn’t that strong as it doesn’t improve reload speed as much as its predecessors like Sleight of Hand. However, the BAL-27 has a slow reload speed for an MW3 assault rifle and empties its magazine quickly making this a top-tier option on this particular weapon. Equipment Lethal: Throwing Knife Retrievable throwing knife that is lethal on impact in Core MP. – – Tactical: Stim A military stimulant that promotes clotting to close wounds quickly and refreshes Tactical Sprint. – – Field Upgrade: Portable Radar Emits a periodic radar ping to detect nearby enemies. – – If you use the Ninja Vest as recommended then it also makes sense to equip a Throwing Knife. This lethal blade can be thrown at enemy players to immediately kill them. The best part is that the Ninja Vest will constantly replenish them ensuring that you are always prepared for action. Rather than go with another offensive option it’s better to use a Stim to quickly heal up in a pinch. This is especially strong in MW3 as this year’s Call of Duty is very fast-paced and waiting for your health to regenerate isn’t always going to be an option. As for Field Upgrade, a Portable Radar is a powerful tool that can be used to scout an area for opponents. This provides additional map intel and gives you more information on where the other team is. Just be aware that both the Assassin Vest and Ghost T/V Camo counter the Portable Radar so be sure to not overrely on it. How to unlock the BAL-27 in MW3 The BAL-27 is unlocked in Modern Warfare 3 by completing Sector 23 of the Season 3 Battle Pass. This new sector was added in Season 3 Reloaded and requires you to complete the following challenges: Akimbo Assault: Get 5 Operator Headshot or Special Zombie Critical Kills with assault rifles – Pierced Gaze CC: Get 10 Operator or Special Zombie Kills while moving with assault rifles – Pierced Gaze emblem: Get 10 Operator or Special Zombie Hipfire Kills with assault rifles – 1 Hour Double XP Token: Get 10 Operator or Special Zombie Tac Stance Kills with assault rifles – BAL-27: Earn all sector rewards and then Get 15 Operator or Special Zombie Kills while aiming down sights with assault rifles. – The fastest way to get these challenges done is in multiplayer matches using a meta assault rifle. With some focus, it’s possible to get all five done in a single game. This is easy enough on fast-paced playlists like Small Map Mosh Pit. Best BAL-27 alternative in MW3 The MTZ-556 is another great all-around assault rifle that excels at medium range just like the BAL-27. It has an extremely competitive TTK and can hold its own against the very best Modern Warfare 3 has to offer. That’s all for the best BAL-27 loadout in MW3. Check out these additional builds for more meta classes: Best MW3 loadouts: Meta weapons and classes for multiplayer | Best SVA 545 loadout | Best MCW loadout | Best BP50 loadout | Best Holger 556 loadout

Best AX-50 Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks ActivisionDespite being overshadowed in the past, the AX-50 has risen up as a contender in Warzone Season 3, so here’s how you can get the most out of this powerful sniper. When it comes to sniper loadouts in Warzone, the AX-50 is a strong pick that can pack one hell of a punch in the right hands. Given that the Warzone and Vanguard Season 3 update completely rejigged the Sniper Rifle meta, the AX-50 is now a veritable beast in the right hands. Not only that, the sniper received a hefty buff in the Reloaded patch and it’s now one of the most popular weapons in the game. So, here’s a complete rundown on everything you need to build the optimal AX-50 loadout in Warzone. Contents Best AX-50 Warzone loadout: Attachments – Best AX-50 Warzone Class: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the AX-50 in Warzone – Alternative to the AX-50 Warzone loadout – Best AX-50 Warzone loadout: Attachments Attachments Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: 32.0″ Factory Barrel – Laser: Tac Laser – Stock: Singuard Arms Assassin – Rear Grip: Stippled Grip Tape – The default AX-50 is among the most accurate snipers in Warzone. Therefore, it’s not the end of the world if your setup drops this stat to boost other areas. That’s exactly what we’ve targeted with this build, improving ADS speed, Range, and Bullet Velocity at the expense of some accuracy. To start out, the Singuard Arms Assassin Stock along with the Stippled Grip Tape will make the sniper slightly harder to control. However, their benefits can’t be understated. You’ll be quickscoping better than ever thanks to these two and the addition of a Tac Laser only further improves ADS speed. Adding a bonus 35% Max Range to the weapon, along with 55% faster Bullet Velocity, we’ve gone with the Monolithic Suppressor and the 32.0″ Factory Barrel. Combined, these attachments will boost the AX-50 in line with Warzone’s top snipers and keep you competitive from afar. Best AX-50 Warzone Class: Perks & Equipment Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: MP40 – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – For Caldera, we believe it’s perfect to start out with E.O.D to sustain your involvement in the game as tons of explosives and throwables will be coming your way. Overkill is an easy choice as it allows us to choose the MP40 and Amped allows for quick switching between your two guns. On top of that, the usual will do you here: there’s nothing better than the Semtex and Heartbeat Sensor duo to round out a devastating AX-50 Warzone loadout. How to unlock the AX-50 in Warzone In order to get your hands on the AX-50 Sniper Rifle, you just need to get your character up to Rank 37 to unlock the AX-50. If you’re new to the game then just grind out some games, perhaps do a bit more Rebirth to get used to the feel of the game. Alternative to the AX-50 Warzone loadout Thanks to an ever-changing Warzone dynamic, thanks to Season 3, the AX-50 is now a top option to utilize, but it might not be for everyone. If this turns out to be the case, maybe turn your attention to another Sniper Rifle such as the ZRG 20mm. Best Warzone settings to increase FPS on PC| Most popular Warzone weapons | Best Sniper Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | Best Warzone loadouts | Top 20 highest-earning players | Call of Duty Warzone Mobile: Everything we know | What is Sabotage Contract in Warzone? | How to level up Vanguard weapons fast for Warzone

Best Automaton Vanguard class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Proficiency, Setup Activision / Sledgehammer GamesThe Automaton Assault Rifle is a destructive force in CoD Vanguard and it’s perfect for shredding opponents at medium range. Here’s the best Automaton loadout in Vanguard to help you get the most out of this deadly full-auto weapon. When it comes to picking an AR in Vanguard Season 5, like Warzone, it’s important the weapon has a solid TTK, damage range, and a manageable recoil pattern. Of course, with so many options to choose from, this can be a difficult combination to find, but a few guns stand out from the crowd deep into the game’s release. One of which is the Automaton, a full-auto AR that melts enemies at medium range and is capable of taking out multiple opponents with a single mag. However, to get the most out of the weapon, you need a top-tier loadout in the game that pushes the gun to its limit and we’ve got you covered. See the latest Call Of Duty deals here. Contents Best Automaton Vanguard loadout – Best Automaton Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment, & Field Upgrade) – Tips for the Best Automaton class Vanguard – How to unlock the Automaton in Vanguard – Alternative to the Automaton Vanguard loadout – Best Automaton Vanguard loadout Attachments Muzzle: MX Silencer – Barrel: ZAC 600mm BFA – Optic: G16 2.5x – Stock: Anastasia Padded – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: 6.5MM Sakura 75 Round Drums – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Proficiency: Tight Grip – Kit: Fully Loaded – First of all, you’ll want to use the MX Silencer in the Muzzle slot to bolster the Automaton’s recoil control, whilst the ZAC 600mm BFA Barrel boots the range, making it devastating at mid-range. Next, utilize the Anastasia Padded Stock to further help the recoil, making it far easier to land shots at longer distances. The same can be said of the M1941 Hand Stop Underbarrel, which, paired with other attachments on this list, helps tame the weapon’s wild kickback. After that, make sure to equip the 6.5mm Sakura 75 Rnd magazine so you can eliminate multiple opponents in a single clip. There’s nothing worse than running out of bullets mid-way through a fight and while increasing your mag size does come at the cost of some ADS speed, it’s well worth it. A clear optic is absolutely key if you want to land your shots, so we recommend the G16 2.5X, a sight that’s perfect for medium-range encounters. However, keep in mind, optics all come down to preference so don’t be afraid to experiment and find one that fits your playstyle. When it comes to Ammo type, you’ll want to run Lengenthed. These rounds improve bullet velocity, so the Automaton will pack a serious punch in gunfights at any distance. Keep in mind, that the Automaton does have a hefty recoil pattern, so don’t forget to add the Polymer Grip to your loadout. This Rear Grip attachment provides increased recoil control with minimal negative effects, unlike a lot of the other options for the weapon. Finally, round off the class with the Tight Grip Proficiency for one final slither of recoil control and the Fully Loaded kit to help you earn more XP in your matches. Best Automaton Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment, & Field Upgrade) First Perk: Ghost – Second Perk: Radar – Third Perk: Overkill – Secondary: Machine Pistol – Lethal: Thermite – Tactical: Stim – Field Upgrade: Armor – When it comes to Perks in Vanguard, there appear to be standout three choices that the majority of loadouts are using as they combine so well together. These are Ghost to remain undetected on enemy radars, Overkill for the dual primary weapon slots, and of course Radar, so you can track any opponents on the map not making use of silenced weapons. For the secondary, make sure you run the Machine Pistol so you always have a close-quarter alternative when necessary. Although you’ll rarely need to use this weapon, it’s helpful to have a backup just in case your primary runs out of bullets. While Lethal and Tactical choices aren’t the most important aspects of a loadout, they can help you get out of a difficult situation and pick up some extra kills. So, make sure you run the Thermite for an incendiary that can clear out an entire room and cause serious damage, and the Stim to boost your health after a close gunfight. Finish off the loadout with the Armor Field upgrade, as absorbing a few extra bullets can be the difference-maker between you going down, or taking out your opponent. That’s a full rundown on our optimal Automaton loadout in Vanguard, and rest assured, we’ll keep this loadout updated with the latest optimal attachments and equipment as the game develops season on season. Best Automaton class Vanguard tips The Automaton is slowly becoming a favorite among many Vanguard players. The main attraction of this Assault Rifle is its incredibly high fire rate. Here are a few tips on how to effectively take advantage of our best Automaton class in Vanguard: The Automaton’s fire rate is similar to that of an SMG. This makes it quite effective up-close. – This weapon has fairly easy recoil to control. Don’t be afraid to engage in medium to long-range gunfights. – The perk “Ghost” conceals you from the enemy mini-map. Use this to your advantage by confusing your enemies. – The perk “Radar” allows you to see enemies on your mini-map who are not using a silencer. Stay vigilant! – Also, remember to always develop a playstyle that feels the best for you. With that said, if you’re still struggling to succeed with the Automaton, these tips should be helpful. How to unlock the Automaton in Vanguard In order to unlock the Automaton in CoD Vanguard, you’ll need to level up and reach Rank 8. This shouldn’t take too long if you make use of Double XP tokens or play with the Assault and Blitz Combat Pacing to increase the lobby size. To maximize XP, also make sure to play the objective in game modes like Domination, Patrol, and Hardpoint which almost guarantee XP. Alternative to the Automaton Vanguard loadout If you’re looking for an alternative to the Automaton, then check out our Cooper Carbine loadout. This Assault Rifle has an almost identical fire rate to the Automaton, it’s one of the most consistent weapons in the game, and it can be one of the deadliest in terms of close-range damage output. Further balance changes are sure to come at some point in the future, so be sure to check out this Assault Rifle while it’s in good standing. Looking for more Call of Duty: Vanguard updates and information? Check our list of guides below: Best CoD Vanguard FOV settings | Best MP40 Vanguard loadout | Best M1928 Vanguard loadout | Every CoD Vanguard perk

Best Automaton Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks ActivisionHaving absolutely slayed in the early days of Warzone Pacific, the Automaton Assault Rifle is still one of the game’s most potent weapons in Season 5, and our best loadout will increase its killing potential. The Automaton is one of the most popular weapons in Call of Duty: Vanguard, and can be just as deadly and effective in Warzone too. With a deadly TTK and a damage range that’s capable of eliminating foes with ease at long range, it’s definitely a gun that should be on your radar in the current meta. So if you’ve got your Automaton leveled up in Vanguard, you’ll want to jump into Caldera or Rebirth Island and give this loadout a try in Season 5. Here’s our best Automaton loadout in Warzone Season 5. Contents Best Automaton Warzone loadout – Best Automaton Warzone class – How to unlock the Automaton in Warzone – Alternative to the Automaton Warzone loadout – Best Automaton Warzone loadout Attachments Muzzle: MX Silencer – Barrel: ZAC 600mm BFA – Optic: G16 2.5x – Stock: Anastasia Padded – Underbarrel: Carver Foregrip – Magazine: 6.5mm Sakura 75 Round Drum – Ammunition: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Pine Tar Grip – Perk: Frenzy – Perk 2: Fully Loaded – The Mercury Silencer is an integral attachment for the Automaton, suppressing your gunfire on the minimap while also improving accuracy. Further improving accuracy is the ZAC 600mm BFA barrel, Anastasia Padded stock, Carver foregrip, and Pine Tar Grip. Paired with a good optic, you should be able to succeed in gunfights in medium to long ranges. Ammunition is key, too, so the 6.5mm Sakura 75 Rnd Drum magazine is hugely beneficial, especially when paired with the Fully Loaded perk to start with max ammo. Add a Lengthened ammo type on for extra bullet velocity and you’ll be in good stead. Finally, the Frenzy perk gives a boost in health regeneration after getting a kill, making those tight gunfights a little cleaner and allowing you to move onto the next opponent quicker. Best Automaton Warzone class Perks & Equipment Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: Stim – E.O.D is a beloved Perk that offers serious protection against explosive blasts, and Overkill is preferable as starting Perk to Ghost to get yourself either a close-range gun or a Sniper Rifle. Amped is ideal for quick weapon swapping, giving you the chance to come out on top during intense gunfights. Finally, finish off the class with a Throwing Knife to execute downed opponents and a Stim for a big, burst of health. How to unlock the Automaton in Warzone To unlock the Automaton in Warzone, players much reach Level 8, so it won’t take too long. While we recommend reaching that level in Vanguard multiplayer as it’s quicker, it can easily be done in Warzone. Alternative to the Automaton Warzone loadout If the slightly nerfed Automaton isn’t quite doing for you and you need something else, then there are some other great recommendations like the STG44. The STG44 is a tried and tested AR with brute force, great accuracy, and amazing range. Maintaining a 2.7% pick rate in Season 5, it’s not the most popular weapon, but it’s a lethal option in the right players’ hands. For some more of the best Warzone loadouts, check these out below: Grau 5.56 | Kilo 141 | Krig 6 | CR-56 AMAX | M4A1 | FFAR 1 | MAC 10 | MP5 | Kar98k | HDR | MP40 | Bren

Best AUG loadouts for Warzone and Modern Warfare Infinity Ward / Activision[jwplayer SmN5cmUl]The AUG may not be the go-to weapon in Warzone anymore, but with the upcoming Grau nerf, it could see a lot more play in both Modern Warfare’s battle royale and multiplayer modes. Here, we break down two of the strongest AUG loadouts you should be using. While the Grau is currently dominating the current Call of Duty weapon meta, this incredibly precise SMG delivers consistent damage across a variety of ranges. The AUG absolutely crushed foes during Season 2, mostly thanks to its large clip size, accurate firing pattern, low recoil, and high damage. With the assault rifle class still remaining the top pick for their overall accuracy and range, it’s not at all surprising then that the AUG continues to be such a popular pick – after all, this SMG dishes out plenty of damage in both close-quarters skirmishes and medium-range gunfights. In order to help you get the most out of the AUG, we’ve put together two loadouts that you can use to gain a competitive edge over your foes. Best AUG loadout for Warzone Monolithic Suppressor – 407mm Extended Barrel – Integral Hybrid – Forge TAC CQB Comb – 5.56 NATO 60-Round Drums – Both medium and long-range firefights are incredibly common in Verdansk, particularly in early-game rounds when the majority of the map is still safe from the clutches of the gas circle. As a result, you’ll want to pick a loadout that can reliably drop enemies at a distance and still give you a fighting chance in any scrappy close-quarters fights. This loadout is tailored around pushing the AUG’s effective range to its very limits, while also giving you enough damage to stop enemy squads dead in their tracks. The first two attachments on the list are the Monolithic Suppressor and 407mm Extended Barrel. These two attachments not only drastically increase your effective damage range, they also reduce the AUG’s punchy recoil and speed up its bullet travel time. Of course, this does come with a major downside as your ADS speed will decrease. While the Forge TAC CQB Comb slightly alleviates this issue, it’s often best to begin aiming down the AUG’s sight early on to avoid any frustrating deaths. The Integral Hybrid allows you to effortlessly switch between both Reflex and 3.25x Scout sights, giving you the accuracy needed to secure those game-winning headshots. It’s important to remember that this SMG performs more like an assault rifle, so try to use it like one when you’re gunning for those ranged kills. Rounding things off is the 5.56 NATO 60-Round Drums. Those of you that have played a lot of Warzone will know just how important it is to have plenty of ammo, especially when you need to take down multiple armored targets. This 60-round drum is a must for any player that’s aiming to rack up a high amount of kills and secure those satisfying squad wipes. Best AUG loadout for Modern Warfare multiplayer Monolithic Suppressor – Forge TAC CQB Comb – Commando Foregrip – 5.56 NATO 30-Round Drums – Stippled Grip Tape – Unlike Modern Warfare’s Warzone mode, the majority of the game’s standard multiplayer maps favor close-quarter to medium engagement ranges. As a result, this loadout is tailored around this aspect of play. Both the Monolithic Suppressor and Forge TAC CQB Comb remain equipped thanks to their overall effectiveness, but everything else has been swapped out. The Commando Foregrip is a staple pick for the majority of guns thanks to its superior recoil stabilization and general aiming stability, making it very easy to beam opponents with highly-accurate rounds to the head and chest. If that wasn’t enough, we’ve removed the Integral Hybrid optic to further decrease the ADS time, while enhancing this further with the Stippled Grip Tape. Not only does this attachment drastically decrease ADS time, it also lowers the sprint to fire speed. Lastly, the 5.56 NATO 30-Round Drums help to buff the AUG’s damage output, giving it increased range without the cost to the gun’s ADS and overall mobility. While the AUG may not be as powerful as the MP5 or Fennec, these setups will certainly allow you to net yourself plenty of kills in both Warzone and Modern Warfare’s standard multiplayer modes. If you want to try out some different weapons in Warzone or even Multiplayer, check out our full list of best loadouts for every gun.

Best AUG Warzone loadout class: Attachments, Setup, Perks Activision / Infinity WardThe AUG may not be the most popular SMG in Warzone, but it is capable of dishing out decent damage if you’re willing to give it a chance. While Modern Warfare’s AUG had a brief stint in the Warzone meta spotlight, it was quickly overshadowed by the likes of the Kilo and Grau. Despite this, the reliable SMG boasts decent accuracy and range, making it an incredibly versatile option. The Modern Warfare version performs very differently to its Cold War cousin. Instead of being burst fire, this variant allows players to go full-auto and unleash a volley of bullets towards their target. Even though the AUG is classified as an SMG, it performs more like an AR thanks to its methodical fire rate and overall damage range. If you’re looking for an SMG that you can use to dominate your opponents across Warzone’s Verdansk and Rebirth Island, then this loadout will help you do just that. Best AUG loadout for Warzone Attachments Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: 407mm Extended Barrel – Laser: Tac Laser – Underbarrel: Commando Foregrip – Ammunition: 5.56 NATO 60-Round Drums – Perks Perk 1: EOD – Perk 2: Ghost – Perk 3: Amped – Equipment Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Verdansk offers plenty of opportunities for you to pick off targets in mid to long-range engagements. This can obviously be a problem for SMGs like the MAC-10 and MP5, but for the AUG, this isn’t an issue. Our loadout makes the AUG pack a punch in mid-range skirmishes, while also bolstering the gun’s accuracy and damage. Read More: Best Fennec Warzone loadout – First up is the Monolithic Suppressor and 407mm Extended Barrel. Both these attachments greatly increase the AUG’s damage range, giving you plenty of opportunities to take those all-important mid-range shots. If that wasn’t enough, the added bullet velocity and recoil control make hitting moving targets that much easier. The AUG’s clean sight also enables frees up a slot for the Tac Laser, which speeds up the gun’s ADS speed and helps with aiming stability. Having the extra speed is fantastic, particularly in close-quarter scenarios where quick reaction times are needed. Read More: Best M16 loadout in Warzone – Meanwhile, the added aiming stability and recoil control from the Commando Foregrip ensures the AUG remains competitive across all ranges. Combine this with the 5.56 NATO 60-Round Drums and you have an SMG that can mow down many an enemy. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Call of Duty news and updates, then follow us over on @DexertoIntel.

Best AUG loadout for Call of Duty: Black Ops Cold War Activision / TreyarchThe AUG has returned in Call of Duty: Black Ops Cold War, so find out which attachments you need to equip to wreak havoc on the battlefield. [jwplayer Q7ySHZq9] Black Ops Cold War wouldn’t be the same without the AUG. This rifle was one of the most popular guns in the original Black Ops, so a lot of series veterans will want to unlock it in Treyarch’s latest instalment. This burst AR’s highly accurate firing pattern, fantastic range, and high damage make it one of the most deadly guns in the game. It performs incredibly similar to the M16, but has a much faster time to kill when kitted out with the right attachments. If you’re looking for a rifle that you can use to dominate your opponents across Cold War’s multiplayer modes, then the AUG is your best friend. In order to get the most out of this iconic gun, we’ve put together the following loadout. Best AUG loadout for Black Ops Cold War Millstop Reflex – Socom Eliminator – 19.8” Task Force – Steady Aim Laser – Field Agent Foregrip – 45 RND Drum – Airborne Elastic Wrap – Raider Pad – Just like with our other Black Ops Cold War loadout guides, we’ve utilized the three additional attachments of the Gunfighter Wildcard. The AUG has an incredibly similar playstyle to the M16, especially since it uses many of the same attachments. The Millstop Reflex is arguably one of the cleanest optics in the game, so we’ve used this to decrease screen clutter and increase accuracy. Next up is the Socom Eliminator and Field Agent Foregrip. Both these attachments greatly decrease the AUG’s vertical kick, giving you tremendous amounts of accuracy at short to medium ranges. The above attachments are incredibly important if you wish to use the added damage, range, and bullet velocity of the 19.8” Task Force Barrel. While this attachment is incredibly strong, it does increase the AUG’s vertical and horizontal recoil. Fortunately, the Socom Eliminator and Field Agent Foregrip keep the AUG under control. Next up is the Airborne Elastic Wrap. This wrap adds a 30% increase to your ADS speed and 90% Flinch Resistance, allowing you to instantly snap onto your enemy’s head and fire away. Combine this with the added sprint to fire speed from the Raider Pad and added 45 RND Drum, and you have a recipe for success. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Call of Duty news and updates, then follow us over on @DexertoIntel.

Best audio settings to hear footsteps in Warzone 2 ActivisionWhen it comes to playing Warzone 2, getting the right audio cues is vital to understand the location of your enemies, and prepare for their imminent arrival. So, here’s a rundown of the best audio settings to hear footsteps in Warzone 2. When it comes to Battle Royale games like Warzone 2, footsteps are a crucial aspect. They allow player the chance to pinpoint the location of enemies without putting themselves at risk. This feature is beneficial especially when you don’t have a visual on them and it’s no different for Activision’s Battle Royale sequel. Getting the correct sound cue increases your chances of winning a gunfight or in some cases, even a game, which is why having the best audio settings is a fantastic path to success, along with the best settings for PC and consoles. With that in mind, here are some of the best settings for you to hear the footsteps of your enemies in Warzone 2. Best Warzone 2 audio and sound settings to hear footsteps Here’s a rundown of the best audio and sound settings for Warzone 2: Volumes Audio Mix: Headphones Bass Boost – Master Volume: 65 – Music Volume: 10 – Dialogue Volume: 40 – Effects Volume: 50 – Hit Marker Volume: 75 – Speakers/Headphones Game Sound Device: Default System Device – Mono Audio: Off – Subtitles Subtitles: Default – Campaign: On – Multiplayer: Off – Coop: Off – DMZ: Off – Subtitles Size: Default – Subtitles Background Opacity: 0 – Voice Chat Voice Chat: On – Game Voice Channel: All Lobby – Last Words Voice Chat: On – Proximity Chat: On – Voice Chat Device: Default System Device – Microphone Microphone Mode: Push to talk – Voice Chat Volume: 80 – Microphone Test: Off – Microphone Device: Default System Device – Mute Yourself When Connecting: On – Microphone Level: 85 – Audio Advanced Settings Juggernaut Music: Off – Hit Marker Sound Effects: MW – Mute Game When Minimized: Off – Reduce Tinnitus Sound: On – These settings will help you with the best audio intel of enemies nearby. Remember, players often use the “Dead Silence” Field Upgrade to silence their footsteps while pushing enemies. All you need to do is keep your ears prepared for a specific audio cue when it’s activated. Once you hear it, keep yourself prepared for a sudden attack from the direction of the sound. So, there you have it — those are some of the best settings for you to hear the footsteps of enemies in Warzone 2. For more on the game, be sure to check out our other guides: Warzone 2 download size | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | Warzone 2 & Modern Warfare 2 Season 1 Battle Pass | Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | All new Warzone 2 features explained | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | Best SP-R 208 Warzone 2 loadout

Best audio settings to hear footsteps in Black Ops 6 ActivisionHere are the best audio settings to use in Black Ops 6 to maximize your ability to hear enemy footsteps and movements. Black Ops 6 is in its beta period and will officially launch on October 25, 2024. With heaps of new gameplay changes, including the new omnimovement mechanics and dedicated melee weapon slot, there are many new features and systems for players to learn and brush up on. With much more freedom and versatility regarding movement, BO6 makes tracking and hearing your opponents more complex than other Call of Duty games. Enhancing your audio settings to maximize your capacity to hear their footsteps and approach is essential. Here is our rundown of the best audio settings to use in Black Ops 6 to give yourself the best chance at hearing your enemies before you see them and, in turn, get the jump on them before they even hear you coming. Best BO6 audio settings: Headphones are a must First, use headphones in Black Ops 6 when optimizing your audio setup to help you hear footsteps. Even when using the best audio set-up without headphones, it will be much harder to hear all sounds from the game and will be more muddled when using your TV and monitor speakers. This is especially true for directional audio, helping you hear footsteps from all around. When using your headphones, the Bass Boost is your best friend as it is the best way to make your Black Ops 6 audio experience the most immersive it can be while also increasing the chances of you hearing enemy moments. In addition, you’ll want to dial down all non-gameplay audio. We recommend turning down the music volume to 0 to avoid any unnecessary noise taking away from movement audio. Furthermore, dialogue volume can be dialed down to around the 60 or 70 mark so that you can still hear teammate callouts and Scorestreak announcements. Recommended audio settings and specs Now that you’ve got your headphones sorted, here are our recommendations for the best audio settings for Black Ops 6 to help hear footsteps and movements. Volumes Master Volume: 70 – Music Volume: 0 – Dialogue Volume: 70 – Effects Volume: 100 – Cinematic Music Volume: 50 – Global Audio Mix: Headphones Bass Boost – Mono Audio: Off – Functionality – Reduce Tinnitus Sound: On – Hit Marker Sound Effects: Classic – Voice Chat Voice Chat Volume: 50 – Voice Chat: On – Proximity Chat: On – Last Words Voice Chat: Off – Last Words Voice Chat: Off – Game Voice Channel: Party Only – How to enable Loudness Equalization on PC Loudness Equalization is an audio feature for PC users that significantly increases footstep clarity. However, this particular audio enhancement is unavailable for PlayStation or Xbox users. For those playing on PC, here is how to enable Loudness Equalization. Go into your PC’s settings. – Select audio settings. – Find and click on the ‘Playback’ tab. – Scroll to your audio device and right-click. – Select ‘Properties.’ – Head into the ‘Enhancements’ tab. – Check the box next to ‘Loudness Equalization.’ – Click ‘Apply’ to save the settings. – These audio settings and tips will make picking out the enemy’s footsteps a much easier task across all game modes when dropping into Black Ops 6.

Best audio settings for Modern Warfare 3 ActivisionThe best Modern Warfare 3 audio settings can give you a huge advantage in the game, so here are all the options you should be adjusting. Modern Warfare 3 is finally here and players from around the world are busy adjusting to the new perks, guns, and maps. While utilizing the best Modern Warfare 3 loadouts will help increase your KDA, adjusting your audio options is also just as important. After all, being able to hear enemy footsteps and communicate with your squad is incredibly important in the game. This is especially true if you wish to avoid any frustrating deaths. So, without further ado, here are the best audio settings in Modern Warfare 3. Best Modern Warfare 3 audio settings Volumes Audio Mix: Headphones Bass Boost – Master Volume: 70 – Music Volume: 0 – Dialogue Volume: 76 – Effects Volume: 100 – Voice Chat Volume: 50 – Cinematic Music Volume: 0 – Voice Chat Voice Chat: On – Game Voice Channel: Party Only – Last Words Voice Chat: Off – Proximity Chat: Off – Microphone Microphone Mode: Push to Talk – Subtitles Subtitles: Default – Multiplayer: Off – Subtitles Size: Default – Subtitles Background Opacity: 0 – Functionality Mono Audio: Off – Reduce Tinnitus Sound: On – War Tracks as Passenger: Off – Juggernaut Music: Off – Hit Marker Sound Effects: Classic – Mute Game When Minimized: Off – Best Modern Warfare 3 audio settings to hear footsteps The best Modern Warfare 3 settings use Headphones Bass Boost, which helps make footsteps sound clearer. This enables you to avoid enemies from sneaking up on you and increases your awareness of nearby opponents. Next up, you want to set the Master Volume to around 70 so you can hear your teammates over comms, without sacrificing too much in-game sound. We also recommend turning off any sound effects that don’t provide any advantages. Turning off the in-game Music Volume and adjusting the Dialogue Volume will ensure you aren’t bombarded with overly loud sounds that distract you from your gameplay. Lastly, be sure to have the Effects Volume maxed out so that you can hear enemy gunshots – an area that is always pivotal for finding the whereabouts of even the sneakiest enemies. As always, be sure to play around with the settings to see what works best for you. After all, the best Modern Warfare 3 settings will change depending on your preferences, but the above is a good baseline to aim for. So, there you have it, those are the best Modern Warfare 3 audio settings that you can use in the game. Be sure to check out our Call of Duty page for all the latest news and guides surrounding Modern Warfare 3. Best Modern Warfare 3 AR class loadouts | How to slide cancel in Modern Warfare 3 | Best controller settings in Modern Warfare 3 | All maps & modes | How to play Modern Warfare 3 at 120 FPS on PS5 | Modern Warfare 3 TTK | How long is the Modern Warfare 3 campaign? | Campaign mission list | How to fix packet burst | How to play MW3 Zombies in third person

Best audio settings for Call of Duty: Warzone Treyarch/ActivisionUnderstanding sound is key to success in Warzone, as detecting enemy footsteps gives you a massive advantage on the battlefield, but you’ll need the best audio settings possible to do so. Like most things in Warzone, audio settings involve a lot of personal preference, but there are some options that players ought to try. A few are even essential to compete in high-skill lobbies, though even the most casual players benefit from using optimized settings. Focused primarily on hearing footsteps, the majority of Warzone professionals use the same audio settings. These meta settings provide the best chance possible to hear enemies before they get the chance to down you. Footsteps aren’t the only thing that you’ll want to hear. Being able to pick up on your surroundings and tell apart the small details from one another can often be the difference between glory and shame. Once again, doing so is only possible with the best audio settings. How to change Audio Settings Changing your Audio Settings in Warzone isn’t difficult at all. All you need to do is follow these instructions to find the correct menu: Launch either Modern Warfare 3 or Call of Duty HQ on your platform of choice. – On the main menu, select Warzone. – Press start on your controller or use your mouse to navigate to the settings tab, represented by a white cog in the top right corner. Those playing on a controller can use RB/R1 to navigate to this tab. – Finally, select ‘Audio’ to access audio settings. – Best Audio Settings These are the best audio settings to use to make hearing enemy footsteps as easy as possible: Global Volumes Voice Chat Microphone Subtitles Functionality How to improve audio in Warzone If you’ve adjusted your Warzone audio settings to our recommended values and you still find yourself struggling in the game, then chances are your equipment might be to blame. Whether you’re serious about improving in Warzone or just playing casually, there are a few key things you can do to boost audio quality: Use the Flex perk Introduced to Warzone alongside MW3’s integration, Flex is a perk that is used for the sole purpose of making audio better. Found in Perk Slot 4, its description is as follows: “Delay triggered explosives while sprinting, warns of nearby enemy equipment, and reduces combat noise.” It’s the “reduced combat noise,” that matters most, as this removes the majority of environmental audio that would otherwise suppress footsteps. With the unnecessary background audio removed, it is much easier to hear enemy footsteps. Invest in a good headset Many great gaming headsets provide improved audio for a relatively inexpensive price. If you’ve gotten accustomed to playing using the audio from your TV or monitor, then upgrading to a dedicated headset for gaming is the biggest upgrade you can make to improve audio in Warzone. How much you should spend depends on how much audio matters to you. If you just want to be able to hear footsteps better, headphones in the $50 – $60 price range will suffice. Those wanting the best audio possible can expect to pay over $200, though this won’t be necessary for most players. Minimize surrounding noise While this may sound obvious, surrounding noise from devices and other sources can have a negative impact on your ability to hear in-game sounds. Minimizing that noise as much as possible will allow you to pinpoint audio cues better. After all, footsteps in Warzone are fairly subtle, especially if you aren’t using Flex. Any additional background noises only serve to conceal enemy footsteps, making it more likely another player will get the jump on you. Listen out for specific audio cues Even if you have the best audio settings and equipment possible, you still need to know what to listen out for. This comes with practice, but train yourself to recognize distinct audio cues and their meanings. While enemy footsteps will always sound vaguely similar, there are subtle cues you can pick up on that provide additional information. These cues can be used to judge an enemy player’s distance, whether they are running or walking, and if they are above or below you. More information is always a good thing, and audio is no exception. Having the best audio settings certainly helps, but there’s more to Warzone than just sound. You’ll also want to use the best PC Settings and Controller Settings to streamline your experience. Equally, kitting your classes with meta loadouts that take advantage of the Best Assault Rifles and Sniper Rifles will give you a big advantage over the competition.

Best Assault Rifles to use in Call of Duty: Warzone Dexerto/Infinity WardThere is no shortage of choice when it comes to assault rifles (ARs) in Warzone but, if you’re still not sure what your best options are, we’ve ranked them all to give you the best chances of conquering your foes. One major reason for Warzone’s popularity is the inclusion of new features to shake up the battle royale formula, like the Gulag and Loadout Drops. The latter gives you the chance to customize your loadout and take your favorite setup into the expansive Verdansk environment. However, such freedom means difficult choices for players. ARs are certainly dominant in Warzone as a result of the mid to long-range engagements players frequently find themselves in. To help you narrow down your weapon of choice, we’ve ranked all the ARs you can take into battle with you, from worst to best. Best ARs in Warzone 10. Oden Very bottom of our list is the Oden. Any Warzone player with more than a few Season 3 matches under their belt will have come across the base version of this gun on the floor. They have probably also found that you’ll want to swap it out for something else when you get the chance. Significant recoil, an insanely slow fire rate, and a meager 20-round magazine see this AR come dead last in our rankings of ARs. It does have very high damage compared to other weapons, but lacks in almost every other area. Only use this one if you have no other choice. 9. AK-47 The AK-47, much like the Oden, leaves a lot to be desired. It handles slightly faster and has a slightly faster fire-rate, but its very bouncy recoil is perhaps even harder to control than the Oden. In a game like Warzone, where a high percentage of players’ engagements will be medium or long range, a gun that kicks this much was always going to struggle to be viable. Even it’s customized versions that can be found are nothing more than mediocre. 8. FN Scar 17 The FN Scar 17 is essentially a mix of the AK-47 and Oden in terms of its characteristics. 20 round-mags and a slow fire rate make this less than ideal in any Warzone situation. It pales in comparison to its previous appearances in Call of Duty, most notably the Black Ops II Scar, that simply puts this one to shame. Add slow handling into the mix, and you’ve got yourself an AR that’s really not worth using, even with its high damage. 7. FAL The FAL is the only semi-auto rifle classed as an AR but, unfortunately, it’s unique characteristic does not set it apart from the others in terms of Warzone viability. While you can probably spam-fire faster than the Oden, that’s not saying a lot. It can be useful at medium to long ranges, perhaps finishing off enemies that are in full retreat. However, it is generally outclassed by the automatic ARs at all ranges, especially close range where you may as well try and melee your opponent to death instead. 6. RAM-7 The RAM-7 is a fairly middle-of-the-pack assault rifle when it comes to Warzone. While it can outclass an SMG at longer range, or some of the other ARs at close range, it doesn’t excel at anything in particular, so can’t do any better than sixth on our list. Regardless, it’s most definitely an improvement over the aforementioned automatic ARs, most of which would fit right in a dumpster fire. 5. Kilo 141 The Kilo 141 can be fairly hit or miss. There’s certainly a meaningful jump from the RAM-7 to the Kilo, thanks mainly to the serious buff when it comes to fire rate. While it can’t quite match the damage of the M4A1 or the stability of the Grau 5.56, it can hold its own in most engagements players will find themselves in. Attachments can also make a big difference with the Kilo – most notably the longer, heavier Singuard barrels, that massively reduce recoil. 4. FR 5.56 The FR 5.56’s fairly high ranking is pretty dependent on the user. Essentially, while using this three-round burst weapon, players have to choose their engagements more carefully. At medium to long ranges, players can put down multiple accurate bursts and shred through enemies’ armor. Read More: Best SMGs to use in Call of Duty: Warzone – Try and use this up close, however, and you’ll likely find yourself in the queue for the Gulag. Regardless, its damage output and manageable recoil make it a fairly strong all-round option. 3. M13 The M13 is essentially a slightly upgraded version of the Kilo, albeit with a higher fire rate and faster handling. This makes it especially viable in close to medium range scenarios, where a host of other ARs would crumble. You can also customize the M13 in any way you want. Throw a Monolithic Suppressor and Tempus Marksman on and it becomes useful at longer ranges, or remove the stock and add the Tempus Mini and it becomes an AR/SMG hybrid. Its versatility, high fire rate, and impressive handling make it one of the stronger AR choices in the game’s current build. 2. M4A1 It will surprise absolutely no one that the M4A1 and Grau 5.56 are fighting it out for the top spot. The M4A1 has been the professional AR of choice since Modern Warfare’s release, and remains popular when it comes to general multiplayer. Its incredibly high damage output sets it apart from all the ARs we’ve listed so far, albeit with moderate, but manageable, recoil. Players may need to throw some optics on there as the weapon’s iron sights can become obstructive at longer ranges. However, its pure destructive capabilities make it a top-two AR in Warzone, and a strong choice regardless of the situation you find yourself in. 1. Grau 5.56 Top of our list is the Grau 5.56; the AR that was added post-launch, as part of Modern Warfare’s second season. It quickly established itself as one of the most powerful all-round weapons in the game, but has come to dominate all areas of the Verdansk map. Add a Tempus 26.4″ Archangel barrel and a Monolithic Suppressor to it and it becomes a terrifying weapon. While admittedly slower in the handling and mobility departments, its range, damage and stability make it incredibly powerful at medium to long ranges. When an AR can outperform a sniper or LMG at long ranges, and some SMGs at close to medium ranges, it’s fair to assume it’s worth your time. We might even see a nerf for the Grau, with some community members calling it overpowered. If you’ve been destroyed across the map by an enemy with a Grau, you might be inclined to agree. If you want to improve your game in Warzone, getting to know your favorite weapons are crucial. Try them out, get a feel for each, and let us know if you agree with our rankings by tweeting us @DexertoIntel.

Best AS44 Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks ActivisionThe best AS44 Warzone loadout is among the fastest Assault Rifle classes in Season 1 and we’ve got all the strongest Attachments and Perks you need to get the most out of the underrated weapon. CoD Vanguard’s AS44 Assault Rifle is among the more unique weapons in its category. While it can still shine as a long-range tool, it works best as a fast-firing, SMG-esque gun instead. Picking the right attachments to boost bullet velocity and lower recoil will keep it shredding through enemies, even at ranges that you might not think it could handle. Here’s everything you need to equip the very best AS44 loadout in Warzone. Contents Best AS44 Warzone loadout – Best AS44 setup (Perks & equipment) – How to unlock the AS44 in Warzone – Alternatives to AS44 Warzone loadout – Best AS44 Warzone loadout Muzzle: MX Silencer – Barrel: Kovalevskaya 615mm – Optic: SVT PU Scope 3-6x – Stock: Kovalevskaya Custom – Underbarrel: Carver Foregrip – Magazine: 7.62 Gorenko 50 Round Mag – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Hatched Grip – Perk 1: Disable – Perk 2: Fully Loaded – Rather than building a well-rounded AR, our goal here is to bring up the gin’s and without cranking up the recoil. The Kovalevskaya 615mm barrel and the the 7.62 Gorenko 50 Rouns Mag both saw a buff in Season 4, making them the ideal picks to keep the fire rate and damage high without aiming becoming an impossible task. Next comes the SCT PU Scope to keep you prepared for fights at long range, while the Kovalveskaya Custom stock keeps things anchored nicely. The Carver Foregrip is another solid option as this attachment handles the extra vertical recoil that the AS44 is infamous for. By strapping this one on, players can trust the gun at longer ranges than with some of the competitors. Moving on we have the .30 Russian Short 60 Round Mags for one key reason: to keep you firing. The default magazines run dry fairly quickly, so doubling the capacity is highly effective. When it comes to selecting an Ammo Type, there’s nothing better than Lengthened. Other picks can be solid in the right situations, but increasing Bullet Velocity is undeniably the most important option. Rounding things out is the Stippled Grip Rear Grip for some added recoil control, especially with your initial rounds. Then comes Gung-ho in the Perk 1 slot along with Fully Loaded in the Perk 2 slot. Gung-ho is one of the most important picks in this entire build as it allows you to shoot while sprinting. Meanwhile, Fully Loaded provides a huge surplus of ammo so you’ll never run out. Best AS44 Warzone setup (Perks & Equipment) Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Combat Scout – Secondary: STG44 – Lethal: Frag Grenade – Tactical: Stim – In choosing the right Perks, you want to ensure you’re picking around the AS44’s speed. Therefore, we’ve gone with the standard E.O.D. and Overkill to bring a second Primary to the fight. However, we’ve also settled on Combat Scout in the third slot. You’ll always be on the move with this AS44 Warzone build. Landing just one shot on a target with Combat Scout equipped will keep them highlighted on your screen for a few seconds. This is crucial information as you take on entire squads across the bushy Caldera. In terms of Lethal and Tactical equipment, you can’t ever go wrong with the standard Frag Grenade and Stims. Read More: Best MP40 Vanguard class loadout – Activating a Stim in the right moment, especially with this fast-firing AS44 build, can give you a huge advantage in any gunfight. How to unlock the AS44 in Warzone Unlocking the AS44 in Warzone is as simple as reaching level 33. As soon as you pass this level, you’ll have full access to the powerful Assault Rifle. Before you get there and even after as you grind for attachments, it’s worth activating some double XP tokens. Moreover, try to maximize experience gains through contracts when possible. Alternatives to the AS44 Warzone loadout If this fast-paced AR build isn’t doing it for you, it might be worth your time to check out our ultimate BAR loadout instead. Rather than running and gunning through Caldera, you can take your time and pick your shots with the BAR. Using the best attachments, you’ll be able to keep at a good distance without sacrificing your aim. Accuracy is top tier with our BAR loadout making it a decent pick if you’ve had enough of the AS44’s up-close style. So there you have it, that’s everything there is to know about the best AS44 Warzone loadout. While it’s the strongest build today, new updates are sure to change things around in the weeks to comes. Rest assured, we’ll be keeping this loadout guide up to speed with all the latest changes as new patches arrive. For now, be sure to brush up on some other crucial Warzone loadouts below: Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Sniper Rifles | Mac-10 loadout | FFAR Warzone class | Top 20 highest-earning players | Top class setups and best weapons | 10 best Warzone players | Automaton loadout | MP40 loadout

Best AS44 CoD Vanguard class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Proficiency, Setup ActivisionWith the right AS44 CoD Vanguard loadout, this fast-firing Assault Rifle can have you at the top of the scoreboard in no time. From the best attachments to the correct Perks, here’s a rundown on the optimal class setup for the AS44. While the likes of the STG44 and the MP40 may be dominating the early meta in Vanguard, that doesn’t mean other deadly guns can’t stand out too. With the right builds, just about anything is viable. At first glance, the AS44 is one of the fastest ARs in CoD Vanguard. It’s extremely hard to control but with a few select attachments, you can easily tame this beast and be on your way to a V2 Rocket. Here’s our ultimate AS44 loadout in CoD Vanguard to help you dominate lobbies across every map and mode in the game. Contents Best AS44 Vanguard loadout – Best AS44 Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment, & Field Upgrade) – How to unlock the AS44 in Vanguard – Alternative to the AS44 Vanguard loadout – Best AS44 CoD Vanguard loadout Muzzle: F8 Stabilizer – Barrel: Zac 650MM Precision – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Zac 12B Custom – Underbarrel: M1941 Hand Stop – Magazine: No Magazine – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Proficiency: Sleight of Hand – Kit: On-Hand – With 70 levels worth of upgrades to unlock, you’ll need to do some leveling with the AS44 before putting their top-tier loadout together. Many of the best attachments can be found towards the higher levels with this particular gun. However, it’s worth the payoff to get the very best AS44 loadout. First up is the F8 Stabilizer Muzzle, an absolute must-pick to start things off. It’s the best Muzzle for this weapon, offering improved recoil control and even better damage range all at a small cost of slightly worse sprint to fire speed. This is necessary given the AS44 has some of the wildest recoil in Vanguard. Next comes the Zac 650MM Precision Barrel to really set this AS44 loadout apart. While it does come with a 20.8% nerf to body shot damage, a ridiculous 70% buff to headshot damage turns the AS44 into one of the fastest-killing guns in the game. This Barrel also comes with a whopping 41.3% boost to horizontal recoil control, making all your shots that much sharper. When it comes to picking the best sight, you can’t go wrong with the standard Slate Reflector Optic. While this is mostly down to personal preference, you won’t be firing too far across the map with this AS44 loadout, so try to stick with something designed for close to mid-range gunfights. The Zac 12B Custom Stock is next in line, making the AS44 an actual laser beam. 50% bonus sway control and 20% flinch resistance make this another must-pick to keep the loadout as sharp as possible. One notable downside here is that you won’t be quite as agile in-game, but it’s a worthwhile trade-off. This logic applies to the M1941 Hand Stop Underbarrel as well. Once again, it’s another optimal attachment to further buff your accuracy with the AS44 in Vanguard. While selecting a Magazine for this AS44 loadout, we decided to neglect the category altogether. The AS44 comes with just three Magazine choices and all of them come with significant negative effects. Conversely, choosing the right Ammo Type is essential here and we’ve gone with Lengthened. Bullet velocity is always essential in Vanguard, so boosting the stat here will go a long way to improving the AS44. Rounding out the loadout is the Polymer Grip in the Rear Grip category to outright negate any form of flinch. Even if you’re taking shots, this attachment will keep your sights on point no matter what. Last but not least comes the Sleight of Hand Proficiency and the On-Hand Kit. Both of these picks will speed things up across the board, with the former boosting reload times and the latter making you more agile when throwing out equipment. If you happen to be going on some lengthy killstreaks, however, the Fully Loaded Kit is also a great option to keep plenty of ammo banked up. Best AS44 CoD Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment, & Field Upgrade) Perk 1: Ghost – Perk 2: Piercing Vision – Perk 3: Double Time – Secondary: 1911 – Lethal: Thermite – Tactical: Stim – Field Upgrade: Armor – To really get the most out of this AS44 loadout in Vanguard, you’ll want to run Ghost, Piercing Vision, and Double Time as your Perks. Ghost is just a staple in nearly every loadout to keep you hidden when Spy Planes are circling overhead. Piercing Vision is where things get interesting. It may not be the most popular option yet, but this Perk gives you a huge advantage in Vanguard. Just one or two shots into an enemy keeps a bright red highlight around their Operator for a few seconds. With how many smokes, stuns, and other obscuring features there are in multiplayer, this keeps you on target with ease. Rounding it all out is Double Time to simply get you back in the fight quicker off of each respawn. Boosting your tactical sprint is essential to help navigate through any map, even the smallest layouts in the game. As for your Secondary, the 1911 Pistol is the absolute best in CoD Vanguard. It’s capable of nearly two-shotting from any range, and has already been banned from competitive play due its strength. Thermite and Stim will both help you in a pinch while the Armor Field Upgrade just adds a little extra health to give you a leg-up in every gunfight. How to unlock the AS44 in Vanguard Unlocking the AS44 AR in CoD Vanguard requires you to earn experience and reach level 33. This is easily done in just a few hours of game time regardless of what mode you happen to be playing. You can even speed up the process by using any double XP codes you may have available. Alternative to the AS44 Vanguard loadout If you’re looking for something a little different to the AS44, or just want something a little easier to control, you can’t go wrong with our Automaton loadout. The snappy AR is one of the most accurate in Vanguard today, and offers another solid option outside of the more prevalent STG44. The Automaton is quickly becoming a must-pick at the pro level too, so running it in your public matches is a great way to be ahead of everyone else in the lobby. So there you have it, the absolute best AS44 loadout in CoD Vanguard today. While balance updates are sure to change various stats as the weeks go by, we’ll keep this setup up to date with all the latest Vanguard patches. In the meantime, be sure to check out some of our other top loadouts in Vanguard while you’re at it: Best Automaton loadout | Best Itra loadout | Best MP40 loadout | Best M1928 loadout | Best STG44 loadout

Best Warzone AS VAL class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup Activision / Infinity WardThe Season 3 update has hit both Black Ops Cold War and Warzone, bringing with it a host of exciting new content for players to sink their teeth into. Here, we break down the strongest AS VAL loadout you should be using. Warzone’s Season 3 update is finally live and players have been busy getting to grips with the new map changes, fresh floor loot, and deadly battle pass weapons. One of the weapons that has come into contention is that of the AS VAL. This assault rifle boasts a blisteringly fast rate of fire and incredibly quick TTK, making it one of the most sought-after weapons this season. Whether the AS VAL will replace the game’s deadly FARA and AK-47 loadouts remains to be seen, but for now, this weapon still packs a mighty punch. In order to help you get the most out of the AS VAL, we’ve put together the best loadout you can use to dominate your enemies in Warzone Season 3. How to unlock the AS VAL in Warzone Since the AS VAL Battle Pass has ended, you’ll need to do a challenge to unlock this AR in Season 3. If you’re looking to grab this lightning-fast AR as soon as possible, simply get 2 headshots using assault rifles in 5 different matches. Read More: Warzone Season 3 long-range meta – Like most Call of Duty challenges, it’s recommended that you hop over to the game’s standard multiplayer. If you don’t have Modern Warfare or Black Ops Cold War, then Plunder is your best bet. Consider hot dropping onto your targets and begin aiming for those all-important headshots. Best AS VAL build for Warzone Attachments Barrel: VLK 200mm Osa – Laser: TAC Laser – Stock: VLK Streklok – Underbarrel: Commando Foregrip – Ammunition: 30 Round Mags – Not only does the AS VAL’s lightning-fast fire rate allow it to rival the game’s most popular SMGs, its clean iron sights and integral suppressor give you a lot of choices when it comes to attachments. However, due to the large-scale nature of Warzone’s Verdansk map, this loadout is all about maximizing the AS VAL’s damage and overall accuracy. As a result, the VLK 200mm Osa barrel is a must-pick. This barrel enhances both the gun’s damage range and bullet velocity, while the TAC Laser allows you to quickly ADS. This is great for those close-quarter fights where speed is imperative. Read More: All Warzone Season 3 bunker codes – If that wasn’t enough, we’ve also used the VLK Streklok and Commando Foregrip to further improve the gun’s stability. These attachments will keep your shots on target when going full auto. Lastly, the 30 Round Mags are also a must in Warzone, especially if you wish to chew through armored units and secure those all-important squad wipes. Best AS VAL setup (Perks & equipment) Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: CR-56 AMAX – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Just like most meta Warzone loadouts in Season 3, our AS VAL utilizes both EOD and Amped. EOD reduces the damage of explosives, while Amped allows you to quickly cycle weapons. This is particularly useful when you need to switch out to the AS VAL in close-quarter firefights. Meanwhile, the Overkill perk enables the use of the extremely deadly AMAX loadout, which still remains one of the best Assault Rifles in Warzone Season 3. Lastly, both the Semtex and Heartbeat Sensor help track down your enemies and flush them out with a deadly Semtex blast. Alternative AS VAL loadout While the AS VAL may be incredibly fast, the LC10 is still a great choice in Warzone Season 3. This SMG features an incredible rate of fire, good damage, and great hip-fire accuracy. Not only is it a good alternative to the AS VAL, but it also has a very similar playstyle. If you want to use the best LC10 loadout, then be sure to check out our LC10 build.

Best Armory Unlocks in Modern Warfare 3: Weapons, perks, streaks, more ActivisionThe Armory Unlock system has drawn much debate from Modern Warfare 3 players, as the Call of Duty community gets used to yet another weapon progression system that now incentivizes completing challenges to fill out your inventory. But what are the best things to unlock? While you can unlock a lot of weapons and equipment through simply leveling up — far easier to wrap your head around than the weapon platform system in Modern Warfare 2 — things can get a bit confusing when it gets to Armory Unlocks. While players are getting to grips with what Armory Unlocks are, the difficult question of what you should be trying to unlock each day starts to pop up, as you seek to find the strongest weapons, most helpful equipment, and get gear that can make you even better at MW3. Here are the things we consider must-haves that you should prioritize unlocking from the Armory going forward. Best Armory Unlocks in MW3 Here is a list of what we consider to be the best Armory Unlocks in Modern Warfare 3, though you should also take a look at what else is available to see if any other weapons, equipment, or streaks would suit your playstyle better: DG58 – Covert Sneakers – Rival-9 – Breacher Drone – Advanced UAV – Drill Charge – Trophy System – Snapshot Grenade – Ghost T/V Camo – Gunship – Assault Gloves – Emergency Airdrop – This early in the game’s lifecycle, we would recommend unlocking guns before going for anything else, allowing you to level your weapons as fast as possible to get ahead of that grind. For that reason, there are some clear weapons that should be prioritized, as they’re a step above some of the other guns. We’ve picked out the DG-58 three-round burst AR and the Rival-9 SMG for those that prefer a more close-quarters style of play. That said, you’ll also want to complement your general gunplay with the right equipment, perks, streaks, or Field Upgrades, so we’ve recommended things that will elevate your gameplay in that way too. For us, the Covert Sneakers and Trophy System are essential. Being able to traverse the map silently is perfect for those with aggressive or sneaky playstyles and can be huge when it comes to getting the better of your opponent. Meanwhile, the Trophy System is paramount with the way the game is right now, as grenades are so prevalent. If you play any objective-based modes, a Trophy System is a great choice. Finally, streaks we would recommend are the Advanced UAV and the Gunship. The Gunship is reminiscent of the AC-130 from Modern Warfare 2 (2009), making it exceptional in wiping out players on the ground across the map. The carnage it can cause on maps like Afghan or Wasteland is second to none. As for the Advanced UAV, it’s one of the most effective killstreaks anybody could use. If you’re grinding for Armory Unlock wins, having an Advanced UAV or two pop up during a match can be essential in locating enemies and wiping them out, giving you a far better chance of winning. While this list isn’t exhaustive by any means, it should give you a good idea of what to prioritize in your Armory grind. If you’re looking to improve your MW3 game across the board, be sure to check out some of our other guides too: Best Modern Warfare 3 AR class loadouts | How to slide cancel in Modern Warfare 3 | Best controller settings in Modern Warfare 3 | All maps & modes | How to play Modern Warfare 3 at 120 FPS on PS5 | Modern Warfare 3 TTK | How long is the Modern Warfare 3 campaign? | Campaign mission list | How to fix packet burst | How to play MW3 Zombies in third person

Best Armaguerra 43 Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks Treyarch/ActivisionThe Armaguerra 43 in Warzone Season 5 Reloaded is the most popular gun in the game thanks to its devastating TTK, top-tier mobility, and quick ADS speed. The Warzone Season 5 Reloaded update introduced a range of new content to the game, including the BP50 bullpup AR, Lienna 57 LMG, and a set of significant balance changes. Despite all of these exciting additions, it’s still incredibly difficult to pick out a weapon in the new patch with the massive amount of powerful choices available. One option that’s stolen the spotlight is the deadly Armaguerra 43 which decimates opponents at close quarters and offers a huge amount of mobility. This means as long as you can land your shots, it’s definitely a gun you should add to your arsenal, but you’ll need to run a top-tier loadout if you want to get the most out of the weapon. Contents Best Armaguerra 43 Warzone loadout – Best Armaguerra 43 Warzone class – How to unlock the Armaguerra 43 in Warzone – Alternative to the Armaguerra 43 Warzone loadout – Best Armaguerra 43 Warzone loadout Attachments Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: Botti 315mm CII – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Imerito SA Folding – Underbarrel: Mark VI Skeletal – Magazine: 9mm 60 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Polymer Grip – Perk: Hardscope – Perk2: On-Hand – First of all, you’ll want to run the Recoil Booster muzzle and the Botti 315mm CII barrel to boost the gun’s damage and already impressive fire rate. This will ensure that the Armaguerra tears down opponents at close-range, giving you the best chance to come out on top during intense gunfights. After that, utilize the Imerito SA Folding, Mark VI Skeletal, and Polymer Grip to bolster the SMGs recoil pattern and improve ADS time so you always get the fire shot off on the enemy. When it comes to bullets, make sure you run Lengthened to increase the Armaguerra’s bullet velocity, as well as the 9mm 60 Round Mags so you can take out multiple opponents without having to reload. Finally, finish off the loadout with Hardscope to give you even more control over the SMG and On-Hand so you’re always first to fire when taking on an opponent. Best Armaguerra 43 Warzone class Perks & Equipment Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: Cooper Carbine – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Stim – When it comes to perks, our loadout runs the standard meta choices with EOD protecting you from explosive blasts, and Amped increasing your weapon swap speeds during intense gunfights. While Ghost is strong, we recommend taking Overkill as the Armaguerra struggles at long-range, so running the Cooper Carbine, Grau 5.56, or XM4 in the secondary slot will give you a versatile and strong loadout. Finally, round off the setup with a Semtex to clear our stationary opponents and the Stim for a boost of health when you need it most. How to unlock the Armaguerra 43 in Warzone In order to unlock the Armaguerra 43 in Warzone, players will need to get 10 hip-fire kills in 15 separate matches. Although this will be incredibly difficult in BR, it’s recommended that players complete the challenge in one of Warzone’s secondary modes such as Plunder or Clash or Vanguard’s online Multiplayer. If you don’t want to complete any challenges, you can always purchase the Armaguerra 43 Blueprint from the Warzone store. Alternative to the Armaguerra 43 Warzone loadout If the Armaguerra 43 doesn’t fit your playstyle in Warzone you’re looking for an SMG that deals more damage at the expense of fire rate, it may be time to pick up the MP40. This lethal weapon may be less popular than the Armaguerra 43 but it still packs a punch at close range and is ideal for any Rebirth Island players. Not only that, it’s seen a huge resurgence in Season 5 Reloaded and is currently the third most popular weapon in the game, but it’s also worth noting the Armegurerra still holds the top spot. If you do want to try the MP40, we’ve got a loadout guide that goes over the top-tier attachments in the current meta, alongside all the perks and equipment you should run to maximize the power of your class. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Warzone and Vanguard news and updates, then be sure to check out our Call of Duty page. Best warzone settings to increase FPS on PC| Most popular Warzone weapons | Best Sniper Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | MAC-10 loadout | Best Warzone loadouts | Top 20 highest-earning players

Best Armaguerra 43 CoD Vanguard loadout: Attachments, Perks, Proficiency, Setup ActivisionCall of Duty: Vanguard Season 2 Reloaded is here and players have a brand new, fast-firing SMG to get to grips with in multiplayer. Don’t worry, though, we’ve put together the best Vanguard Armaguerra 43 loadout to make the most of this exciting new weapon. The SMG meta in CoD Vanguard has remained fairly steady in recent weeks. The MP40 has been the top-dog ever since the game launched in November 2021, and the Welgun, which came at the halfway point in Season 1, has become the main contender to the crown. Following the start of Vanguard Season 2 Reloaded, a new player has entered the game, and it’s vying to become the strongest in the category. The Armaguerra 43 has the fastest fire rate of any weapon in its class, making it perfect for close-range combat. If you’re looking to run this SMG in your next game of multiplayer, check out our best Armaguerra 43 loadout for Vanguard. Contents Best Armaguerra 43 Vanguard loadout – Top Armaguerra 43 Vanguard class – How to unlock the Armaguerra 43 in Vanguard – Alternatives to the Armaguerra 43 in Vanguard – Best Armaguerra 43 Vanguard loadout Muzzle: Recoil Booster – Barrel: Imerito 550mm 03P – Optic: Slate Reflector – Stock: Imerito TA Skeletal – Underbarrel: Carver Foregrip – Magazine: 9mm 60 Round Mags – Ammo Type: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Fabric Grip – Proficiency: Sleight of Hand – Kit: Fully Loaded – As we mentioned earlier, the Armaguerra 43 has a blistering fire rate and an impressive TTK. So our setup is geared around keeping its recoil under control and making sure those first shots land every time. We start with the Recoil Booster, which further increases the rate of fire at the expense of some accuracy, making the SMG utterly devastating at close range. Next up, we went for the Imerito 550mm 03P Barrel, which gives adds a great deal of recoil control, and makes the sway less noticeable. The Carver Foregrip also helps with keeping the recoil in check and paired with the Imerito TA Skeletal Stock it turns the Armaguerra into a no recoil monster. We decided on a simple Slate Reflector for our optic, but feel free to swap this for whichever sight you feel comfortable with. Then, our loadout uses 9mm 60 Round Mags. This new weapon chews through ammo at a stunning rate, so the extra capacity is vital. We stocked them with Lengthened ammo to boost the bullet velocity and reduce the TTK even further. For the Rear Grip, we opted for the Fabric Grip, as this speeds up the ADS and helps you hit your first shots with more accuracy. We round out the loadout with Fully Loaded and Sleight of Hand, to ensure the gun always has plenty of rounds left, and to make reloading a breeze. Best Armaguerra 43 Vanguard class Perk 1: Ghost – Perk 2: Piercing Vision – Perk 3: Double Time – Lethal Equipment: Frag Grenade – Tactical Equipment: Stun Grenade – Ghost is still one of the most effective Perks in CoD Vanguard, and the ability to hide from enemy UAVs is just as useful with the Armaguerra as it is with any other weapon. Piercing Vision lets you see enemies through walls once you hit them with a few bullets, making it perfect for clearing out a room of enemies. Meanwhile, Double Time lets you dart around the map with extra Tactical Sprint time, allowing you to get up close and personal with the rival team. In terms of Equipment, we kept things simple with a Frag Grenade as the Lethal, paired with Stun Grenades as the Tactical. Stuns are an ideal way to get the drop on unsuspecting enemies, simply throw one into a crowded room then run in and clear it out. How to unlock the Armaguerra 43 in CoD Vanguard Players can unlock the new SMG by completing a challenge in-game. All you have to do to get your hands on the Armaguerra 43 in Vanguard is score 10 hipfire kills in a single match 15 times. This may seem like a lot of kills to secure without aiming, but it should be fairly straightforward on close-range maps like Shipment or Das Haus. We recommend equipping another fast-firing SMG to get the job done. Alternatives to Armaguerra 43 Vanguard loadout If you’re looking for something with a similarly rapid-fire rate, the PPSH-41 is the best bet. It absolutely shreds at close range, and can its wild recoil can be curbed by equipping the right attachments. Alternatively, it’s worth trying the other meta SMGs that are dominating multiplayer right now. The MP40 remains top of its class, and the Welgun’s impressive mobility and damage make it ideal for rushing. There you have it! That’s everything you need to know about how to make the most of the new Armaguerra 43 SMG in CoD Vanguard. For more helpful guides, check out some of our other Call of Duty loadouts: Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| MAC-10 loadout | FFAR Warzone class | Top class setups and best weapons | 10 best Warzone players | Automaton loadout | Best BAR Vanguard loadout |

Best AN-94 Warzone class loadout: Attachments, setup, perks Treyarch/ActivisionAs it’s a Modern Warfare weapon, the AN-94 often gets overlooked by Warzone players, but if you’re looking for an AR that packs a punch, it may be the perfect weapon for you. The Season 5 Reloaded patch has finally arrived in Warzone and players are getting stuck into all of the brand new content. Whether it’s the lethal Sai melee weapon or the new 50v50 Clash mode, Raven has certainly knocked it out of the park with the latest update. Despite this, the meta has remained relatively stable in the last few months, with the Krig 6 and Kar98k still dominating Verdansk as the most popular weapons. However, this hasn’t stopped certain members of the community from experimenting with older and often forgotten guns. The AN-94 certainly falls under this category and is slowly garnering popularity as an off-meta AR that deals a lot of damage at medium range. Best AN-94 loadout for Warzone Attachments Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: AN-94 Factory X-438mm – Optic: VLK 3.0x Optic – Underbarrel: Commando Foregrip – Ammunition: 60 Round Casket Mags – Perks Double Time – Overkill – Amped – Equipment Lethal: Grenade – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Secondary: Kar98k – For starters, you’ll want to equip the AN-94 with the Monolithic Suppressor for increased damage range and bullet velocity. This attachment has become the go-to for any Modern Warfare weapon as it suppresses your gunfire and provides better stats than any other option. Next, it’s key you add the AN-94 Factory X-438mm in the barrel slot to maximize the gun’s bullet velocity as well as provide a level of recoil control. This stability can be increased even further if you go with the Commando Foregrip attachment. Finally, round off the loadout with the VLK 3.0x Optic and the 60 Round Casket Mags, so you have a clear scope and plenty of bullets to beam enemies down at long range. How to unlock the AN-94 in Warzone While some weapons in Warzone are incredibly difficult to unlock, Raven has made obtaining the AN-94 relatively easy. All you have to do is get 2 hipfire kills using an AR in 7 different matches, so it shouldn’t take you too long to finish the challenge. Remember, although you can complete the objective in Warzone, it’ll be significantly quicker if you do it in Modern Warfare multiplayer. So, there you have it, that’s the best AN-94 loadout in Warzone’s current meta. Don’t forget to check out our Call of Duty homepage for all the latest news, guides, and leaks.

Best AMR9 Warzone loadout: Class setup, attachments & Perks Since it was buffed in Season 1 Reloaded the AMR9 has remained a strong option and that hasn’t changed for Season 4 Reloaded either. Here is the best AMR9 loadout to win more gunfights in Warzone and dominate up close. At the start of Modern Warfare 3’s lifespan, the AMR9 was a remarkably average weapon. It was outperformed by not just most MW3 weapons but even a few MW2 guns too. However, a buff in Season 1 Reloaded saw that change overnight with it quickly becoming one of if not the best SMG in Warzone. It has continued to be a top-tier option since thanks to its ease of use and low recoil. Even so, it can be difficult to build properly for various reasons. To help you avoid making a sub-par loadout we’ve put together this best AMR9 loadout to use in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded. Contents Best AMR9 Warzone loadout Barrel: AMR9 Commando Pro Barrel – Optic: JAK Glassless Optic – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – Magazine: 50 Round Mag – Ammunition: 9MM High Grain Rounds – What is going to set using the AMR9 apart from other SMG’s is how easy it is to maneuver around with. Your speed and overall movement will be a breeze, and further attachments will help with this. The DR-6 Handstop is going to give you an enhanced weapon stability and movement speed, while the AMR9 Commando Pro Barrel will boost the ADS Speed along with your general movement speed. Further, the JAK Glassless Optic is going to improve your precision and efficiency with the weapon. The 9MM High Grain Rounds will give you an extra bang for your buck as they provide higher damage over a longer range, as well as better bullet velocity. This will improve the efficiency of the AMR9 from all ranges. Finally, the 50 Round Drum is going to give you the ability to spray a lot of bullets in one round, giving you a better chance of taking out your enemy, or several in one go. AMR9 Warzone Loadout: Perks and Equipment Perk 1: Double Time increases duration of Tac Sprint – – Perk 2: Sleight of Hand reload faster – – Perk 3: Quick Fix regenerate health when killing a player or inserting a plate – – Perk 4: Resolute speed boost when you are hit with an enemy shot – – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Flash Grenade – Double Time on an SMG-based class is a must, as it keeps you prepped and ready to consistently use Tac Sprint for better movement. Given you’re rocking a 50 Round Mag, Sleight of Hand will work wonders in making sure you’re healthy for enemy encounters. Finally, Quick Fix and Resolute are the best Perks in the business. Quick Fix will keep you healthy and in the heat of battle, while Resolute will help you run faster when under fire. How to unlock AMR9 in Warzone There are three methods to unlock the AMR9: Reach level 55 in multiplayer, extract with it in Zombies, or purchase the Vault Edition of MW3 to instantly unlock it and two reactive blueprints for it. Best alternative to AMR9 in Warzone As mentioned, the SMG category is stacked this year. Consider using the HRM-9 first introduced in Season 1 Reloaded for another dominant submachine gun that excels in Warzone, especially up close. The SMGs of Warzone are some of the most powerful and popular guns in the game which is why you should read up on how to create the perfect loadouts for the Superi 46, FJX Horus, and WSP-9.

Best AMR9 MW3 Loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks ActivisionThe AMR9 is a remarkably accurate weapon that can compete with assault rifles at medium range. To do so though you’ll need this AMR9 MW3 loadout that makes it as accurate as possible while retaining the fast handling expected of an SMG. It hasn’t taken over the multiplayer meta by any means but the AMR9 is a competitive option in Season 3. What makes the AMR9 so unique is that it’s an SMG-AR hybrid that is extremely accurate and easy to use. However, it has substantially worse handling than the other SMGs in Modern Warfare 3, making it difficult to use on some maps. This loadout looks to fix that while also extending its damage range where possible to make the most of the AMR9’s biggest strength. Here is the best AMR9 loadout in MW3 Season 3, including class setup, attachments, and perks. Contents Best AMR9 MW3 loadout – Best AMR9 class: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the AMR9 in MW3 – Best AMR9 alternative in MW3 – Best AMR9 MW3 loadout Attachments Muzzle: T51R Billeted Brake S – Barrel: AMR9 Regal Pro Barrel – Optic: MORS Dot Sight – Underbarrel: DR-6 Handstop – Rear Grip: Phantom Grip – The AMR9 is one of the most accurate weapons in Modern Warfare 3 so it doesn’t need too many many recoil-focused attachments. Despite this, it is still worth equipping the T51 R Billeted Brake S which provides a huge 32% reduction in vertical recoil, which is an area where the AMR9 does struggle a little. This SMG’s iron sights are hard to use with them obscuring your view when aimed in. This makes it unnecessarily difficult to track targets. To fix this add a meta close-range optic to the AMR9 like the MORS Dot Sight, which was added in MW3 Season 3 alongside the MORS sniper. The remaining three attachment slots should all be used to improve mobility and handling as the AMR9 feels sluggish without them. Several attachments help with this but the AMR9 Regal Pro Barrel is the most impactful of all, improving ADS Speed, Sprint To Fire Speed, and almost every mobility stat. However, to make the AMR9 handle as quickly as other SMGs this barrel alone isn’t enough. You’ll also want to equip the DR-6 Handstop and Phantom Grip. With all three of these attachments, the AMR9 finally feels snappy while retaining that medium-range lethality that makes it worth using in the first place. Best AMR9 class: Perks & equipment Vest: Compression Carrier Immediately regen health after each kill and reduces the strength of tactical grenades. – – Gloves: Commando Gloves Reload while sprinting. – – Boots: Stalker Boots Increased strafe and ADS movement speed. – – Gear: Ghost T/V Camo While moving, blocks detection by UAVs, enemy radar sources, and Heartbeat Sensors. – – Lethal: Throwing Knife Retrievable throwing knife that is lethal in impact in Core MP. – – New to MW3 Season 3, the Compression Carrier is an incredible vest that instantly triggers healing whenever you get a kill. This is great with the AMR9 as you can keep taking gun fights and heal between them, using the Commando Gloves and Stalker Boots to reposition and push enemies with ease. To make the most of the AMR9 in MW3 you need to close the distance. Ghost T/V Camo is perfect for this, keeping you hidden when on the move from enemy UAVs. Once you are up close, a Throwing Knife becomes a nice option to dispose of others silently without having to waste valuable shots. How to unlock the AMR9 in Modern Warfare 3 Players can unlock the AMR9 by reaching Level 55 which can be done in MW3 multiplayer, zombies, or Warzone. Best AMR9 alternative in Modern Warfare 3 Much like the AMR9, the WSP-9 is another SMG that is extremely accurate but can be made mobile and effective up close with the right build. Check out these other MW3 loadouts that you should be using to make your classes even better: Best MW3 loadouts | WSP Swarm loadout | RAM-9 loadout | FJX Horus loadout | Rival-9 loadout

Best AMES 85 loadout in Black Ops 6 beta: Class setup, attachments, perks DexertoIn what’s become a heated race for best AR in the Black Ops 6 beta, the AMES 85 has rightfully turned some heads and is a lethal weapon with the correct set of attachments. As part of our Black Ops 6 beta weapon tier list, we gave the AMES 85 the crown for best AR. Because although the weapon has a slower time-to-kill speed than the XM4 and AK-74, reliable accuracy and devastating power make it an appealing option. Without having the full pool of weapons in the beta, it’s hard to tell how powerful the AMES 85 will be at launch. In saying that, it has massive potential to be a meta weapon. Best Black Ops 6 AMES 85 loadout Optic: Accu-Spot Reflex – Muzzle: Ported Compensator – Barrel: Reinforced Barrel – Underbarrel: Ranger Foregrip – Rear Grip: Quickdraw Grip – First, we recommend using an optic as this weapon doesn’t have a visually pleasing iron sight. It comes down to personal preference, but we like the Accu-Spot Reflex because of its clean sightline. To help improve accuracy, the Ported Compensator addresses first shot and vertical recoil control. Along the same lines of of thinking, the Ranger Foregrip improves horizontal recoil control, but also helps sprinting and movement speed. Winning a gunfight in Black Ops 6 comes down to which player fires first, bullet placement, and range. With that in mind, the Reinforced Barrel improves damage range and bullet velocity, and the Quickdraw Grip improves aim down sight speed. If you use these set of attachments, there shouldn’t be any issue taking on any medium or long range engagement. In addition, the improved mobility will even make it possible to get up and close and personal with enemies. Best Perks, Equipment & Combat Specialty for AMES 85 Treyarch put a heavy emphasis on movement in this title. Regardless of whether you use and AR or SMG, being able to outmaneuver the opposition with omnimovement and other mechanics is paramount. And because of that, three of our four Perks address mobility. By using the three red Perks, you unlock the Enforce combat speciality which grants a temporary buff to movement speed and heal regeneration rate after killing enemies. We believe that this is the best combat speciality and should be on every loadout. To gain these benefits, you’ll want to use these perks and equipment: Wildcard: Perk Greed – Perk 1: Ghost – Perk 2: Gung-Ho – Perk 3: Double Time – Perk 4: Dexterity – Lethal: Thermo Grenade – Tactical: Concussion – Field Upgrade: Trophy System – How to unlock AMES 85 in Black Ops 6 Beta The AMES 85 is unlocked by reaching level 20, making it one of the harder weapons to get. However, it still shouldn’t take you too long, as all experience rates are doubled in the beta. For more meta builds, check out our Black Ops 6 gun tier list, as well as the best Jackal PDW and best C9 loadouts, both of which are dominating the beta. Also, you’ll want to make sure that your controller settings are optimized to avoid being hindered.

Best Warzone AMAX class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup Activision / Infinity WardThe CR-56 AMAX is a great, nostalgic AR to utilize in Warzone, so here’s the best AMAX loadout you should be using in Warzone Season 6 to maximize your damage.[jwplayer 36ZLqm76] Despite receiving a nerf to its damage in Warzone Season 4 Reloaded, the CR-56 AMAX is still a decent choice in Warzone Season 6. Previously known as the Galil, this AR offers great damage and precision, allowing players to kill targets in a matter of seconds. As a result, the CR-56 AMAX has become a good pick for those that want to wrack up high-kill games. In order to help you get the most out of the CR-56 AMAX, we’ve put together the best loadout that you can use after the nerfs. Contents Best Warzone AMAX loadout – Best AMAX Setup (perks & equipment) – How to unlock the AMAX in Warzone – Alternative AMAX loadout – Best Assault Rifles in Warzone – Best AMAX loadout in Warzone Attachments Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: XRK Zodiac S440 – Optic: VLK 3.0x Optic – Underbarrel: Commando Foregrip – Ammunition: 45 Round Mags – Unlike Modern Warfare’s standard multiplayer maps, the vast landscapes of Verdansk require players to test their medium- to long-range shooting. While the initial dash for loot results in plenty of close-quarters firefights, you’ll also need a weapon that can effectively deliver lethal rounds at a distance should you wish to keep your enemies at bay. Read More: Best C58 Warzone loadout – First up is the Monolithic Suppressor and XRK Zodiac S440. These two attachments drastically increase your effective damage range, reduce the AMAX’s recoil, and speed up its bullet travel time. While these attachments may increase your ADS speed, we think this loss is worth it, especially when you need to land those all-important ranged head and body shots. Keep in mind, the AMAX’s Upper Torso Damage multiplier was decreased from 1.2 to 1.1 in Season 4, so it’s key you’re landing headshots to maximize your TTK. The VLK 3.0x Optic is a must for achieving a higher zoom level, giving you a greater edge when attacking from a distance, at a slight sacrifice of ADS speed. Meanwhile, the Commando Foregrip keeps the gun stable when aiming down sights and firing, enabling you to effortlessly down opponents across all distances. Lastly, the 45 Round Mags supplies players with more than enough bullets to shred through even the most well-armored of foes. Having the extra rounds will also keep you from needing to reload every second, so if you wish to avoid any frustrating deaths, then make sure you equip this attachment. Best AMAX setup (Perks & equipment) Perks Perk 1: EOD – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Equipment Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Secondary: OTs 9 – This CR-56 AMAX loadout uses EOD to keep you safe from any explosives, while Amped enables you quickly swap to your OTs 9 in close-quarter scenarios. These perks are found on all of our meta loadouts, especially since they increase your overall survivability. Read More: 10 most popular weapons in Warzone – The Overkill perk enables the use of the OTs9 – which still remains the best SMG in Warzone. Not only does this enable you to remain competitive in late-game circles, but it also allows for some incredibly mobile plays. Lastly, both the Semtex and Heartbeat Sensor give you the tools needed to hunt enemy players and flush out pesky campers. How to unlock the AMAX in Warzone In order to unlock the CR-56 AMAX in Modern Warfare and Warzone, you need to get 3 gunbutt kills while using an Assault Rifle in 15 different matches. Due to the melee nature of this challenge, we recommend loading up Modern Warfare’s multiplayer or joining a game of plunder. Read More: Best Warzone loadouts – Equip the Double Time perk to increase the duration of your sprint and attach the Fast Melee perk to your chosen Assault Rifle. Not only will this speed up your melee hits, but it will also enable you to quickly chew through any enemy armor plates. Stun Grenades can also give you the edge needed to unleash a flurry of hits without getting gunned down in the process. Once you’ve done this challenge, you’ll be the proud owner of Warzone’s CR-56 AMAX. Alternative to the AMAX loadout If you’re looking for an alternative to the CR-56 AMAX, then check out our EM2 loadout. This powerful assault rifle was released in Season 5 and has climbed its way to becoming one of the best assault rifles in Warzone Season 6. Best Assault Rifles in Warzone Season 6 There are many solid Assault Rifle options out there for your personal playstyle. Here are some of the best assault rifles you can currently equip in Warzone Season 6! Don’t forget, you can always check out our ultimate Warzone tier list for all of the best loadouts in the current meta, as well as setups for any guns you’re looking to experiment with. Looking for more of the best Warzone loadouts? Check out our list of guides below: Grau 5.56 | Kilo 141 | Krig 6 | C58 | FFAR 1 | Mac 10 | MP5 | Kar98k

Best Warzone 2 Akimbo Pistols loadout: Attachments, Setup, Perks ActivisionWarzone has seen dual-wielding handguns become meta so naturally players are interested in how to get the most out of them. To help you out we’ve put together this guide on the best Warzone 2 Akimbo Pistol loadouts including attachments, tuning, and perks. The arrival of Season 4 and the massive health changes in Warzone also introduced Akimbo Pistols to the meta. The Basilisk revolvers– in particular – rose to prominence, largely replacing Overkill and the need to run two primary weapons. However, nerfs since have seen Akimbo Pistols weakened although they remain an excellent option. Even so, you won’t want to run the same loadouts anymore as the meta akimbo sidearms of choice have changed. Here are the best Warzone 2 Akimbo Pistols with recommended loadouts included. Best Warzone 2 Akimbo Pistol: X13 Auto loadout Muzzle: FT Steel Fire (+1.40, +0.58) – Barrel: XRK Sidewinder-6 Slide (+0.24, +0.14) – Laser: 1mW Pistol Laser (-0.48, +51.00) – Magazine: 33 Round Mag – Rear Grip: Akimbo X13 – To maximize the X13 Auto’s damage range and bullet velocity you’ll want to run both the FT Steel Fire muzzle and XRK Sidewinder-6 Slide barrel. These will make the X13 more consistent when shooting targets from further away. Speaking of consistency, the 1mW Pistol Laser is a must to narrow the hipfire spread and make the Akimbo X13 rear grip easier to keep on target. Finally, the 33 Round Mag is fantastic to ensure that you’ll have enough rounds to down and finish enemies without having to reload nearly as often. Best Warzone 2 Akimbo Pistol: P890 loadout Muzzle: FT Steel Fire (+1.40, +1.00) – Laser: 1mW Pistol Laser (-0.48, +51.00) – Trigger Action: Bruen Express (+0.17, -0.10) – Magazine: 12 Round Mag – Rear Grip: Akimbo P890 – Kicking things off, the FT Steel Fire muzzle increases bullet velocity and damage range. This handgun’s hipfire accuracy can be a little inaccurate at times, so we recommend using the 1mW Pistol Laser to narrow the spread to compliment the Akimbo P890 rear grip. This weapon shines because of its fast TTK speed, so the Bruen Express is a must thanks to it improving the P890’s fire rate. Finally, having as large a magazine as possible is always useful in Warzone 2 so it’s best to equip the 12 Round Mag. Best Warzone 2 Akimbo Pistol class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Tracker – Bonus Perk: Fast Hands – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Drill Charge – Tactical: Smoke Grenade – Since we’re using pistols Overkill isn’t required, freeing up a Base Perk slot. The best perks to use with these slots are Double Time and Tracker. The former double the duration of Tactical Sprint letting you traverse the map faster while the latter reveals enemy footsteps, perfect for hunting down hostiles. For Bonus Perk, Fast Hands is the best overall choice as it greatly reduces the reload time for both your akimbo pistols and primary weapon of choice. For your primary be sure to use a well-rounded gun like an assault rifle to cover the akimbo pistols’ inherent weaknesses. Unsurprisingly, the most useful Ultimate Perk to run is High Alert. The additional intel High Alert provides by highlighting the direction that enemy players are aiming at you from is too valuable to pass on. Your preferred choice of equipment is largely personal preference and will depend on playstyle, but a Drill Charge is fantastic for pushing enemy teams and applying pressure. Meanwhile, a Smoke Grenade is great for rotating through open areas and creating impromptu cover. How to unlock Akimbo Pistols in Warzone 2? To use Akimbo pistols in Warzone 2, you’ll need to unlock the respective dual-wield rear grip attachment for each handgun. These are all the Akimbo compatible pistols and how to unlock the necessary attachment: .50 GS: Level up to Weapon Level 17 – Basilisk: Level up to Weapon Level 28 – GS Magna: Level up to Weapon Level 9 – FTAC Siege: Get 25 Hip Fire Operator Kills with the FTAC Siege. – P890: Level up to Weapon Level 26 – X12: Level up to Weapon Level 19 – X13 Auto: Level up to Weapon Level 19 – For more on Warzone 2, be sure to check out some of our other guides: Best Warzone weapons: Ultimate tier list with meta loadouts | Best Warzone 2 loadouts: Meta weapons and classes to dominate in Al Mazrah | Call of Duty 2024: Early leaks, concept art, Warzone 2.0, Treyarch & more | Call of Duty 2023: Early leaks, Modern Warfare 2, Warzone 2, more | Best M4 Warzone 2 loadout | Best Modern Warfare 2 weapons: Ultimate tier list with the best classes | Modern Warfare 2 best settings on PC for FPS, graphics, visibility, more

Best AK74u loadout for Black Ops Cold War alpha ActivisionThe Call of Duty: Black Ops Cold War alpha is officially kicking off for PS4 players worldwide, and all we’ve heard from pros and streamers with early access is that the AK74u submachine gun is deadly. So, here’s the loadout you need to be running on your AK74u. It became immediately obvious when gameplay for Black Ops Cold War first started to be published that one gun was dominating the meta: the AK74u. We saw just about every top pro and streamer using it, and it can really melt your opponents by the looks of things. So, how should you build out your AK74u to dominate the competition? Let’s take a look. Best AK74u loadout in Black Ops Cold War Primary Weapon Ak74u – – Attachments Sound Suppressor – Foregrip – Tactical Stock – Fast Mag – Quick Draw Handle – 9.1″ Cavalry Lancer – – Secondary Weapon Gallo SA12 – – Tactical Equipment Stun Grenade – – Lethal Equipment Frag Grenade – – Perks Perk 1: Flak Jacket – Perk 2: Scavenger – Perk 3: Ninja – – Wildcard Gunfighter – – Obviously, this ideal loadout is likely to change throughout the course of the alpha and further down the line, but for now it’s able to mow down your opponents. Of course, with everything unlocked during the alpha test, you will be able to try out any number of weapon and attachment combinations. The addition of Gunfighter lets us have up to eight attachments on our gun, rather than the standard five, offering more functionality and options. If you prefer to use the Law Breaker wildcard, allowing you to use two primary weapons or alternate your perks, that could come in extremely handy too, especially if you would like to run an SMG/Sniper combo or similar. If you opted for the Danger Close wildcard instead, you’ll get extra equipment, so you could easily lose one of the above attachments and go with that instead. There are a few weapons that seem to be most common in the Cold War meta at the moment, including the MP5 submachine gun, the XM4 assault rifle and the sniper, LW3 Tundra. The AK slips in nicely here, and the fact it packs more than a punch often leaves it somewhere between MP5 and XM4 territory — but with the added bonus of being more functional than both. So, stop waiting and sort out this AK74u loadout so you can dominate the enemy!

Best AK74u Warzone loadout class: Attachments, setup, perks ActivisionThe AK-74u has been a reliable and effective choice in Warzone since its release in Season One. The weapon rewards aggressive players who are looking to push enemies at all times, let’s check out a loadout that fits this playstyle. While the AK-74u was among the most popular SMG picks at first, the gun has been heavily altered thanks to the Season 3 Reloaded update. With various nerfs and buffs coming through, you’ll need to adjust your loadouts to counter the new adjustments. It can still be a beastly tool in the right hands, so if you’re looking to make the most out of the fast-firing SMG, we’ve got you covered with the optimal AK-47u loadout for Season 3. Best AK74u loadout in Warzone Attachments Muzzle: GRU Suppressor – Barrel: 9.3″ VDV Reinforced – Stock: KGB Skeletal Stock – Underbarrel: Spetsnaz Grip – Ammunition: VDV 50 Rnd Fast Mag – Your previous AK-74u loadouts may still be effective in Season 3. Though with recent nerfs to Bullet Velocity and Maximum Range, they won’t be quite as optimal. Using the exact attachments above will give you the best possible setup to counteract the new downsides. For starters, the GRU Suppressor boosts your Max Range to near pre-nerf status with a 10% boost. Similar can be said for the 9.3″ VDV Reinforced Barrel which also comes with a hefty increase to Bullet Velocity as well. With these two attachments, you’ll have a slightly slower setup, but one that almost reverts the SMG back to its firepower before the latest nerfs. Read More: Best Warzone SMG loadouts – Meanwhile, the typical selection of Stock, Underbarrel, and Ammunition will keep you on par with other ideal loadouts. Best AK-74u Warzone loadout (Perks & Equipment) Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: CR-56 AMAX – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – When it comes to building out the rest of this loadout, you can’t look past the perk setup above. Overkill and Amped are among the most commonly picked options for good reason. With any SMG, you typically want a longer-range weapon on standby as your secondary. These perks allow you rapidly swap between guns, keeping you in the fight no matter how far you might be from the target. Read More: 10 most popular weapons in Warzone – Additionally, you can’t go wrong with the standard Semtex and Heartbeat Sensor to round out your equipment. So, there you have it, our best setup for the AK-74u in Warzone Season 3. If you think you’ve discovered a better option, be sure to join the conversation over on @DexertoIntel.

Best AK-74 loadout in Black Ops 6 beta: Class setup, attachments, perks DexertoThe AK-74 is a strong option in the Black Ops 6 beta that makes up for its increased recoil by hitting hard, especially with a meta loadout. It wouldn’t be a Call of Duty game without an iconic Kalashnikov, and the AK-74 fills that role in Black Ops 6. This powerful assault rifle is an underrated option that has gone largely overlooked, with the community instead favoring SMGs like the Jackal PDW and C9. Even so, the AK-74 is still a strong weapon that has one of the fastest TTKs in the game. This is offset by its substantial recoil, which makes it a gun better suited to high-skill players and those confident in their aim. If you want to get the most out of the AK-74, you’ll need a loadout that makes it easier to use and more consistent. Here’s the best class to use with the iconic rifle, including attachment, perks, and equipment. Best Black Ops 6 AK-74 loadout Optic: Volzhskiy Reflex – Muzzle: Compensator – Barrel: Long Barrel – Underbarrel: Vertical Foregrip – Rear Grip: Quickdraw Grip – Using a meta optic like the Volzhskiy Reflex is a must with the AK-74, as its intense recoil makes using iron sights tricky at the best of times. Some other good alternatives include the Accu-Spot Reflex, Merlin Mini, and Merlin Reflex. Speaking of recoil, a combination of the Vertical Foregrip and Compensator greatly reduces gunkick, making the AK-74 more accurate. This makes it much easier to take advantage of its fast time to kill by improving consistency. The Long Barrel is another great choice on the AK-74, boosting damage range more than any other attachment in the beta. This gun has excellent range and can even compete against snipers if you master its recoil, so improving range where possible is well worth it. For the final attachment slot, you are free to pick what suits your playstyle the most, but the Quickdraw Grip is our recommendation. It improves aim down sight speed, which is useful in a game as fast-paced as Black Ops 6. Best Perks, Equipment & Combat Specialty for AK-74 loadout The Recon combat specialty is a fantastic option, as it lets you see enemies through walls for a short time after respawning. This complements the AK-74’s high bullet penetration and damage, which lets it shoot enemies through more surfaces and walls than most other guns. To gain this benefit and make the most of the assault rifle, you’ll want to use these perks and equipment: Wildcard: Perk Greed – Perk 1: Ghost – Perk 2: Tracker – Perk 3: Vigilance – Perk 4: Double Time – Lethal: Thermo Grenade – Tactical: Flashbang – Field Upgrade: Assault Pack – Ghost has always been a strong perk in Call of Duty, preventing you from appearing on enemy UAVs and Scout Pulses. Just keep in mind that this year’s version only works when you are moving or playing the objective, so stationary players won’t benefit from its effects. You’ll need two more blue perks to earn Recon, and the best remaining options are Tracker and Vigilance. The former reveals enemy footsteps and pings enemies when you aim at them, while the latter displays an icon when you are on the other team’s minimap. These provide valuable information that lets you better judge when to be aggressive and when to play safe. Thanks to Perk Greed, you’ll have access to an additional fourth perk slot. This is best used on Double Time, a returning perk that increases the duration of Tactical Sprint, making it easier to get around the map quickly. For lethal equipment, a Thermo Grenade creates a large explosion that is deadly if it lands. Meanwhile, a Flashbang is the best overall tactical, as it blinds enemies, leaving them vulnerable and easy to beat. Finally, the Assault Pack replenishes ammo when placed, which helps keep your AK-74 topped up on ammunition. AK-74 pros and cons Where is the AK-74 in the Black Ops 6 meta? According to WZ Stats, the AK-74 ranks as the fifth most popular weapon, with an 8.23% pick rate, and is the second most popular AR behind the XM4. Despite its nerfed damage range, the Jackal PDW is still the most popular weapon in Black Ops 6. Some players still believe it is the best option, but an argument can be made for the XM4 AR being even more potent. In saying that, the XM4 is easier to use, but that doesn’t necessarily mean its better. If you are confident in your aim, the AK-74 kills faster and is an excellent option. How to unlock AK-74 in Black Ops 6 Beta The AK-74 is unlocked by reaching level 7, making it a relatively easy gun to get. It should only take a handful of games to reach this level, as all experience earned is doubled during the beta. Black Ops 6 AK-74 alternatives You should also consider using the best XM4 loadout and best XMG loadout, which are accurate weapons that perform well at both medium range and long range, just like the AK. Otherwise, make sure you are using the best controller settings and don’t miss out on the beta’s exclusive rewards.

6 best AK-47 loadouts in Black Ops Cold War for all playstyles Activision / TreyarchThe AK-47 is one of the most versatile guns in Black Ops Cold War and there is a loadout for every kind of playstyle. Whether you prefer to run and gun your way to victory, or methodically pick off targets from afar, we have you covered with our best AK-47 loadouts. The AK-47 and AK-74u have always been popular picks in the Black Ops series, thanks to their methodical fire rate, great accuracy, and high damage output. While this Russian rifle has often struggled to compete against Warzone’s meta guns, it has come back with a vengeance thanks to the Season 3 weapon adjustments. In fact, the AK-47 has been a popular pick amongst players since Black Ops Cold War released. To help you capitalize on this high-damage gun, we’ve outlined all the best AK-47 attachments, perks, and equipment you should be using to get a competitive edge. Most versatile AK-47 loadout Attachments Muzzle: KGB Eliminator – Barrel: 20″ Spetsnaz RPK Barrel – Body: Tiger Team Spotlight – Underbarrel: Spetsnaz Grip – Magazine: Bakelite 50 Rnd Mag – Handle: GRU Elastic Wrap – Stock: KGB Skeletal Stock – Secondary Gallo SA12 – Throwables Stimshot – Semtex – Assault Pack – Perks Perk 1: Flak Jacket – Perk 2: Gearhead – Perk 3: Ghost – Wildcard Gunfighter – If you’re after an AK-47 loadout that will have you winning games across all engagement ranges, then this is the build you’ll want to use. Just like our recoilless AK-47, this class utilizes the KGB Eliminator and Spetsnaz Grip to help control the gun’s vertical/horizontal recoil. The 20″ Spetsnaz RPK Barrel is also a must for those that wish to increase the AK-47’s effective damage range. While the lack of optic can make long-range kills a little more tricky, the majority of Cold War’s maps favor close to mid-range engagements. As a result, the Bakelite 50 Rnd Mag has been utilized as it only diminishes the gun’s ADS time by 15%, meaning you’ll be able to snap onto targets without needing to constantly pre-aim corners. This well-rounded class will remain competitive, no matter the map or mode you’re playing on. No recoil AK-47 loadout Attachments Optic: Microflex LED – Muzzle: KGB Eliminator – Barrel: 18.2 VDV Reinforced – Body: KGB Target Designator – Underbarrel: Spetsnaz Grip – Magazine: VDV 50 RND Fast Mag – Handle: GRU Elastic Wrap – Stock: No Stock – Secondary Gallo SA12 – Throwables Stimshot – Semtex – Assault Pack – Perks Perk 1: Flak Jacket – Perk 2: Gearhead – Perk 3: Ghost – Wildcard Gunfighter – This is arguably the most accurate AK-47 build as it utilizes the above attachments to greatly reduce the gun’s vertical and horizontal recoil. The KGB Eliminator and Spetsnaz Grip are the main attachments here as they negate a lot of vertical kick, allowing you to beam your foes without having to wrestle with the gun. Even when used full-auto, this AK-47 loadout barely moves. Whether you wish to melt through multiple foes on the game’s smaller maps or deliver devastating ranged headshots in Fireteam: Dirty Bomb, this loadout will enable you to do just that. In terms of perks, Flak Jacket and Ghost will give you the survivability needed to rack up those all-important Scorestreaks, while Gearhead will enable you to use your Assault Pack multiple times. Best competitive AK-47 loadout Attachments Optic: Millstop Reflex – Muzzle: Muzzle Brake 7.62 – Barrel: 20″ Liberator – Body: Steady Aim Laser – Underbarrel: Spetsnaz Grip – Magazine: 40 RND – Handle: Speed Tape – Stock: KGB Skeletal Stock – Secondary 1911 – Throwables Stimshot – Semtex – Assault Pack – Perks Perk 1: Tactical Mask – Perk 2: Assassin – Perk 3: Ninja – Wildcard Gunfighter – It’s often best to follow the pros when building a lethal loadout, particularly if you wish to max out your AK-47. Both Dashy and Scump have used this particular AK-47 build to great effect, often going on huge killstreak tears that result in quick victories. This class is one of the more balanced loadouts, as it both boosts the AK-47’s accuracy and damage, while also increasing mobility for those close-quarter skirmishes. After all, being able to zap onto enemies and remain competitive in close to medium range firefights is extremely beneficial. The recoil is slightly higher than the loadout above, but it remains competitive against the lightning-fast MP5 and MAC-10 builds that dominate the game’s smaller maps. Consider using this class if you prefer a well-balanced approach. Long-range AK-47 loadout Attachments Optic: SUSAT Multizoom – Muzzle: KGB Eliminator – Barrel: 20″ Spetsnaz RPK Barrel – Body: KGB Target Designator – Underbarrel: Spetnaz Grip – Magazine: VDV 50 RND Fast Mag – Handle: Gru Elastic Wrap – Stock: KGB Skeletal Stock – Secondary Gallo SA12 – Throwables Stimshot – Semtex – Field Mic – Perks Perk 1: Tactical Mask – Perk 2: Gearhead – Perk 3: Ghost – Wildcard Gunfighter – Black Ops Cold War’s Fireteam: Dirty Bomb and Combined Arms modes feature much larger scale maps and while close-quarter firefights are common, it’s often best to keep your distance and rain down terror from afar. Paired with SUSAT Multizoom optic and damage range boosting barrel, this AK-47 loadout is capable of some incredibly long-range kills. Simply find a decent choke point and unleash terror as your enemies run on to the objective. The Field Mic and KGB Target Designator will help highlight enemy targets, while Ghost will keep you hidden from any prying eyes. Of course, the added bulk of this loadout makes it rather unwieldy in close-quarters fights, so be sure to switch to the Gallo SA12 whenever you enter more built-up areas. Best ‘run-and-gun’ AK-47 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Suppressor – Barrel: 18.2 VDV Reinforced – Magazine: VDV 50 RND Fast Mag – Handle: Serpent Wrap – Stock: KGB Skeletal Stock – Secondary 1911 – Throwables Stimshot – Semtex – Field Mic – Perks Perk 1: Flak Jacket + Tactical Mask – Perk 2: Assassin + Scavenger – Perk 3: Ninja + Ghost – Wildcard Perk Greed – In order to compete with Black Ops Cold War’s highly mobile SMGs, you sometimes need to convert your AR into an SMG. Whether you prefer to seek out close-quarter firefights, or aggressively flank your foes, then this snappy AK-47 loadout will enable you to do just that. Mobility and ADS speed remains a big part of Black Ops Cold War, especially when you’re playing on maps like Nuketwon ‘84. As a result, we’ve utilized both the Serpent Wrap and KGB Skeletal Stock to minimize the more cumbersome areas the game’s ARs have. The Suppressor keeps you hidden when firing, while Ninja and Ghost give you plenty of opportunities to go on those stealthy flanks. If that wasn’t enough, the VDV 50 RND Fast Mag ensures you have enough ammo to melt through multiple opponents. If you run out of ammo, simply replenish it from fallen players or sneak behind an enemy and dispatch them with the 1911. Best objective AK-74u loadout Attachments Optic: Microflex LED – Barrel: 20″ Liberator – Underbarrel: Foregrip – Handle: Gru Elastic Wrap – Stock: No Stock – Secondary Diamatti – Throwables Stun Grenade – Semtex – Trophy System – Perks Perk 1: Flak Jacket + Tactical Mask Perk 2: Quartermaster + Gearhead Perk 3: Gung-Ho + Ninja Wildcard Perk Greed – If you’re one of the few players that like to play the objective, then this build will give you the tools needed to cap the point. After all, rushing to the point and trying to survive long enough can be incredibly difficult. Our objective-based build combines quick ADS times with great accuracy and mobility, giving you plenty of time to take out close to mid-range targets. Meanwhile, the combination of both Flak Jacket, Tactical Mask, and Trophy System will keep you safe from any explosives. Gung-Ho also enables you to fire your weapon and place equipment while running, so don’t be afraid to rush onto the point with your gun blazing. Once there, simply place down your Trophy System and begin scouring the area for nearby enemies. Capping points and racking up high kill counts is incredibly easy with this loadout. So, there you have it, six AK-47 builds that will suit every kind of playstyle. If you want to keep updated with all the latest Call of Duty news and updates, then follow us over on @DexertoIntel.

Best AK-47 Warzone loadout: AK-47 attachments, perks, more ActivisionThe AK-47 is one of the most instantly recognizable guns in the Call of Duty series and while it may not be as good as the meta ARs, it does pack a lethal punch when kitted out with the right attachments. While the FFAR and AMAX continue to dominate the meta in Warzone Season 2, the AK-47 has continued to fly under the radar. Despite having fairly high recoil and significant damage dropoff, this AR is cable of dishing out a lot of damage. While this Russian-made rifle may not be the top dog, it can still shine in Warzone if you’re willing to give it a chance. In order to help you get the most out of the AK-47, we’ve put together a loadout that you can use to help control this unwieldy beast. Looking for more of the best Warzone loadouts? Check out our list of guides below: Grau 5.56 | Kilo 141 | Krig 6 | CR-56 AMAX | M4A1 | FFAR 1 | Mac 10 | MP5 | Kar98k | HDR Best AK-47 loadout for Warzone Muzzle: Monolithic Suppressor – Barrel: 23.0″ Romanian Barrel – Laser: Tac Laser – Optic: Corp Combat Holo Sight – Ammunition: 40 Round Mags – Perks Perk 1: EOD – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Equipment Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Just like the majority of our Warzone rifle loadouts, the AK-47 greatly benefits from the added damage range and noise reduction offered by the Monolithic Suppressor. Being able to fire lethal rounds without giving away your position is always going to be hugely beneficial, particularly when you wish to keep a low profile. The 23.0″ Romanian Barrel also increase your effective damage range even further, while also speeding up your bullet travel time and mitigating some of the punchy recoil. Landing ranged shots with slower firing weapons can be rather tricky in Warzone, but this handy barrel helps decrease the travel time, ensuring your shots are both as accurate as they are deadly. While the Tac Laser can be spotted by eagle-eyed Warzone players, we think the decrease in ADS time, added aiming stability, and increase in walking steadiness more than make up for this. After all, the MAC-10 and MP5 are incredibly popular SMGs in Warzone, so it’s important to try and cover up any lengthy ADS times. Lastly, the Corp Combat Holo Sight and 40 Round Mags keep the highly damaging rounds accurate in close to mid-range firefights, while the extra ammo ensures you’re ready for every fight. If you want to try out some different weapons in Warzone, then check out our best Warzone weapons to replace the DMR guide.

Best 9mm Daemon Warzone class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup ActivisionThe 9mm Daemon burst onto the scene and has already made a strong case for being Warzone’s best pistol. Here is the best loadout to maximize the weapon’s potential. For the most part, pistols were nothing more than an afterthought in Warzone. The battle royale sequel drastically changed that by introducing water and making the only usable weapons underwater pistols. Suddenly, Infinity Ward manufactured a reason to use sidearms, and the devs doubled down by introducing Ashika Island and Vondel. Both Resurgence maps feature large waterways that force players to engage in water combat. And if you don’t have a pistol class as one of your loadout options, you will be in big trouble. So if you still haven’t gotten around to creating a pistol loadout in Warzone, the 9mm Daemon presents the perfect opportunity to do so. Contents Best 9mm Daemon Warzone loadout – Best 9mm Daemon Warzone class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the 9mm Daemon in Warzone – Best primary weapon to use with 9mm Daemon in Warzone – Best 9mm Daemon Warzone loadout Attachments Barrel: SA Longfire (+0.50, +0.40) – Laser: FJX DIOD-70 (-0.27, -51.00) – Rear Grip: SGT Grip (-0.81, -0.30) – Ammunition: 9MM High Velocity (+0.70, -9.00) – Magazine: 20 Round Mag – Infinity Ward revealed that the 9mm Daemon “features best-in-class semi-automatic fire rate.” The pistol performs closely to the P890 and X12 with a slower fire rate but harder-hitting damage. The Akimbo 9mm Daemon attachment is currently bugged, preventing players from equipping it. Once that issue is resolved, we recommend replacing the SGT Grip with Akimbo. Players will also want to unlock the Daemon as it introduces 9MM High-Velocity rounds. The ammunition type is a fan favorite on ARs and fundamentally changes how players will build their pistol loadouts. Increased bullet velocity at the cost of recoil is an appealing tradeoff for any loadout. Best 9mm Daemon Warzone class: Perks & equipment Base Perk 1: Double Time – Base Perk 2: Tracker – Bonus Perk: Resupply – Ultimate Perk: High Alert – Lethal: Throwing knife – Tactical Equipment: Smoke grenade – Double Time makes it easier to traverse freely, improving the duration of your tactical sprint. Next, we recommend using Tracker, as you don’t need to use Overkill with a pistol loadout. Tracker makes it easy to hunt enemies as they leave behind a footprint trail. Resupply will come in handy throughout a long Warzone 2 match, as you start with an additional Lethal and equipment recharges over 30 seconds. Finally, High Alert may save your life on one or two occasions, as vision pulses alert you when an enemy spots you. To round off the setup, we recommend using throwing knives to finish off downed enemies or take down multiple enemies at once without wasting ammo. And finally, smoke grenades are great for fleeing a gunfight or rotating in the final few circles. How to unlock the 9mm Daemon in Warzone Players can unlock the 9mm Daemon in Warzone 2 and Modern Warfare 2 Season 5 Reloaded by completing the free Sector E0 of the Battle Pass, then earning 15 Operator headshot kills with Pistols. Best primary weapon to use with 9mm Daemon in Warzone Instead of offering an alternative to the 9mm Daemon, suggesting a primary weapon to use alongside the pistol makes more sense. We recommend using the M13B because the AR has made a strong case for being the best weapon in Resurgence. Players will mostly be using a pistol on Warzone maps with more water, meaning Vondel and Ashika Island. For more on Warzone, be sure to check out some of our other guides: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work?

Best 9mm Daemon Modern Warfare 2 class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup Pistols have proven to be very strong in MW2’s multiplayer, and the 9mm Daemon is no exception. To help you get the most out of this new sidearm we’ve put together the best 9mm Daemon loadout in Modern Warfare 2. Season 5 Reloaded saw the arrival of the 9mm Daemon. Modern Warfare 2’s newest pistol is based on the real-world Staccato 2011, an improved version of the iconic 1911 that has appeared in several Call of Duty games. This is a fast-firing pistol with extraordinary range but below-average handling. Its stand-out characteristic is its almost non-existent recoil which makes it one of the easiest guns to control in MW2. To get the most out of the 9mm Daemon you’ll want to have the best Modern Warfare 2 loadout possible for multiplayer, and thankfully we’ve got you covered. Contents Best 9mm Daemon MW2 loadout – Best 9mm Daemon MW2 loadout: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the 9mm Daemon in Modern Warfare 2 – Best 9mm Daemon alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 – Best 9mm Daemon MW2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Forge DX30-S – Barrel: EXF Opal-9 – Trigger Action: Rapid 30 Trigger – Ammunition: 9mm High Velocity – Rear Grip: Daemon Hand – The 9mm Daemon is about as close as you can get to a genuine no-recoil gun. Even when building this pistol exclusively for mobility, it still barely kicks at all and is extremely easy to keep on target. It also has incredible range for a handgun effectively making it a pocket DMR. If there is one area it struggles in its handling. To improve this we use the EXF Opal-9 barrel which speeds up ADS and movement speed. This partners well with the Daemon Hand rear grip, enabling Pistol Fast Draw and further enhancing the Daemon’s handling. The 9mm Daemon is one of MW2’s only pistols that can utilize 9mm High Velocity ammunition which is well worth using as it makes it easier to take advantage of its excellent range. Since the base range is so good it’s fine to use the Forge DX30-S suppressor as the decrease to damage range isn’t significant. As with all pistols it is best to use the trigger action that maximizes fire rate. For the 9mm Daemon this is the Rapid 30 Trigger which raises its rate of fire from 462 RPM to 545 RPM. This bump in fire rate reduces the Daemon’s TTK making it extremely competitive in the process. Best 9mm Daemon MW2 loadout: Perks & Equipment Base Perk 1: Battle Hardened – Base Perk 2: Bomb Squad – Bonus Perk: Cold-Blooded – Ultimate Perk: Ghost – Lethal Equipment: Frag Grenade – Tactical Equipment: Snapshot Grenade – With how prevalent equipment is in Modern Warfare 2 it’s useful to consider running Battle Hardened which provides resistance against tactical grenades like Flash Grenades and Stuns. Equally, Bomb Squad reduces the damage dealt by lethal explosives like equipment and rocket launchers. There aren’t many Perks that can directly save your life but this is certainly one of them. Cold-Blooded and Ghost work in unison to make the most out of the equipped suppressor. With these three combined you will never show up on the enemy radar and hostile killstreaks won’t be able to spot you. For equipment, Frag Grenades are the best all-around choice thanks to their versatility and lethality. Meanwhile, a Snapshot Grenade offers a ton of utility as it can scan enemies through walls unveiling their position. How to unlock 9mm Daemon in Modern Warfare 2 The 9mm Daemon can be unlocked by reaching Sector E0 of the Season 5 Battle Pass and completing the following challenge: Get 15 Operator Headshot Kills with Pistols – Best 9mm Daemon alternatives in Modern Warfare 2 The best alternative to the 9mm Daemon is the P890, another pistol that has a spectacular TTK since it can take down enemies in just two shots. A more unique suggestion is the FTac Recon, another semi-auto gun that can dominate close to medium-range gunfights in the right hands. For more on MW2 & Modern Warfare 3, be sure to check out some of our other guides: Modern Warfare 3 (COD 2023): Warzone, maps, release date, more | Modern Warfare 3 multiplayer beta breakdown | Modern Warfare 3 movement changes explained | How to pre-order Modern Warfare 3 | Modern Warfare 3 Zombies explained | Modern Warfare 3 Carry Forward explained | All Modern Warfare 3 weapons & streaks

Best 556 Icarus Warzone 2 loadout: Class setup, attachments, Perks ActivisonThe 556 Icarus is a hard-hitting LMG in Warzone 2 that deals a serious amount of damage at long range with a meta loadout. Warzone 2’s ARs and SMGs will always be the most popular picks in Al Mazrah, but that often leads the community to overlook the huge amount of powerful LMGs. These bulky weapons may lack mobility, but they make up for that in raw firepower and accuracy, making them top-tier at long-range. One gun that is definitely worth using is the 556 Icarus as it features high damage, a lighter frame than typical LMGs, and a recoil pattern that’s relatively easy to control. Of course, in order to maximize the damage of the 556 Icarus in Warzone 2, you’ll need a meta loadout and luckily, we’ve got you covered. Contents Best 556 Icarus Warzone 2 loadout – Best 556 Icarus Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment – How to unlock the 556 Icarus in Warzone 2 – Best 556 Icarus alternatives in Warzone 2 – Best 556 Icarus Warzone 2 loadout Attachments Muzzle: Harbinger D20 – Barrel: FTAC Coldforge 16″ Barrel – Optic: Schlager 3.4X – Underbarrel: VX Pineapple – Rear Grip: Sakin ZX Grip – For starters, make sure to equip the Harbinger D20 and the FTAC Coldforge 16″ Barrel as these attachments will enhance the 556 Icarus’s damage range, bullet velocity, and recoil smoothness. On top of that, they’ll also suppress your fire, keeping you under the radar on Al Mazrah. Following this, utilize the VX Pineapple and the Sakin ZX Grip to heavily bolster the 556 Icarus’s kickback, making it easy to land shots on foes in long-distance gunfights. Finally, round off the loadout with the Schlager 3.4X for a clean optic that performs extremely well from afar, and will help you land as many shots as possible on target. Best 556 Icarus Warzone 2 class: Perks & equipment Perk Package: Weapon Specialist Base Perk 1: Overkill – Base Perk 2: Strong Arm – Bonus Perk: Spotter – Ultimate Perk: Survivor – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical Equipment: Stun Grenade – As for perk packages, we’ve opted for Weapon Specialist when it comes to the 556 Icarus as its adds an extra level of versatility to the loadout. First up, the bundle gives you access to Overkill which is invaluable when you’re running an LMG as it’s essential you have a close-quarter weapon on hand just in case you want to go aggressive and push an opponent. We recommend using the Fennec 45 or the Lachmann Sub as both decimate foes up close. Next, Strong Arm allows you to be more accurate with your throwables and throw them long distances. On top of that, Spotter ensures you’ll never be surprised by enemy equipment, killstreaks, or field upgrades. For the Ultimate Perk, Weapon Specialist uses Survivor which alerts your teammates of the enemy you get downed by with a ping and allows allies to revive you quicker. Finally, round off the setup with a Semtex for flushing enemies out of cover and a Stun Grenade for clearing enclosed spaces. How to unlock the 556 Icarus in Warzone 2 In order to unlock the 556 Icarus in Warzone, you’ll need to reach level 19 with the M4 AR. This shouldn’t take you too long, especially if you complete the challenge in MW2 multiplayer. Best 556 Icarus alternatives in Warzone 2 If the 556 Icarus doesn’t fit your style of play, then consider using the RPK, another top-tier LMG that’s one of the most popular picks in the current meta. Capable of beaming foes at long range with ease and outputting huge amounts of damage, this weapon is absolutely lethal with a meta loadout. That’s all for our 556 Icarus loadout! For more of our Warzone 2 coverage, check out these guides below: Do Warzone skins carry over to Warzone 2? | What are Strongholds in Warzone 2? | All Warzone 2 vehicles and Gas Stations | Does Warzone 2 have SBMM? | How do Warzone 2 circles work?

Best 556 Icarus MW3 loadout: Class setup, attachments, perks ActivisionThe 556 Icarus remains a formidable LMG in Modern Warfare 3, much like its predecessor. To gain a competitive advantage over your adversaries, consider employing the following optimal loadout for the 556 Icarus in MW3. After months of hype, Modern Warfare 3 has finally arrived. The game has over one hundred different weapons to play around with, and finding the perfect loadout is essential for success. Most will be immediately drawn to assault rifles like the MTZ-556 or SMGs like the Striker 9. But LMGs in MW3 are just as deadly. One is the 556 Icarus LMG, a heavy-hitting LMG with great ammo capacity. It may be from Modern Warfare 2, but is as relevant as ever. We’ve broken down the best 556 Icarus loadout in Modern Warfare 2 below, complete with the perfect attachments, perks, and equipment. Contents Best 556 Icarus Modern Warfare 3 loadout – Best 556 Icarus Modern Warfare 3 class & perks – How to unlock 556 Icarus in Modern Warfare 3 – Best alternatives to 556 Icarus in Modern Warfare 3 – Best 556 Icarus Modern Warfare 3 loadout Optic: Hybrid Firepoint – Barrel: FTac Coldforge 16” Barrel – Underbarrel: VX Pineapple – Stock: Corio Precision Factory – Rear Grip: XTEN Grip – Our loadout ensures that the 556 Icarus can deal with enemies in any medium to long-range engagement. This setup is perfect for those who like to run-and-gun or those who want to post up and become a human turret. Best 556 Icarus Modern Warfare 3 class & perks Modern Warfare 3 ditches the conventional perk system in favor of a gear-centric approach. Explore our full guide for an in-depth explanation of each gear item’s functionality. Optimal gameplay involves selecting perks that cloak player movement while maintaining awareness of their surroundings. Vest: Demolition Vest – Perk 1 – Gloves: Commando Gloves – Perk 2 – Boots: Lightweight Boots – Perk 3 – Gear: EOD Padding – Secondary: Renetti w/ Jak Ferocity Carbine – Lethal: Semtex – Tactical: Shock Stick – How to unlock 556 Icarus in Modern Warfare 3 The Icarus 556 isn’t unlocked by reaching a certain rank in multiplayer. Instead, it makes up part of the M4 weapon tree. To get hold of the LMG, you must use the M4 until it reaches level 18, and the 556 Icarus will automatically become available. Best alternatives to 556 Icarus in Modern Warfare 3 If the COR-45 doesn’t seem like the right fit for you, that’s alright! The next best option would most likely be the Holger 26 which is a new LMG that came with the release of MW3. The feel will be similar but more tailored to the pace of the newer title. That’s all for our 556 Icarus loadout in MW3. For more MW3 coverage, check out these guides below: Best Modern Warfare 3 AR class loadouts | How to slide cancel in Modern Warfare 3 | Best controller settings in Modern Warfare 3 | All maps & modes | How to play Modern Warfare 3 at 120 FPS on PS5 | Modern Warfare 3 TTK | How long is the Modern Warfare 3 campaign? | Campaign mission list | How to fix packet burst | How to play MW3 Zombies in third person

Best .50 GS handgun loadout for Call of Duty: Mobile ActivisionThe Desert Eagle, or the .50 GS as it’s known, is finally available in Call of Duty: Mobile. Once you get your hands on it, there are a few loadouts you might want to consider. Typically, with the start of a new Call of Duty: Mobile season, the developers of the popular mobile game add in a new weapon on top of the new characters, skins, perks, and maps. With the start of Season 12: Going Dark, the devs added new night mode maps – including Modern Warfare’s Hackney Yard – as well as everything they usually add, but they’ve added new events and challenges, notably, Small Arms. Completing the seven Small Arms challenges, in numerical order, will unlock the .50 GS handgun – which is just the Desert Eagle. It’s incredibly powerful, especially with a few different loadouts. Best CoD Mobile close range loadout for .50 GS handgun With it being a pistol, don’t expect to be using the .50 GS at long range. You might get some shots off, but it isn’t going to work as you might like. Instead, focus on getting up close and personal – even if that means shooting enemies in the back. For maximum damage at close to mid range, you’ll want an extended mag, a better trigger, and an extended barrel. For these, take the MIP Extended Light Barrel, Match Grade Trigger, and Extended Mag A. Take a laser and a bit of tape too, for those panicky, unaimed shots. Barrel: MIP Extended Light Barrel – Ammunition: Extended Mag A – Rear Grip: Stippled Grip Tape – Laser: MIP Laser 5mW – Trigger Action: Match Grade Trigger – Best Akimbo .50 GS loadout for CoD Mobile Alternatively, if you want to feel like you’re playing Modern Warfare 2, you can work in the Akimbo perk as well for a bit of additional damage. Read More: Which Call of Duty had the best Nuketown map? Ranked This loadout comes courtesy of YouTuber TouchKing, who uses a muzzle, barrel, laser, and trigger action as well. Muzzle: MIP Light Flash Guard – Barrel: OWC Marksman – Laser: RTC Laser 1mW – Trigger Action: Match Grade Trigger – Perk: Akimbo – As for everything else, you can pretty much finish your loadout however you want – including perks, equipment, and whatever else you want to bring into the fight. If you think you’ve got a better setup, be sure to let us know what you’re rocking by tweeting us – @codmobileclips.

Best .410 Ironhide Warzone class loadout: Attachments, Perks, Setup ActivisionThe new .410 Ironhide shotgun in Warzone is a lethal close-quarters secondary, but what loadout maximizes the weapon’s strengths and damage? Warzone Season 6 is finally upon us and that means there’s a variety of new content for the community to get stuck into. Whether you’re awaiting the upcoming Haunting of Verdansk event, rushing opponents in the new Gulag, or jumping back in Plunder, it’s an exciting time to be a Warzone player. However, despite all of these incredible additions, it’s the two new weapons that are receiving the most attention from the community with the GRAV AR and the .410 Ironhide shotgun being added to the title. While new ARs are added regularly to Warzone, some players are struggling to find the best loadout for the Ironhide shotgun, but luckily, we’ve got you covered. Contents Best .410 Ironhide loadout for Warzone – Best .410 Ironhide setup (Perks & equipment) – How to unlock the .410 Ironhide in Warzone – Alternative to the .401 Ironhide loadout – Best .410 Ironhide loadout for Warzone Attachments Muzzle: Agency Choke – Barrel: 22.3” Reinforced Heavy – Laser: SWAT 5mw Laser Sight – Stock: No Stock – Rear Grip: Serpent Wrap – First of all, you’ll want to equip the Agency Choke in the muzzle slot for increased bullet velocity, effective damage range, and vertical recoil control. Not only that, but the attachment also offers sound suppression which is absolutely essential in Warzone when attempting to remain undetected. After that, utilize the 22.3″ Reinforced Heavy to boost the gun’s damage range even further, as well as increasing the shotgun’s fire rate. Next, pick up the SWAT 5mw Laser Sight to increase hip-fire accuracy and the No Stock attachment improve overall mobility, allowing you to push enemies aggressively. Finally, round off the loadout with Serpent Wrap in the rear grip category just in case you need to ADS a target in an intense gunfight. Feel free to swap this out for a magazine if you’d prefer to have an extra few shots before having to reload. Best .410 Ironhide setup (Perks & equipment) Perks and Equipment Perk 1: E.O.D. – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: Cold War AK47 – Lethal: Grenade – Tactical: Stun Grenade – When it comes to perks, you’ll want to use E.O.D to reduce damage from non-killstreak explosives and Amped to significantly increase your weapon swap speed. Of course, as the .401 Ironhide is only effective at close-range, Overkill is essential as it allows you to run an AR alongside the shotgun. We recommend using the Cold War AK47 as it’s one of the strongest and most versatile guns in the current meta. Finally, pick up the standard Grenade and Stun Grenade to force your opponents to move out of a position, clearing the way for you to push. How to unlock the .410 Ironhide in Warzone Unlike a lot of weapons in Warzone, the brand new shotgun is incredibly simple to unlock and shouldn’t take you very long at all. Simply reach tier 15 of the Season 6 Battle Pass and the .401 Ironhide will be yours to customize and use in your matches. Alternative to the .401 Ironhide loadout If the .401 Ironhide doesn’t fit your playstyle, it may be time to try out the Gallo SA12 which has remained the most popular shotgun in Warzone for multiple seasons. This deadly weapon packs a punch at close range and is perfect for any players who like to close the gap on their opponents and put them under pressure. So, there you have it, that’s the best loadout for the new .401 Ironhide shotgun in Warzone. Don’t forget to switch up the attachments if they don’t match how you prefer to play, as finding the perfect setup all comes down to experimentation. Best streamer loadouts | Most popular Warzone weapons| Best Assault Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | Best Kar98k Warzone loadout | Best Stoner 63 Warzone loadout | Top 20 highest earning players

Best 3-Line Rifle Warzone loadout: Class setup, Attachments, Perks ActivisionThe 3-Line Rifle has made its way into the Warzone meta once again in Season 5 Reloaded. If you’re looking to make the most of this deadly Sniper Rifle, here’s our best 3-Line Rifle loadout in Warzone. Warzone Season 5 Reloaded marked the end of an era as the game’s final major update and introduced a huge number of balance changes for underused weapons. Thanks to the patch, all different types of guns can be seen around Caldera, from Assualt Rifles to LMGs. Sniper Rifles have also made a major comeback for the first time in many months, and the 3-Line Rifle is currently one of the top long-range options in the game. Here’s our best loadout to make the 3-Line Rifle the best it can be in CoD Warzone. Contents Best 3-Line Rifle Warzone loadout: Attachments – Best 3-Line Rifle Warzone Class: Perks & Equipment – How to unlock the 3-Line Rifle in Warzone – Alternative to the 3-Line Rifle Warzone loadout – Best 3-Line Rifle Warzone loadout: Attachments Muzzle: Mercury Silencer – Barrel: Kovalevskaya 820mm R1MN – Optic: 1913 Variable 4-8x – Stock: ZAC Custom MZ – Underbarrel: Heavy Foregrip – Magazine: .30-06 20 Round Mags – Ammunition: Lengthened – Rear Grip: Leather Grip – Perk: Silent Focus – Perk 2: On-Hand – Kicking things off in our best 3-Line Rifle Warzone loadout is the usual suspect — the Mercury Silencer. A handy suppressor that goes well with the Kovalevskaya 820mm R1MN Barrel as it increases speed and bullet velocity to counteract some of the lost range. We’re partial to the 1913 Variable 4-8x scope as it allows us to be a bit more flexible with our distances and the ZAC Custom MZ is an easy one here as the attachment improves the weapon’s speed. Meanwhile, the Heavy Foregrip offers a nice boost in aiming stability and recoil recovery, making those shots easier to land. We want .30-06 30 Round Mags to keep us stocked and Lengthened versions of the bullets will go some way to increasing its bullet velocity, making the gun an absolute laser. Coming to the end of this loadout now and we fancy the Leather Grip as it gives a healthy upgrade to weapon ADS, getting us down the sight of the 3-Line Rifle even quicker! On the other hand, Silent Focus makes us more resilient if we get hit whilst ADSing and Fully Loaded saves you money on Munitions Boxes. Best 3-Line Rifle Warzone Class: Perks & Equipment Perk 1: Cold-Blooded – Perk 2: Overkill – Perk 3: Amped – Secondary: MP40 – Lethal: Thermite – Tactical: Heartbeat Sensor – Cold-Blooded dampens the hopes of any Combat Scout users, keeping your secrecy under wraps. As good as this 3-Line Rifle loadout is, there are inevitably going to be fights fought in close proximity to an enemy, so Overkill allows us to sport an extra primary, such as the MP40. Finally, Amped quickens the switching weapon action and means that if you’re in a hurry, you can have said MP40 in your hands much faster. Thermite and the Heartbeat Sensor are items that have been used since Warzone’s early days and we see no reason why should change that now. How to unlock the 3-Line Rifle in Warzone There are no challenge conditions for the 3-Line Rifle, simply rank up until you reach Level 22. Once you’ve accomplished this relatively easy feat, you’ll be able to put the 3-Line Rifle into a loadout and set about upgrading its weapon level to acquire our selected attachments. Alternative to the 3-Line Rifle Warzone loadout The ZRG 20mm and Gorenko are some other unreal Sniper Rifles you can test out to see if they work for you in Warzone. With the meta being wide open now in Warzone Season 5 Reloaded, it might not be a bad idea to give some other guns a whirl. For more Warzone guides, have a look at what else we have for you: Best Warzone settings to increase FPS on PC| Most popular Warzone weapons | Best Sniper Rifles | All Warzone bunker codes | Best Warzone loadouts | Top 20 highest-earning players | Call of Duty Warzone Mobile: Everything we know | What is Sabotage Contract in Warzone? | How to level up Vanguard weapons fast for Warzone

Best 3-Line Rifle CoD Vanguard class loadout: attachments, perks, proficiency, setup ActivisionSniping has always been a staple in Call of Duty and what better way to do it than using the best 3-Line Rifle CoD Vanguard class loadout out there? Here’s the ultimate setup with attachments, proficiency, and perks. Call of Duty: Vanguard only has three snipers in the game but none can bring the power that the 3-Line Rifle can. Snipers allow you to control the tempo of the game, you can run in and quick scope your way to a V2 Rocket or you can take a laid-back approach and camp it out, picking off enemies one by one. So if you’re looking to play at a different pace than something like the Volk or NZ-41 go at, then you’ll want to take a look at this 3-Line Rifle build. Contents Best 3-Line Rifle Vanguard loadout – Best 3-Line Rifle Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment & Field Upgrade) – How to unlock 3-Line Rifle in Vanguard – Alternatives to 3-Line Rifle Vanguard loadout – Best 3-Line Rifle Vanguard loadout Muzzle: F8 Stabilizer – Barrel: Empress 700 TN02 – Stock: ZAC Custom MZ – Underbarrel: Mark VI Skeletal – Ammo Type: FMJ Rounds – Rear Grip: Leather Grip – Proficiency: Awareness – Kit: Deep Breath – The best 3-Line Rifle loadout is focused on maximizing the ADS speed of the weapon along with reducing the sway, as this will improve accuracy. For this, we start with the F8 Stabilizer and Empress 700 TN02 as these two complement one another really well. The stabilizer works to increase accuracy and range while the barrel reduces initial sway, making it more accurate. Next up is the ZAC Custom MZ which benefits every aspect of this weapon while hurting nothing that is important. This stock gives improved accuracy as well as ADS and walking speed while only slightly lowering movement speed. We also pair up the Mark VI Skeletal with Leather Grip as both of these attachments boost the ADS speed of the 3-Line Rifle. For the ammo, it is essential to run FMJ Rounds so you can hit wall bangs and make sure no one walks away alive. We don’t recommend using a magazine attachment as the cons outweigh the pros. Finally, you’ll want to use Awareness because it will let you see the enemy’s names from further away — which is key for sniping. Use this with Deep Breath in the kit slot and you will be able to stay aimed down sight for a long time. Best 3-Line Rifle Vanguard class (Perks, Equipment & Field Upgrade) Perk 1: Ghost – Perk 2: Radar – Perk 3: Tactician – Secondary: Machine Pistol – Lethal: Throwing Knife – Tactical: No 69 Stun Grenade – Field Upgrade: Tactical Insertion – When using a sniper, you are likely to be posted up somewhere, so Ghost will be an essential perk to keep your position hidden from enemies. For the second slot, Radar is by far the best perk in its section so you will always want to run this. In the third one, we are going to go for Tactician as we can resupply our No 69 Stun Grenades and set up easy kills on the map. Pair the 3-Line Rifle up with a Machine Pistol in your back pocket to finish off wounded enemies that may be pushing. Also, the Throwing Knife can be another key element to killing people that are running at you. When playing with a sniper your mobility is typically a lot slower than other weapons so we are going to use the Tactical Insertion Field Upgrade so we can mark where we want to spawn in the event that we die. How to unlock 3-Line Rifle in Vanguard It is quite simple to unlock the 3-Line Rifle in Call of Duty: Vanguard. All you need to do is reach level 22 and it will be available to you. Take advantage of 24/7 playlists like Das Haus or Shipment and you should be level 22 in no time. Alternatives to 3-Line Rifle Vanguard loadout If the 3-Line Rifle doesn’t work out or you want to try something else to compare it to, then the Kar98k is the next-best option. This classic Call of Duty sniper has been prominent in the franchise and is extremely good in Vanguard. Looking for more Call of Duty: Vanguard updates and information? Check our list of guides below: Best CoD Vanguard FOV settings | Best MP40 Vanguard loadout | Best M1928 Vanguard loadout | Every CoD Vanguard perk | Best Vanguard controller settings | Unlock Atomic camo

Best 1-shot Sniper loadout in Warzone 2 Season 3 ActivisionCall of Duty: Warzone 2 reintroduced 1-shot Sniper loadouts in Season 3, and if you’re looking to become a lethal marksman at range, here’s our best loadout for the job. After calling for the change long and hard, players finally got their wish in Warzone 2 Season 3 as creating a one-hit Sniper Rifle became possible in the game. The gameplay mechanic was a staple with OG Warzone snipers such as the Kar98k and Swiss K31, and the devs brought it back for Warzone 2 players. So, if you’re looking for a mean, hard-hitting 1-hit Sniper Rifle loadout to dominate in Al Mazrah and Ashika Island, then take a look at the best loadout for the job below. Best 1-shot Sniper Rifle loadout in Warzone 2 There are only a handful of Sniper Rifles that are actually capable of downing a player in one hit at the moment in CoD Warzone 2, but we think the best of the bunch has to be the MCPR-300. It was already a nimble, accurate, and deadly Sniper Rifle, but with the added effect of one-shotting enemy soldiers, it just became the best weapon for the job. We need to preface that in order to one-shot with a Sniper Rifle, you need to have Explosive Ammunition unlocked. Once you’ve done that, create this special MCPR-300 loadout. Muzzle: Nilsound 90 – Barrel: 22″ OMX-456 – Ammunition: Explosive – Laser: FSS OLE-V Laser – Stock: FSS Merc Stock – It still retains an emphasis on range and speed, which you will need if you’re going to run around the map one-shotting players, and the base stats help to naturally elevate the weapon anyway. Once you nail down the bullet velocity imparted by the Explosive rounds, you’ll become a one-shot king in no time! For more Warzone 2 guides to make you even more dangerous in Warzone 2, here are some guides for you: How to find a Golden Skull in DMZ Warzone 2 Season 3 | How to get the Tempered Plate Carrier in Warzone 2 Season 3 | How to unlock Cronen Squall | How to unlock Valeria & Alejandro Operators | Best Warzone 2 loadouts | 10 most popular guns in Warzone 2.0 | World Series of Warzone 2023 revealed | Warzone 2 ranked play | How many people play Warzone 2? Modern Warfare 2 player count

Behind the Scenes at CWL Seattle as Evil Geniuses’ ACHES and SiLLY Faced eUnited – “They wanted to drop YOU?!” The winners final match at CWL Seattle between Evil Geniuses and eUnited was a highly anticipated one, as it featured EG player Justin “SiLLY” Fargo going up against his former team eUnited – from which he had recently been dropped. Of course, the match was for a place in the grand final, with the loser being sent down to the losers bracket, and SiLLY and co. couldn’t have been more fired up for the match. eUnited were playing with SiLLY’s replacement, Tyler “FeLo” Johnson, and overall both squads certainly looked stronger than they had previously. This was both team’s first appearance in a winners final in the CoD: WWII season, so with the stakes high and the rivalry intense, everything was in place for a match to remember. With vocal leaders Patrick “ACHES” Price and James “Clayster” Eubanks facing off on opposite sides, it was also a contest of team spirit as it was of individual skill. With SiLLY going off, supported by stellar performances particularly from the AR play of Adam “Assault” Garcia and the fast aggressive play of 2016 World Champion Bryan “Apathy” Zhelyazkov, EG took the match 3-1. What made it more special of course, was the 2-5 comeback that EG made on the game 2 Search and Destroy, which got SiLLY very fired up. In Evil Geniuses most recent episode of ‘Up to Speed’, the show gives some behind the scenes looks at the squad pre, during and post match, including ACHES pumping up his teammate on the main stage. “Run it up Justin, run it up! Let’s go Justin! They wanted to drop you? They wanted to drop YOU baby?!” You can watch the full episode of ‘Up to Speed with EG CoD’ below, with their match against eUnited starting at around the 4:20 mark.

Behind The OpTic & FaZe CDL SCANDAL | Review Show The Reverse Sweep team is back after a chaotic week in the Call of Duty League, but Ian ‘Enable’ Wyatt, Jonathan ‘Pacman’ Tucker & Katie Bedford are here to take you through all the biggest moments in Week 3 Stage 3. The Dallas Home Series showed some teams putting on the best CoD performances they’ve had all season making the Top 10 highlight reel stacked with amazing plays. This week, the Reverse Sweep hosts gave their honest takes on what transpired after Atlanta FaZe’s 3-0 series against OpTic Chicago, the staying power of this Toronto Ultra team, and a lot more. FaZe/OpTic server situation Atlanta FaZe have been one of the most consistent teams in the CDL, and they were heavy favorites going into the series against OpTic. But after ATL beat CHI 3-0, people took to socials surrounding the situation of playing on the Atlanta servers. While there’s a lot that could’ve been done to mitigate the problem, Pacman still favored FaZe regardless of the situation. “OpTic is right to be upset. And then there’s the other side where, I’m looking at the history of the OpTic matches and how they’ve been going, had they played on a Texas server, I still think Atlanta would’ve won.” Toronto is going plus Ultra The rise of the Toronto Ultra has been a treat to watch for Call of Duty fans. While legacy orgs have deeply entrenched fan bases, you just have to respect the output Toronto Ultra have been showing, considering the players on their team. “They’re really showing you how far a team can go when you have a mix of both talent and teamwork, as well as a great overall understanding of the game… I think they’re poised to go back-to-back,” Enable said of their Major Championship chances. NY Subliners look scary with Hydra When Hydra came onto the team, there were a lot of questions if the composition would equate to a winning formula. But so far, Subliners are looking really good with their new player. Read more: How FormaL Became a Call of Duty legend – “We have Hydra really becoming a superstar SMG. He is a top-tier respawn talent as an SMG already. It’s just making their teamwork look so flawless,” Pacman said. Even though he needs to work on his S&D, Subliners are riding high with their new player. The good, the bad & the ugly! The Toronto Ultra are making a statement run in the CDL and Pacman had to single out the biggest contributor to their recent success – who could be making a case for MVP. Meanwhile Enable liked FaZe’s play as of late and gave credit to someone outside of the Tiny Terrors. As for LVPs, the decision was easy for some people, especially considering the aftermath of the OpTic/FaZe situation. For the entire Reverse Sweep review, make sure to check out the full video. For all Reverse Sweep CDL news, head over to our dedicated page.

Behind the New York Subliners’ CDL Champs “miracle run” NYXLThe Manhattan Miracle-Makers, the Brooklyn Bracket-Busters, whatever you want to call them, the New York Subliners pulled off the seemingly impossible at CDL Major IV and qualified for the Call of Duty League Championship in front of their hometown crowd. “They made the miracle run. I don’t even care about the Finals, they made the miracle run, bro.” Even after beating them in the Grand Finals, Los Angeles Thieves’ Sam ‘Octane’ Larew couldn’t help but marvel at what New York pulled off. Heading into the third Major, the underperforming Subliners had already made five roster and coaching changes. Those adjustments seemed ineffective, though, as the team got double-first-rounded at Major III – sitting 11th in the standings with 70 CDL Points, 40 behind 10th, and 50 behind 8th (the playoff cutoff). At that point, the sentiment was bleak – with defeated Reddit comments saying “Rip NYSL’s chances at Champs” and “Crim missing Champs don’t feel real.” Then, New York went a league-leading 4-1 in Major IV qualifiers. It wasn’t enough to rise past 11th place, but it did close the gap ever so slightly, putting them 30 points behind 10th and 35 behind 8th. Not mathematically eliminated from Champs just yet, at Major IV, hosted in their backyard, New York still needed to not only win their first LAN match at a Major this season but finish somewhere in the top three… while simultaneously relying on losses from the teams ahead of them in the standings. If that wasn’t enough, two of those teams, the Florida Mutineers and LA Guerrillas, won their first-round matchups. And New York started their own first round down 0-2 to the third: the Minnesota RØKKR. The reverse sweep heard around the world Down 0-2, one map away from elimination, New York refused to cave. With their most recent signing, Matthew ‘KiSMET’ Tinsley, leading the charge, the Subliners got loud and so did their fans. Over the first two maps, Kis was sitting on a 0.84 K/D. Over the next three, the entry sub pulled off a 1.29 to complete the reverse sweep. When asked if he noticed the crowd’s response to his plays, he recalled their impact vividly: “There’s obviously situations when you make a good play and people go nuts, your adrenaline just starts pumping and pumping and you can’t lose whenever people have your back that much.” While Kis fed off of the crowd, the rest of the team fed off of him. The winningest CoD player of all time, Ian ‘Crimsix’ Porter couldn’t see Kis popping off, but he did hear him: “When he started screaming, shouting I was like ‘oh my god.’ I felt extra aim assist … I was like ‘these guys are actually terrible’ all of a sudden.” With that reverse sweep, New York’s run remained alive. ROKKR and Guerrillas fortuitously lost their subsequent matches, leaving Florida – New York’s second-round opponent – as the lone team left to play spoiler. By then, it wasn’t just the fans backing the run, either. Even Atlanta FaZe superstar Chris ‘Simp’ Lehr couldn’t help but root for the Subliners, saying mid-tournament that “at this point, it’d be cool to see ’em qualify.” FaZe coach James ‘Crowder’ Crowder elaborated on that sentiment: “I have a lot of respect for Crim as a competitor … I think the way he competes and his true passion – it’s something special to see, so to see it be completed would be cool.” Pulling off the miracle run With the crowd described as “insane” by LA’s Kenny ‘Kenny’ Williams and the “loudest I’ve ever heard” by Florida’s Cesar ‘Skyz’ Bueno, the run continued. The RØKKR match may have been Kismet’s, but Round 2 against Florida belonged to Crim and Paco ‘HyDra’ Rusiewiez. En route to a 3-0 sweep, HyDra managed a strong 1.08 K/D and Crim… a vintage, dominant 1.32. “Crim was literally saying after each match, ‘I’m undeniable, they can’t kill me, we can’t lose.’ So when you have the best player that’s ever played Call of Duty sitting beside you telling you that, we had the most confidence.” As Kis explained, Round 2 was most certainly the Crimsix show. Sending the Mutineers down to Losers Round 3, where FaZe was able to dust them 3-1, the run lived on. Florida was up to 160 CDL Points, but New York owned the tie-breaker and finally controlled their own destiny – capable of securing Champs qualification by beating LA Thieves in the Winners Finals. Asked about Crim’s nerves mid-tournament, HyDra contended that “he doesn’t feel anything. He’s an alien or some s**t.” Crim clarified, “an NPC actually. My directive is to punish noobs.” The Subliners proceeded to beat LA 3-1 on Championship Sunday, completing the most unlikely of runs and securing their place at Champs—behind a 1.10 K/D from HyDra and a nasty 1.28 out of Kis. The new Subliners head to CDL Champs 2022 Perhaps unsurprisingly, New York, having already clinched the final spot at Champs, ran out of gas in the Grand Finals rematch against the vengeful Thieves. Finishing with 160 points, tied with the Mutineers and just five points ahead of the Guerrillas, the run was as remarkable as could be. Going 7-2 since Major III, New York more than doubled their points total to squeeze into the playoffs – where they’ll face a hungry FaZe squad in Winners Round 1. When the team moved on from their highly touted lineup with James ‘Clayster’ Eubanks and Travis ‘Neptune’ McCloud in March and April, this all seemed an impossibility. Few believed KiSMET and Paul ‘PaulEhx’ Avila would be enough to turn New York’s season around. But, as HyDra described, their intangible impact was invaluable: “We couldn’t get on the same page with anyone. I’m not even blaming [Clay and Nep], because it was like different minds I guess. But with Kis and Paul, we just understand each other.” For Crimsix, now en route to his 11th-straight CoD Champs appearance, there’s a simpler explanation for the new-look Subliners: “We became a team.”

“Beautiful” C4 Drone squad wipe gets Warzone dev’s seal of approval Infinity WardAn incredible team wipe in Call of Duty: Warzone showed how dangerous a ‘C4 drone’ can be, and the execution was enough to impress an Infinity Ward dev. By combining the hovering hitbox of a Recon Drone and an explosive charge of a C4, players can create a makeshift C4 Drone that lets them fly around with a bomb strapped to the device. The strat takes a steady hand to not only sneak up on a team, but get close enough to do damage. If the outplay wasn’t enough to impress the fans, user ‘arhayden’ gave the clip a bit of flair by putting it to the tune of Céline Dion’s My Heart Will Go On, a timeless classic for both fans of pop and perfectly timed memes. In the early phase of a Warzone match, the four-member team found themselves at the Airport near other teams. That’s when they hatched a plan to send the flying drone with an explosive ordinance at a squad up ahead. That’s when the ‘Fran Cam’ revealed all four players of the other team getting into a jeep – a perfect opportunity to send the whole team to the Gulag. But the chance was slowly slipping away from the player’s hand as the vehicle started to move away, starting one of the most one-dimensional chases seen in the game so far. There were a few times when the player got close just for the jeep to skirt away with the drone’s handler being heard anxiously saying: “I’m so close! Oh my God!” That is until the opponent made the costly mistake of hitting the breaks for a moment, giving Fran the greenlight to send erratic calls for Aaron, the player with the C4 switch, to ignite the drone and jeep. The sequence got the attention of Infinity Ward Studio Art Director Joel ‘ArtPeasant’ Emslie who complimented the “beautiful squad wipe” which left an unsuspecting team entirely decimated. For players thinking they can replicate the strat, all it takes is some communication and good timing with the C4 Drone to ruin a Warzone team’s day.

Former Battlefield manager warns EA to ‘step it up’ after Modern Warfare gameplay reveal Infinity Ward / EA DICENinjas in Pyjamas Chief Marketing Officer, and former Global Brand Manager at EA, Casey Al-Kaisy thinks EA is going to have to retool their approach to Battlefield in light of Modern Warfare’s new Multiplayer reveal. Modern Warfare is already shaping up to be incredibly popular with fans as Infinity Ward has been on point with hype-building in the lead up to the game’s October 25 release. Some of that attention stems from the advances in gameplay that will be seen in the next Call of Duty game, but it’s these new developments that has the former EA employee thinking it’s time for Battlefield to come out with something new to respond. In an August 2 tweet, Al-Kaisy gave his take on what the new 100-player Modern Warfare mode will mean for the franchise going forward while giving the EA FPS a word of advice to compete with Infinity Ward. “I can guarantee that Call of Duty is going to go full Battlefield as time goes,” Al-Kaisy said. “EA DICE will need to step it up. Enough with visual focus, people care about gameplay.” Fans of the FPS’s have long known what they’ve been getting into when buying into the Call of Duty or Battlefield experience, respectively. Amazing break down by @jackfrags. I can guarantee that call of duty is going to go full Battlefield as time goes. @EA_DICE will need to step it up. Enough with visual focus, people care about gameplay. https://t.co/agFPUWMN2s — Casey Al-Kaisy (@TheFixnow) August 2, 2019 Call of Duty typically features a more focused, sharp gameplay experience that capitalizes on smaller-scaled combat. Meanwhile, Battlefield tends to look and feel more like a warzone, featuring beautiful, destructible environments that hold up to 64 players. But it now looks like Infinity Ward is going to be encroaching on Battlefield’s long-time niche with the reveal of the gigantic Ground War playlist that is going to bring a franchise-first 100-player mode. While this is fantastic news for gamers since they’ll be getting an FPS with historically great mechanics, design, sounds, gameplay with the added integration of large battlegrounds, it might not bode well for EA Dice. In fact, when asked if Al-Kaisy had told EA Dice while working there about the impending need to change Battlefield’s focus to gameplay, the former EA employee simply responded by saying: “Hell yeah we did. But hey what do I know!” Modern Warfare is already looking like a fan-favorite and Infinity Ward still has a few months before launch, which might be a bad thing for industry competitors.

Battlefield developer was briefly banned in Black Ops 4 for being too good at the game Florian Le Bihan, Core Gameplay Designer for Battlefield V, was handed a ban in Black Ops 4 for what looks like being too good at the game. Like many people out there, Le Bihan has been playing a ton of Black Ops 4 since the game was released on October 12. For Le Bihan, though, it seems as though his immense skill at playing the game over the last couple weeks has resulted in him receiving a brief ban from the game. Le Bihan Tweeted a screenshot of his Black Ops 4 PC account on October 23, saying “So I got banned from Black Ops 4 LOL.” So i got banned from #BlackOps4 LOL. Could you please not @Treyarch ??? @TreyarchPC pic.twitter.com/EaZ4NvJeG1 — Florian – DRUNKKZ3 (@DRUNKKZ3) October 23, 2018 A couple hours later, Le Bihan followed up his initial Tweet with a highlight of some incredible gameplay footage. During the three-minute video, he can be seen racking up some ridiculously impressive pistol headshots while throwing in some nasty sniper shots to boot. Dear @Treyarch (also @TreyarchPC), Please find attached to this tweet (below) a great video of me killing some other players on #BlackOps4. Accept this as a token of my appreciation towards your game (please unban). P.S: Sorry for the bad edit, I know.https://t.co/grR2HreD20 — Florian – DRUNKKZ3 (@DRUNKKZ3) October 23, 2018 It seems that the crazy amount of headshots that Le Bihan was pulling in could have triggered the game’s automatic ban system after being reported by one too many players, as one Twitter user guessed that this was “surely a combination of many reports + a rate of [headshots] too high [being] considered suspicious by anti-cheat system.” [Tweet translated from French] This story has a happy ending, though, as Le Bihan Tweeted on October 24 that he had been freed and can now play the game. ⚠️Alright everyone!!! ⚠️ I AM NOW OFFICIALLY FREE! can play the video game again!!! Thanks @Treyarch @TreyarchPC. I’ll try to keep it cool for a bit now… promise… :upside_down_face: (btw please nerf dual wield saug, give some love to ARs and nerf op. modded Mozu on PC) #BlackOps4 pic.twitter.com/Vi0WnFUdOx — Florian – DRUNKKZ3 (@DRUNKKZ3) October 24, 2018 The developer didn’t end the ordeal without suggesting some balance changes to Treyarch, however, saying they should nerf the Dual Wield Saug 9mm SMG and giving Assault Rifles some buffs. While things worked out for Le Bihan, he’s an example of why it might not always be good to report players who repeatedly kill you in crazy ways since they could actually just be really good at the game.

Baseball superstar Mike Trout reveals his favorite Warzone guns during MLB game YouTube, MLB / ActivisionIn an unexpected crossover between Call of Duty: Warzone and professional baseball, superstar Mike Trout told fans his Verdansk gun preferences while literally playing in an MLB match. With pauses in the action throughout baseball games, fans and players come up with some interesting ways to pass the time. In what has become an increasingly prominent trend shared on social media, fans will often ask outfielders to answer questions by raising their left or right hands. That was the case during a recent Los Angeles Angels game, when a boisterous fan yelled out a Warzone loadout question to eight-time All-Star and three-time AL MVP Mike Trout: “MP5, right hand — MAC-10, left hand?” Two of the most popular submachine gun options in Verdansk history, Trout — unbothered by the curious interruption — answered with haste. Quickly raising and wagging his left hand, Trout repped the MAC-10 and elicited a mountain of cheers from the crowd. .@MikeTrout has spoken. Back to the Mac-10 meta in #Warzone 😂 (via @gabersaurus)pic.twitter.com/gLGbz8GsAX — MLB Gaming (@MLBGaming) April 29, 2021 With fans excited to see a top-tier baseball player support a top-tier Warzone gun, the clip was quickly shared across Twitter. After being reposted by an official MLB account, Trout and fans have dived even deeper into the unexpected crossover. While some are calling for Trout to get on Twitch, now that they know he has strong, unhesitant feelings about Warzone, the superstar is more focused on Season 3’s changing meta. MLB supported the call for Trout on Twitch and CoD’s official account even gave the MVP a new nickname: MAC-10 Mike. But he also got in on the action, giving a more elaborate answer for those curious about his loadout preferences. After Warzone Season 3’s update nerfed the MAC-10, FFAR 1, and tweaked a variety of other guns — Trout’s favorite gun appears to have changed. Following in the footsteps of Warzone’s top players, the MLB legend has moved on from the MAC and now prefers the “FARA or XM4.” Both guns are Black Ops Cold War assault rifles that tournament players have recently outfitted with submachine gun classes. If those are the types of niche weapon choices Trout is making, it’s obvious that he’s no casual when it comes to Verdansk. While no Twitch stream has been scheduled as of yet, it seems that fans can simply tap into MLB games to ask Trout their Warzone questions. And, considering these latest replies, that’s good to know because his advice seems useful.

Barebones concept for Black Ops 4 would be the perfect throwback playlist For old school Call of Duty players who prefer their gameplay to be more gunfights and less specialist abilities, a Barebones playlist in Black Ops 4 would resolve all your complaints. Recent Call of Duty titles Black Ops III, Infinite Warfare and now Black Ops 4, have all featured some form of ‘specialists’, granting players powerful abilities and weapons, earned through simply playing. They perform similarly to kill streaks, except they are not earned by successive kills without dying, which frustrates sections of the Call of Duty player base who feel specialist abilities/weapons are too easy to get and use. However, there could be a simple alternative provided, if Treyarch took inspiration from their 2010 Call of Duty: Black Ops. Fans of the original Black Ops may remember there was a unique playlist called ‘Barebones Pro’. It also featured in Modern Warfare 2, and removed all kill streaks from the mode. In Black Ops, Barebones Pro removed kill streaks, perks, camos, and attachments. Reddit user u/Logjamz suggested a reimagination of Barebones for Black Ops 4, removing specialists and scorestreaks, while also giving dedicated character models to each team, so that friendlies and enemies are easily discernible. This playlist would reduce Black Ops to pure gun on gun action, although the concept doesn’t go as far as to remove perks, or gear items like Armor and Stim Shot. Unlike older Call of Duty titles, Black Ops 4 uses the pick 10 class system (first introduced in Black Ops 2), meaning that removing perks/gear would give players too many class slots to use on attachments or equipment. Regardless, it is an intriguing concept, and one that would certainly excite those who don’t enjoy the impact of specialists on the traditional gun-on-gun action of CoD. Treyarch has said that they have a lot of plans for new content coming post launch, and have already added a new game playlist, with fan favorite party mode ‘Gun Game’ added on October 30 – although only for a limited time.

Banned ex-COD pro who was banned for hacking is trying to make a comeback ActivisionA former Call of Duty pro who was banned during the Call of Duty Championship, caught in a ban wave targeting hackers, is attempting to make a comeback — and has apparently been approved to compete by tournament organizers. In July 2023, Team Orbit was disqualified from the Challengers Champs after player Bryan ‘Jimbo’ Sabman was hit with a ban mid-event amid a huge ban wave from Activision that targeted hackers and those using cheating software. It was the first time someone competing in the upper echelons of COD esports had been caught cheating and left question marks over his teammates and to what extent Jimbo had been cheating during online matches and tournaments. While Jimbo initially put out a tweet — which has since been deleted, along with all other tweets on the account he got rid of — saying that it was a mistake and there was “no reason” for his ban, he did not respond to Dexerto’s request for comment at the time and the ban was never revoked. While Jimbo then went dark and didn’t show up again in the Call of Duty scene for several months, it appears he’s attempting to make his comeback, and Challengers administrators FACEIT are reportedly letting it happen. Jimbo, under the pseudonym Jimbolah, has signed up for the April 20 NA Challengers Cup alongside teammates Prospect, Archives, and TayBTC, and according to Challengers news platform The Rotation, they “won’t be playing” but have been given approval by FACEIT. Shortly after it was announced that Jimbo and his team were trying to compete in the Challengers Cup, FaceIT admins confirmed that Jimbo was NOT eligible to play and would not be participating. Ban evasion is a punishable offense by Activision and if Jimbo does play again, it seems unlikely that he’ll be allowed to simply continue as normal. If he does compete, opponents and viewers will question the legitimacy of his gameplay, and it may raise some awkward questions for his teammates too.

Baka Bros invite critic to attend Warzone LAN to end hackusations once and for all YouTube: RepullzeRepullze of the Baka Bros has offered to bring a Warzone hackusation YouTuber that claims DiazBiffle is cheating out to LAN to disprove those claims forever and there’s a spicy deal on the line. Cheating has been a major problem in Warzone. From players getting targeted in the competitive scene to content creators gaining huge audiences from gameplay that is quite literally too good to be true, it’s a situation with a very wide ramifications. Since the implementation of the Ricochet anti-cheat things have been a bit better, but that hasn’t deterred community watchdog channels like Call of Shame from making accusations against some of the biggest names in the game, and Repullze is ready to put the campaign against his teammate to bed once and for all. Repullze challenges Warzone YouTuber to put his channel on the line to prove Biffle is cheating Things popped off when Call of Shame tagged the two Baka Bros in a tweet insinuating that Biffle forgot to hide the footpedals he uses to cheat in a recent video that featured his setup. The notorious accuser doubled down, claiming that Biffle’s lack of a webcam only furthered proved the theory. “He doesn’t just have one, he has two of them! No webcam, no accountability! Now we know he uses rat pedals,’ the tweet reads. Naturally, Repullze didn’t take too kindly to that idea and instantly refuted the idea, claiming that anyone who makes these kinds of videos is simply clout chasing: “These fools knows streamers don’t cheat. But that wouldn’t get clicks would it?” It didn’t take long after that for Rep to raise the stakes and give the other creator the deal of a lifetime: An all-expenses-paid trip to the next Activision-hosted LAN event to watch the invited Warzone pros play in-person with the catch that CoS deletes their channel if their is no proof of cheating. If this goes down it would take the cake as the most drastic measure taken to clear anyone’s name in the scene so far. There’s been no response to that invitation at time of writing, but we’ll be sure to bring the latest updates around the situation as they unfold.

Team Repullze wins Baka Bros $50K Warzone Rebirth tournament: Final results Baka BrosJust a few short months after running Warzone’s very first major LAN event, the wild streaming trio that is the Baka Bros put together a $50k Warzone tournament on Rebirth Island. While Team Repullze came away with the overall win, we’ve got you covered with a full breakdown of how it all played out. Team Repullze wins $5K bonus as top overall squad. – Emsage, Jezuzjrr, & Envailed finish as the top Trio. – $50,000 prize split across 10 custom games. – With the newly revamped version of Rebirth Island currently in the spotlight, the Baka Bros just launched their very own tournament on the map with some major stakes involved. $50,000 was up for grabs, with many of Warzone’s top stars duking it out across the day. From which team took the crown, to a look at individual lobby winners, here’s all you need to know about the Baka Rebirth tournament. Baka Bros $50k Rebirth tourney results Top overall Trios Custom Lobby breakdown Baka Bros $50k Rebirth tourney stream & schedule While fans could watch the tournament from the POV of their favorite streamers, we’ve embedded Repullze’s channel here so you can catch up on the full Baka Bros experience. The qualifiers were first up on April 4 with the main event landing a week later on April 11. Below is a full look at the schedule for both days of action. Qualifiers: April 4 12pm – 3pm PST — Public kill race – 3.30pm – 6pm PST — Private custom lobby – Main event: April 11 4pm – 8pm PST — 10 games of Rebirth for qualified teams – Prizes will be awarded after each game – Baka Bros $50k Rebirth tourney format With this $50K tourney split across two days, the qualifiers and the main event both featured different formats. The qualifiers dropped teams into kill races at first, before swapping to custom lobbies for the final six games. Only the top three teams at the end of the day advanced to the main event. Speaking of, the main event format consisted entirely of custom game action. Trios played 10 games in total on Rebirth, with points awarded for kills and placement in each lobby. Below is a full breakdown of the prize pool split: $30,000 split across 10 games – $3,000 for each game-winning Trio. – All Trios on the winning Captain’s team win a bonus – $5,000 split among all players. – Remaining $15,000 split among the Top 3 overall Trios: 1st: $8,000 – 2nd: $5,000 – 3rd: $2,000 – – $50K BAKA REBIRTH https://t.co/XzdmZQfSAa First 50 trios to sign up for the qualifiers get to play for a chance to compete in the Main Event!!! Qualifiers will be contacted once finalized. #BakaRebirth pic.twitter.com/DOPVGqRxzu — The Baka Bros (@thebakabros) April 1, 2022 Baka Bros $50k Rebirth tourney teams Following on from some early qualifiers, a full draft was hosted just one day prior to the main event. It was during this draft that Captains JGOD, Repullze, and Lucky all picked their favorite Trios to represent them in the tournament. From Tommey and Aydan to Biffle and ZLaner, there was no shortage of massive Warzone stars featured in this $50K tourney. Read More: Ultimate Warzone event calendar – Below is a full look at every Trio that dropped into the event, along with their respective teams.

Aymeric Laporte’s esports org signs EU Warzone pro WarsZ Aym EsportsAym Esports, the esports organization owned by Manchester City star Aymeric Laporte, has announced the signing of European Warzone star Kacey ‘WarsZ’ Channer ahead of the World Series of Warzone tournament. Aym Esports was founded in late 2021, bolstered by the backing of four-time Premier League champion Aymeric Laporte. Since then, the organization has not been shy about moving into new spaces and picking up teams across different esports. At the time of writing, they have teams and players competing across League of Legends, Call of Duty, Apex Legends, and Fortnite, with the promise of “more coming soon.” Their all-Spanish Call of Duty team even came 4th in the Call of Duty Challengers Finals in August, making their mark on the CoD space. Now, they’re looking to integrate even further into the scene, as Aym have announced the signing of top European Warzone pro WarsZ. WarsZ has been a dominant force in the Warzone scene, with some huge wins to his name. He came first in the 2021 World Series of Warzone trios tournament, as well as multiple big wins across tournaments hosted by Call of Duty League organizations, including New York Subliners and Toronto Ultra. He ranks 11th in total esports earnings, just behind fellow UK countrymen Liam ‘Jukeyz’ James and Ethan ‘Fifakill’ Pink. WarsZ is taking part in the 2022 World Series of Warzone and is actually representing CDL side Paris Legion at the tournament. He will be hoping to go back-to-back with WSOW wins and kick off his Aym Esports tenure in style.